Fanuc Fapt Ladder II Operator

GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT LADDER - II Operators Manual B- 66184EN/02

April 1998

Warnings and notices for this publication

GFLE-003

Warning In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as “impossible”.

Notice This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation CIMPLICITY®

Genius®

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation Alarm Master CIMSTAR Field Control Genet Helpmate LogicMaster Modelmaster PowerMotion ProLoop

PROMACRO Series Five Series 90 Series One Series Six Series Three VuMaster Workmaster

© Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

[Notice] 1. The FAPT LADDER-II software is copyrighted by FANUC Ltd. 2. No part of the software or this manual may be used or reproduced in any form without the prior consent of FANUC Ltd. 3. The software shall be installed on no more than one computer at a time. Separate software packages must be purchased for each additional installation. 4. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

[Trademarks] 1. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. 2. PC/AT and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. 3. PR2OlH is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. 4. VP1000 is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as “impossible”.

CONTENTS

1.

GENERAL 1.1

OVERVIEW

.

1.2

THE MAJOR

FUNCTIONS

1.2.1

1.3

2.

3.

4.

.

. . .

The Overview

. . . . . . . .

PMC Models

1.2.3

The Procedure

ABOUT

PMC PROGRAM PMC Programming Symbol

.

ENVIRONMENT

.

.

OF PACAGE

INSTALLATION

............................

3.3

DIRECTORY

3.4

FILE CONFIGURATION

CONFIGURATION

. .

.

.. .

3.4.2

The Constitution

. . . .

...

. .

AFTER

of Source

4.4

INITIAL MENU

SYSTEM

OPERATIONS

.

............. .............

4.4.3

On-Line

Functron

.............

Termination

.

.

.. . .

. . .

.

. .

.

17

. .. . . . .

.

. .

20

22

(Selected

25 25

.

.

.. .

.

26 27

Program)

27

...................... ...

27

............

. . . . .

................

FUNCTION

Editing

16

20

.......................... ...............

Title data editing

4.5.2.2

Ladder

diagram/step

4.5.2.3

Symbol

& comment

ediling

4.5.2.4

Message

edrlrng

...............

4.5.2.5

I10 module

4.5.2.6

System

parameter

. . .. . . .

. .

. .

. .

. .

. . . .

.

27

.

. .

28 28 28

4.5.2.1

editing

. . .

,. . .. . .

..............................

4.5.1

. .

, ..

Selection

Function

13

14

......

Function

4.4.6

13

.

. _ _ ........

Program

Utility

.

13

14

........

. _ _ .......

Off-Line

4.4.5

.

. .

17

4.4.1

On-Line

.

.

14

..................

4.4.4

. . . . .

.

. . . .

Program

4.4.2

OFF-LINE

. . . . . .

_ ................

Menu Configuration

COMMON

.

INSTALLATION

.

OF OPERATIONS

4.3

. . . . .

..........................

GENERAL

.

.........................

File System

4.2

.

.

. .

.......................

3.4.1

4.5.2

.

.................

THE CONTENTS

4.5

Program

. .

3.1

ACTIVATION

. .

.

AND INST ALLATlON

OF PACAGE

4.1

. . .

. .

SYS

OPERATION

.

.

. .

Data

3.2

4.2.1

. .

Method

& Comment

. . . . . .

. .

. . .

. . . . .

About

.

. .. . . .

to Make a Sequence

1.3.1

THE CONTENTS

. . . .

to be Supported

1.3.2

CONFIG.

. .. . . . . .

of PMC Function

1.2.2

OPERATING 2.1

.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30

sequence

32 87 92

......... editing

edrting

........ .... .....

_ ..

94 97

4.53

................................................

Printout

453.1

Overview

4.5.3.2

Starting

4.5.3.3

Output

4.5.3.4

Print format-l:

4.5.3.5

Changing

4.5.4

and ending

Changing

DAT/’

Compile

4.5.4.3

Password

Operation

455.2

Decompile

4.5.5.3

Password

4.5.5.4

Outputting

..................................

......................................

133 136

...........................................

...................................

to split files

4.5.6.3

Transfer

4.5.6.4

Memory

4.5.6.5

Handy

4.5.6.6

Backup

card interface file + 3.5”

Compiler

4.5.7.2

Decompiler

4.5.7.3

Modifying

138

........................

FA writer)

140

...............................

in the personal

floppy

142

computer

disk (MS-DOS

format)

and memory

Editing

157

initial values

4.5.8.1

Conversion

of a source

Conversion

of a mnemonic

4.5.8.3

Mnemonic

4.5.8.4

Sample

mnemonic

files (single-format)

...........

4.5.8.5

Sample

mnemonic

files (all-format)

4.5.8.6

The note if the step sequence

159

to a mnemonic

file to a source

file

program

159

.............

162 163

...................... .........................

function

174

.................................................

4.5.9 4.5.10

Selecting

On-Line

Function

from Off-Line

175 Function

4.6.1.1

Outline

4.6.1.2

Starting

4.6.1.3

Menus

Preparation

of Online

Function

................................

............................................. the on-line

function

..................

180 181

...................................................... The Outline

172

173

................................

file execution

166

is selected

...................................

a model

158

.............

...................................

file format

User batch

(OPTION.CNF)

......................................... program

150

155

.......................................... option

144

155

............................................

program

. .

153

....................................

Options

4.5.8.2

Utyilty

card

.................

.................................

of user program

Program

138

.......................................

(PMC writer,

to and from PMC

4.5.7.1

4.6.2.1

137

.............................................

4.5.6.2

ONLINE

129

132

ROM writers

4.6.2

128

...........................................

I/O port setting

4.6.1

125

131

4.5.6.1

Mnemonic

124

......................................

option

Input/Output

4.5.8.7

123

............................................

when setting

4.6

..........................

specification

set function

4.5.5.1

4.5.8

112

....................................

options

Decompilation

Setting

.......................

file)

.............................................

Compilation

4.5.4.2

4.5.7

111

format-2

.INF/message

the printer

103

............................

menu

output

Start and terminate

4.5.6

102

....................................

SETUP

printer

..............................

printing

item setting

4.5.4.1

4.5.5

101

...........................................

(AMOFTRP, 4.5.3.6

101

..............................

181 181 184

.............................................

191

..............................................

192

Connecting

the cable

...................................

192

screen

Parameter

4.6.2.3

Modifying

4.6.2.4

Starting

and stopping

the on-line

monitor

function

4.6.2.5

Starting

and stopping

the on-line

monitor

function

4.6.3.1 4.6.3.2

Selecting

4.6.3.3

Exit

Diagnose

Executing

4.6.4.7

Displaying

4.6.5.2

Storing

to the PMC

4.6.5.3

Writing

to F-ROM

a ladder

program

................

Communication

4.6.7

Examples

............................

program

held by the PMC

...........

program

held by a personal

computer

......................

....................

.....

. .

240

254

. .

.

255

. . . . .

255

.

.

255

. . . .

256

. . .

256 257

.

.

257 257

EDITING

......

. . .

..........

...................

SEQUENCE

............... Ladder

5.5.3

Error (at Editing

Step Sequence)

5.5.4

Warning

(at Editing

8, COMMENT

.....

.

Diagram)

Ladder

. .

....

................... ....................

. .

......

Diagram)

EDITING

259 259

......

259 260

....

262

.

..........

263

.

.......................... EDITING

. . .

......

Fatal Error

258 258

EDITING

Error (at Editing

Error

240

.

.

.......................

5.5.1

5.7.1

. .

........................

PARAMETER

235 236

..................

5.5.2

Error

234

.

. . .

.

EDITING

Error

G : MESSAGE

. . . .

252

..........................

E : LADDER/STEP

F : SYMBOL

234

. .

.

.......................

B : TITLE EDITING

D : SYSTEM

. .

...

.....................

LIST

..

232

.

238

a ladder

Error

. .

...............................

a ladder

Warning

231

.....................................

Monitoring

5.3.1

218

. . . .

. .

...............................

Monitoring

5.3.2

. .. .

.

4.6.7.2

Error

216

.

4.6.7.1

C : 1’0 MODULE

. . .

..............................

of Operation

MENU

215

. . . a 233

.......................

information

from the PMC

4.6.6

5.6.1 5.7

system

Loading

5.4-l

5.6

...............................

or stopping

4.6.5.1

5.2.1

5.5

.................................

status

.......................................

Input/Output

.

.............................

Status window

201

.

..............................

window

4.6.4.6

.

.................................

monitor

PMC alarm

5.1.2

198 198

PMC Parameter

Error

196

.

200

4.6.4.4

Fatal Error

196

.

.

4.6.4.5

5.1.1

. . . .

. .

Signal

INITIAL

195

.

4.6.4.3

A:

. . . .

. .

...........

functron

194

.

4.6.4.2

5.1

5.4

from on-line

. .

.........................................

Ladder

MESSAGE

5.3

function

194

.........................................

PMC Status

ERROR

5.2

.........

..........................

Mate-H)

off-line

193 .

......................................

4.6.4.1

4.6.5

.

............................................. Fitesave

4.6.4

5.

Fife

monitor

.............................

parameters

(Only for Power 4.6.3

for on-line

..................

4.6.2.2

.

.

.

. .

263 263 263

I.

BASICS (NORMAL OPERATIONS)

,,,,,, ,,,

,,

.

,,,

,,,

1. GENERAL

1.

GENERAL

1.1 Overview Thank you for purchasing

FAPT LADDER-II

FANUC

is a programming

This software

is designed

and supports

both the Japanese

see Chapter

to operate

for developing

on IBM PC/AT

and English

FANUC

PMC sequence

and compatible

languages.

Name

computer

computers

For details

programs. running

of the operating

compatible

Specification

FAPT LADDER-II

IBM PC/AT and

MS-DOS, conditions,

A08B-9201

Remarks

-J503

are specific

explains

procedures

to the system

For PMC operations

manual

required

designed

to install,

activate,

for use with personal

and how to create

PMC-MODEL

Programming

Japanese

and English

are

both supported

machine

This manual

Inquiry

system

2.

Personal

T FANUC

FAPT LADDER-II.

PMC sequence

and operate

this software

about

that

computers. programs,

refer to the manuals

listed below.

PAl/PAB/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RBG/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2

(LADDER

language)

J B-61 863E

form

If you have any questions use the inquiry

after reading

form attached

at Appendix

this operator’s 9 to consult

-l-

manual

and the manuals

us the questions.

listed

above,

1. GENERAL

The following

1)

abbreviations

are used in this manual.

For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC-R

.

PMC Models

Series PMCRA3

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RA3

. PMCRB3

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

FIB3

PMCRB4

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RB4

PMCRB5

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RB5

PMC-RB6

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RB6

PMCRC3

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RC3

PMCRC4

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

RC4

PMC-PA3

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

PA3

PMC-QC

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

QC

PMC-NB

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

NB

PMC-NB2

FANUC

PMC-MODEL

NB2

.

2) Others MS-DOS between

and PC-DOS

are both referred

the two operating

to simply

systems.

-2-

as DOS, unless

it is necessary

to distinguish

1. GENERAL

1.2 The Major Functions 1.2.1 The overview of PMC function

L

. . . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . .

.

...)

CNC

(..........

RS-232-C

i

Machine

Tool

DVDO

PMC

RS-232-C

” .,.,,..

.

...

(INLINE

functions through RS-232-C (Note 1) Monitorring & debugging a sequence program Run/Stop a sequence program Transferring a sequence program Write to Flash ROM I Setting and display PMC parameters

FLOPPY CASSETTE /Handy File

j

II::::‘. EPROM/ ROM MODULE

1

RS-232-C

Personal Floppy

disk

Input/Edit sequence program

computer

IBM PC/AT

Hard disk

Fig. 1.2.1

Note 1)

The specification Also,

the above

function,

of the above functions

may

General

functions

,,

may vary

not be usable

refer to the PMC programming

-3-

,,

of PMC Function

manual

from

with some

one

PMC

models.

for the model

model

to another.

For details

being used.

of each

1. GENERAL

< Functions

of FAPT LADDER-II

Input, Output, Monitoring (Display

.

Display

of signal status, monitoring

Setting

and display

Run/Stop

of sequence PMC alarm,

of ladder

Writting

.

Print of the sequence

PMC status.) Display

of cross

reference.)

program

of sequence

.

diagram.

program program

PMC parameters

the sequence

Transferring

.

and Edit sequence

and Debugging

(Online

c PMC built-in

>

program

to Flash ROM

functions

Input, Output, Monitoring (Display

program

>

Display

and Edtt sequence

and Debugging of signal status,

of sequence

program program

signal waveforms,

ladder

diagram,

PMC alarm,

memory)

(and crossreference.) (Monitorring Setting

.

1.2.2

of ladder

and display

Run/Stop

diagram,

step sequence.

Debugging

PMC parameters

the sequence

program

PMC models to be supported

PMC models

to be supported

by FAPT LADDER-II

are as below.

PMC-RA3 PMCRB3

(Note

1)

PMCRB4

(Note

1)

PMC-RB5

(Note

1)

PMC-RB6

(Note

1)

PMCRC3

(Note

1)

PMCRC4

(Note

1)

PMC-PA3

(Note

1)

PMC-QC PMC-NB PMCNB2

(Note 1)

ONLINE

function

is supported

with this PMC

-4-

user C language.)

.

1. GENERAL

1.2.3 The procedure to make a sequence

program

Start of control system development + Decrde the control object (machines,

CNC)

t Decide the specifications of control operations Calculate the number of DVOO points Estrmate the control scale

Create the ladder diagram (desrgnicreate

addoress mapcoading)

J Input, edit, debua and print the sequence procvam

t

t FAPT LADDER-II

CNC (PMC)

7

Ladder diagram editing Mnemonic editing

. Ladder diagram editing

Compile/Link

I

I

I

f-

Decompile (1

t ONLINE

I

function (for debug)

Pnnt the sequence FAPT

LADDER-II

program

IN0 YES

I

fi-----c

supports an off-line function and on-line functions.

used for performing

programming

using a personal computer

The off-line function

that is not connected

is

to the CNC

(PMC). The off-lrne function IS equrvalent to the FAPT LADDER for programming

when a connection

function.

and communication

The on-line functions are used

are established

with the CNC (PMC).

There are basically two on-line functions: the on-line function and the on-line (selected function. mainly

The former is designed to monitor

and

edit

Addrtionally. a PMC programming Thus version of FAPT

LADDER

LADDER

for personal

operator’s

manual (B-661 31).

for use wrth CNC (PMC) internal programs.

programs

designed

to operate

system, FAPT LADDER IS not covered

computers,

refer

to the

-5-

the

The latter is used

personal

(for personal computers),

by this manual. FAPT

on

LADDER

For informatton (for

program)

personal

computer. is available. about FAPT computers)

1. GENERAL

1.3 About PMC Program 1.3.1

PMC programming method

The ladder method is most of ten used for programming This

method was derived from relay-panel

control circuits.

many sequence engineers are already fatiiiiar The greater complicated

the number

of functions

the sequence control governed by a PMC. Since it has been in use for years,

with it.

implemented

the sequence program becomes.

by the

PMC,

the

And it is hard to describe

larger

and

the

more

such program for ladder

method. To overcome

this problem, step sequence

method programming

has been introduced

into FAPT

LADDER-II. (1)

What is the step sequence

method

?

The step sequence is one of the method for programming programmable a flow chart. method.

a sequence control governed by a

controller, this method features the direct representation Each block of processing

is described

Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand

of the control flow on

as a subprogram,

visualized

using the ladder

flow of the processes

and is

well-suited to the control of entire process. Step sequence method is available to PMC-RB4&lBG/RC4. The programming by step sequence method is supported by FAPT LADDER-II, not but by the builtin editing function on PMC-RB4/RBG/RC4. Setting a model in FAPT LADDER desides witch method, step sequence or ladder, is used. For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual. (4.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]

-6-

1.

The configuration A sequence

.

of a sequence

program

program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit ;

The 1st level of ladder The 2nd level of ladder The 3rd level of ladder Subprograms

of ladder

Subprograms

of step sequence

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

ISub Program

Pl (Step Sequence)

I

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

. . Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

-7-

GENERAL

1. GENERAL

(3)

Data flow -

FAPT LADDER-II

I

Source program Ladder 1st

level Mnemonic

Mnemonic

program

A mnemonic program without step sequence

t Compilation/Decompilation 1 Object code

IMemory I

card format file I

t

‘------I! I

I

RS-232-C

Input/Output

Input/Output

I

Handy File FLOPPY CASSETTE

Memory card ADAPTER

CNC V

v

[PMCI 2) II/O1

1) F’MCI 2) II’01

3) [HOST]

3) [FDCAS]

1)

V

1) WC1 2) If/O1 3) [MCARD] (Boot process also can read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when Input/output

-8-

1. GENERAL

1.3.2 About symbol & comment data On FAPT LADDER-II,

you can assign

add notes to a sequence They are generally

called”symbol

(1) The definition

of terms

The definition

names

& comment

of terms are shown

below

to l/O signals,

internal

relays,

and can

Name assigned

data”.

to distinguish

Definition

Terms Symbol

or add notes

program.

between

and uses

uniquely

some symbol

to each relay/coil,

Text assigned

to relays/coils

to explain

Coil comment

Text assigned

to coils to explain

data.

Display

I x0.0

to be used in place of PMC address. Relay comment

& comment

INPUT

+I---,++ them.

1 COMMENT

COMMENT

them. HERE IS COIL COMMENT

Net comment

Text assigned them.

between

ladder

nets to explain {’ COMMENT

(2) Symbol

& comment

specification

list

(a) For input signal and internal

I Speciftcation

relay

Symbol

ASCII characters Japanese kanalkanji characters (Note

1ASCII characters Japanese kanalkanji characters

16 byte

16 byte 20,000

Coil comment

Relay comment

I

ASCII characters (lower-case alphabetic characters not allowed)

Available characters

entries

20,000

20,000 (Note 2)

(Note

2)

3)

Not allowed

Allowerd

Allowerd

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or

No

Yes, if the symbol assigned to the same address is 6 bytes or (Note shoter

shorter (Note 3)

CRT/MD1 can not display Free area

size of hard

Japanese disk drive,

characters, EMS

1)

30 byte

(Note 2)

Note 1) Note 2)

“)

replaced

and XMS

to blank.

on personal

computer

may

restrict

them.

Note 3)

When

the

comments

total

size

are displayed

of

all

coil

comments

on CRTIMDI.

-9-

exceeds

64

kbytes,

no

symbols

and

1. GENERAL

(b) For ladder

sequence

program

Specification Available

Net comment ASCII characters

characters

Japanese

kana/kanji

characters

Line feed Steps to occupy

2 step/Net

Maximum

64 characters/line

characters/line

comment

4095 characters/Net

comment

(Note

1)

1)

Maximum

lines

100 lines/Net

commennt

(Note

Maximum

number

About 20,000

Net comments

(Note 2)

Display

No

on CRT/MD1

Note

1)

The limitation

Note

2)

Number

which

is reached

of characters

comments. may further

Free area restrict

in each

first becomes Net

the limitation

comment

size of hard disk drive,

them.

-lO-

effects

for the Net comment. on

maximum

number

EMS and XMS on personal

of

Net

computer

2.

2.

OPERATING

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT

ENVIRONMENT

To use this software,

the requirements

indicated

in the table below

IBM PC/AT and compatible

Computer

ICPU

must be satisfied.

machines

(Note

1)

386 or hrgher

OS

MS-DOS MS-DOS

Version Version

Memory

Conventronal EMS and/or

I--

About 3 Mbytes

1Graphic

VGA or higher

IHard

disk

adapter

EPSON

5.OAlior later (to activate Japanese system) 5.0 or later (to activate English system)

memory 520 Kbytes or more XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) or more space

VP1000

(Note

This software

machines

with MS-KANJI

API

than 520 Kbytes size

(Note 5)

does not run on PC98 series of NEC.

2) Even if the machrne The

(Note 4)

and compatible

be in conformity

(Note 1)

(Note 2) (Note 3)

has 640 Kbytes

when an installed

of free

space

memory,

driver,

in memory

the empty

for example,

can

be

memory

may

not be more

uses a large memory

checked

with

the

effects

on the

space.

MS-DOS

command

CHKDSK.

(Note

3) The quantity

of the

Symbol

data

specially

for Symbol

Moreover,

and

(Note (Note

comment.

memory Please

data or Net comment with

FAPT LADDER

EMS

prepare

EMS

and

refer 1014.5.3.6

size of EMS and XMS memory

EMS and XMS

memory

FAPT

according

to the source

Expansion When

used,

models,

XMS

memory

than

256

Kbytes,

may be ristricted.

the

maximum

Please

prepare

number

of

256 Kbytes

the Printer

file.

Specification).

to be used :

for ladder

runs with

program

Changing

system

no EMS

to handle

and symbol & XMS,

& comment

enough

will be necessary

data

as an temporary

size of EMS

and/or

XMS

area. memory

for better performance.

memory ladder

FAPT

program

up to 32000 regardless

programs,

LADDER

up to 21840

however,

are used

LADDER

reading

available,

to handle

of large number.

less

can handle

enough

performance

4) In addrtion, an area for storing sequence data is required. PRINTERtare also available by changing 5) [NEC PR201HlandlFANUC

Although,

(1)

XMS

EMS rf possible.

For details,

About

Net

and

at the system

steps which or more

EMS

uses

FAPT

steps

program

LADDER

conventional

can be created.

steps can be created.

of the size of the program

-ll-

uses

EMS When

memory.

When

if available. only

256KB

If EMS

conventional

EMS memory

The srze of EMS is 256KB

to be edited.

is not

memory IS

is

available,

for all PMC

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT

(2) EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data FAPT LADDER When

neither

diskdrive,

uses EMS and/or XMS memory of them

and processing

About 200 Kbytes

(3)

are available,

FAPT

large number

lor Symbol LADDER

of Symbol

of EMS & XMS memory

& Comment

will

make

& Comment

are used for every

data if available.

temporary

file on the hard

data may be slower. 1,000 Symbol

data.

EMS and XMS memory for Net comment FAPT LADDER Comment

also uses EMS and/or

XMS memory,

or temporary

file as same

as Symbol

&

data.

About 200 to 300 Kbytes

of EMS or XMS memory

are used for every

1,000 Net cement.

2.1 CONFIG. SYS Before

FAPT LADDER-II

can be started,

the following

lines must be added

to the CONFlG.SYS

file:

DEVICE = C:UDOSVANSI.SYS DEVICE = C:VDOSVEMM~~~.EXE DEVICE = C:UDOSVMSIME.SYS DEVICE = C:VDOSVMSIMEK.SYS

(1)

ANSI.SYS (required) The display

(2)

mode and attributes

of the display

unit are set.

This setting

cannot

be omitted.

EMM386.EXE This device another

driver

EMS

enables

driver,

the

refer

use of expansion

to the

relevant

memory

manual

for

as EMS details

memory.

of the

When

setting

using

required

in

CONFIG.SYS.

(3)

MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS This device

driver

using another setting

(Note 1)

enables

Japanese

required

All of the above

device

that these

The specification For details,

3) Some problem

input system,

refer to the relevant

are provided

drivers

of switches

device

drivers

is anticipated, device

support

only English,

quickly.

Recognized

card,

required may

as standard

are placed

and parameters

refer to the MS-DOS

of the setting

of the other

drivers

device

2) When using a memory details

(Note

language

API for Japanese-language

input.

manual

When

for details

of the

in CONFIG.SYS.

assumes

(Note

the use of MS-KANJI

on-line

refer

under

with MS-DOS.

the vDOS

may be required

help or the relevant

to the manual

provided

This manual

directory

on drive

for the above

C.

settings.

manual. with the memory

card

for

in CONFIGSYS. adversely

specify drivers.

only ANSI.SYS When

but allows conflicts

affect

only

the

operation

in CONFIG.SYS.

ANSI.SYS

any contention

LADDER-II.

FAPT

with other device

drivers

7.

If a

Omit the specification

is specified,

are listed in Appendix

-12-

of FAPT

LADDER-II

will

to be identified

3. THE CONTENTS

3.

THE CONTENTS

3.1 The Contents FAPT LADDER-II The media (1)

OF PACAGE

AND INSTALLATION

AND INSTALLATION

of Pacage

is stored

in 5 floppy

disks listed below.

size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB).

FAPT LADDER-II

OF PACAGE

Please

confirm

(Vol. 1)‘A08B-9201

-J503#ZZO7-1

(2)

FAPT LADDER-II

(Vol. 2)!A08B-9201

-J503#2207-2

(3)

FAPT LADDER-II

(Vol. 3)!A08B-9201

-J503#2207-3

(4)

FAPT LADDER-II

(Vol. 4)!A08B-9201

-J503#ZZO7-4

(5)

FAPT LADDER-II

(Vol. 5)!A08B-9201

-J503#ZZO7-5

contens.

3.2 Installation Install the system the example

using

below

has been created

“install

assumes

.exe”

stored

that a system

in Vol. 1 of system floppy

disk.

disk is set in drive

A:, and directory

Y FLADDER

on the hard disk drive C: to install the system.

[Operation] Set system Execute

floppy

“install.

disk Vol. 1 in the drive A:. exe”

using the following

command.

C: ‘+ > A: Y INSTALL After that, go on accordint To select Select changed.

the displaying

the color Select

pattern

to inquiry color. by

< 7 >,

the displaying

Select

.

COLOR

0

MONO

below

which

is inquired

your personal

type.

1

Select

Displaying

-13-

when necessry.

appears.

< 5_7 key and the color

color for matching

color

Fig 3.2 (a)

of the system

the dialog-box

Color

Dialog

Box

of dialog-box computer’

itself

s display.

will be

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

@

If installation

(Note 1) (Note 2)

completes,

To stop installation,

the message

press the

Note that the files in the directory

3.3 Directory Configuration The

installer

automatically

(C: Y FLADDER

appears.

key.

specified

to be installed

are all deleted

After Installation

creates

in the above

below

the

following

subdirectories

under

the

specified

directory

example):

C: Y FLADDER l=zz The messages

to be displayed

error indications) The installer function

are contained

automatically

by FAPT

LADDER-II

in a file under

creates

(such

as menus,

displayed

instructions,

and

this subdirectory.

the following

subdirectory

(indicated

by ‘) when an on-line

is used:

C: Y FLADDER

JPN ENG PMC-RAM

(Note)

Be careful

not to accidentally

(‘)

delete

the above

directory.

3.4 File Configuration 3.4.1

File system

The files constituting

(1)

Customizable Some

are described

below

files

functions

for printing

FAPT LADDER-II

can be customized

created

ladder

programs,

by the user.

These

and communication

functions

include

port setting

setting

based

of the format

on the RS232C

standard. For these edited

functions,

by the user.

(a) Printing

the These

(For details,

associated

data

is held

files are listed below.

see Section

4.5.3.5.)

. AMROFTRP.DAT CROSSINF.DAT

-14-

in text-format

files,

which

can

be directly

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

. ‘.INF (b)Communications

(For details.

see Section

4.5.6.1.)

. FL10 - AT.DAT (c)Compile/decompile

(For details.

see Section

4.573.)

OPTION.CNF

(d)Entire

system

FLMNE.DAT

(For details,

FLVIEW.DAT

(2)

Other

see Section

(For details,

4.5.8.7.)

see Section

4.5.9.)

files

(a)README.TXTIREADMEJ.TXT These

text files contain

important

information

that became

available

after the manual

was

printed. Use this information Japanese

in combination

text, while README.TXT

with the manual. contains

English

Note

that READMEJ.TXT

contains

text.

(b)*.JPN”.ENG A file

having

displayed location

either

instructions.

of the

above

extensions

and error indications)

of such a file is described

contains

most

to be displayed

of the

or printed

messages

(menus.

by the system.

The

in Section 3.3.

(c)FLMNE.ERR The results

(including

errors)

of mnemonic

conversion

are written

into this text file.

(d)‘.EXE A file having

(3)

Files The These

this extension

IS an executable

file.

Such files are not handled

by the user.

that are not installed files

under

subdirectory

vAPPENDlX

on

Volume

files are listed below.

(a)Printing

(For details.

see Section

4.5.3.6.)

. AMROFTRP.ESC . AMROFTRP.PR (b)Standard

symbols

F16&18-M.

SYM

F16&18-T.

SYM

(For details.

see Appendix

PM-D.SYM PM-H.SYM FSOM-CNV.

SYM

FSOT-CNV.

SYM

. PM-C_CNV.

SYM

-15-

4.)

5 are

not

installed

by

the

installer.

3. THE CONTENTS

(c)Message

OF PACAGE

AND INSTALLATION

conversion tools (For details. see Appendix 5.)

- CHGMES.EXE

3.4.2

The constitution of source program

In FAPT LADDER-II,

a sequence

program” and managed

program, which is object of editing and printing, is called “source

by storing in files below.

H incase of named "C:Y DATAYSAMPLE"

- SAMPLE.ERR SAMPLE.MAP

l

l

l

* * * * * * * - *

(Note 1)

execution map file

CONTROL SYSPARAM XSYMBOL.xxx MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVELl. #LA LEVEL2. #LA LEVEL3. #LA Pyyy. #LA Pzzz. #SS NETCMT.xxx MCARD

as source program

result

file

(Note 1) (Note 1)

Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file I/O module data file 1st level ladder data file 2nd level ladder data file 3rd level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Memory card format data file

Contain source program compile/decompile

results and map information.

are not Included in a source program, but are named in accordance

(Note

2)

(Note (Note (Note (Note

3) 4) 4) 2)

These files

with the name of

the source program. These

files are stored

under

the directory

one level above

the source

storage directory.

(Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 4)

“xxx” is number of multi file managing. Only for using LEVEL-3

ladder at PMWRC3IRC4IRC4

"YYY","zzz" is number of sub-program.

- 16-

(STEP)/NB/NB2/QC.

program

4. OPERATION

4. OPERATION 4.1 Activation (1)

Activation

method

01 Move to the drive and directory 0

Key in “FLADDER

(Example)

Start

FAPT

directorv

6

LADDER-II

screen

(Note)

the display

the

software

software

is installed.

is

installed

under

the

\FLADDER

1

initial

shown below,

screen,

the screen

Pressing

any

display

key

while

to the initial menu screen,

When no source

program

LINE (SELECTED cannot

system

c Enter >

for 3 seconds,

(Fig. 4.1(b)).

switches

when

< Enter > > FLADDER

The FAPT LADDER-II is displayed

the FAPT LADDER-II

on drive C:

1~:=~f%?f!)~ER C:\FLADDER

where

-z Enter > ”

is selected,

PROGRAM)*

appears

(Fig. 4.1 (a)).

automatically

changes

the initial without

menu

is displayed

the 3second

items

are displayed

screen

“OFF-LINE

using

dotted

After this screen

to the initial

menu

immediately

delay.

FUNCTION” lines.

These

and “OFFmenu

items

be selected. F

I I i I il

A

P

T

1

LADDER-II Version 01 .O A08B-9201 -J503 Copyright (C) 1991- 1995 FANUC

II 17 II

I

II FANUC

II

1

Fig. 4.1 (a)

FAPT LADDER-II

‘fnitial

Top Screen

menu

.. ..

Drw. No. Ver. Press press

LTD.

[TAB]

to

key

[ENTER]

or

move

[SPACE]

the cursor and key to select.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~ ..._..... _,.._.. .I.> Off-tine Eunctjon :::::::::.::.:::.“::

OWtine On-tine

... .:.:+:....A.

Func tidii

f selected

grogrtim)

Utility Exit Fig. 4.1(b)

Initial Menu Screen

-17-

*r..,...dY.:.<:>

4.

OPERATION

(2) There

are two methods

command

of returning

from

the FAPT

LADDER-II

initial

menu

screen

to the

DOS

line.

Press the < Esc > key while the initial menu Alternatively,select For details

menu item

of selecting

“END”

screen

is displayed.

from the initial menu.

a menu item from the initial menu,

see Section

4.4.

(Note) FAPT LADDER-II directory Example:

can be started

more

easily

by creating

file,

named

“FLDDER”,

a batch

file, as described

below,

under

for which a path IS set. The

following

system

software

batch

is installed

is created

under the \FLADDER

- 19-

directory

when

the

on drive C:

FAPT

LADDER-II

a

4.

4.2 GENERAL 4.2.1

Menu

OF OPERATIONS Configuration

The configuration

$

OPERATION

of the menu screens

-

Program

displayed

by the system

are shown

below.

Selection

TOP screen -I+

Off-Line

Function

-

(1)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (b))

-

On-Line

Function

-

(2)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

-

On-Line

(3)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

-

(selection

-

program)

Utrlity

I

DOS -

flOadat

-

View result

L-

Linker

I

TITLE

(1) -

SYMBOL LADDER

DIAGRAM

STEP SEQUENCE

-

CROSS

-

BIT ADDRESS

DIAGRAM/

STEP SEQUENCE

PARAMETER -

LADDER

REFERENCE MAP

-

SYMBOL

-

MESSAGE

-

I/O MODULE

-

SYSTEM

LIST

& COMMENT

PARAMETER

-

FA WRITER

_

PMC WRITER

-

PMC Handy

-

PROGRAM

OPTION

SET-UP

SOURCE

EXECUTE

- 20 -

-

Memory

-

BACKUP

PROGRAM+MNEMONIC

MNEMONIC

File

FILE+SOURCE USER BATCH

Card

FILE

PROGRAM FILE

4.

OPERATION

File save Off-Line

Function

Exit

(3)

On-Line 1

(selected

Diagnose

Function program)

t

Ladder

Monitor/

Timer

Online

Editor

Counter

-

PMC Status

Keep relay

-

Signal Status

Data table control

-

PMC Parameter

Data table

-

PMC alarm

status

-

RUN/STOP

the ladder

-

System

-21-

Information

4. OPERATION

4.3 Common System Operations The operations

described

below

are common

operations

for FAPT LADDER-II.

(1) Function keys When

the menu

desired

menu

items

shown

below

item by pressing

are displayed

the corresponding

in reverse function

video,

the user

can

select

the

key.

I

1 IF31

WI

IF11

(2) Escape

WI

WI

IF81

if=71

WI

IF101

key

The escape escape

IF41

key

< ESC>

key terminates

has the same

the current

effect

screen

as selecting

then returns

[END]

the display

with the function to the previous

key.

The

screen

in the

menu hierarchy.

keys

(3) Cursor

The cursor select

keys

<

When two or more can be moved

>,

<

1 >, < t

>, and

<

*

z

are used

to move

the cursor

to

cursors

by pressing

can be used on a single the

key together

screen,

the second

or subsequent

with the < +- > or < +

cursor

> key.

keys

(4) Scroll The

t

input items.

scroll

previous

keys

one page)

UP>

and

and scroll the screen

DOWN >

down

(to display

scroll

the

screen

up (to display

the next one page),

respectively

the (for

the PC9801). The scroll keys

page, respectively

(5) [INS]

< PAGE

UP > display

the next

page

and the previous

(for the IBM PC/AT).

key

This key switches

(6) [TAB]

DOWN > and

between

the overwrite

mode < 0 > and insert mode < I >.

key

When multipul

keys are displayed,

press < Tab > key and select

-22-

one button.

4. OPERATION

(7) Status line A status line is displayed

Main

t-

menu

at the top of the screen.

[c: \FLADDER

PMC-RB3

t

Item name currently selected

Model

currently

t-

selected

Edit mode

(Note)

The

indications

manual,

on the

depending

key

tops

may

on the personal

slightly

computer

vary

from

the

1

Current directory

name

(overwrite/insert)

descnptions

of this

used.

(El) Pop-up menu When

the following

the three methods

1)

Cursor

pop-up

menu

described

appears,

Function

in reverse

key

corresponding

Command

video.

key

< 7 > or < 1 >, such that the item to be selected

Then, pressing

the
> key selects

that item.

is indicated

function

at

the

left

of each

item.

To

select

an

item,

press

the

key.

name

An uppercase

Append

usrng any of

key

A function

above

can be selected

movement

is displayed

3)

process

below.

To select an item, press the cursor

2)

the desired

case,

letter

In (usually,

pressing

command,

the letter

the initial of) an item name key

< U >,

, or

respectively.

-23

-

is the command can select

name.

the Update,

In the Quit, or

4. OPERATION

(9) Pull-down

menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top of the screen:

....;

FiM’;

:::

,.‘:.‘,

2. Diagnose

4. Communication

I

I

I 1

3. l/O

I

I I

I

I

%I&

)

Function number. Function name Icon for PMC status indication (See the section explaining how to start the on-line functions.)

J

Pressing the < Alt > key displays the pull-down menu for ?‘i Ff@.~v The pull-down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing the < Alt > key and the corresponding

1:We’ file sa\rei

I

function number simultaneously.

2. Diagnose

3. I/O

4. Communication

%lll-

I

Exit

Using the cursor keys. position the highlight to the desired item on a function’s pull-down menu. A menu item with an arrow mark (G) at its right edge has its own pull-down menu, which can be displayed by pressing the < + > key. The target screen is displayed by pressing the < Enter > key after positioning the highlight to a desired menu item.

-24-

4.

OPERATION

Initial Menu

4.4

The inttial menu

screen

appears

when

the FAPT

LADDER-II

system

is started.

See also Section

4.1. This

screen

function then

reappears

from

press

upon

this menu, the

the termmation

use the

of a function

key

or

key to move

spacebar.

The

chosen

from

the cursor cursor

this menu.

down

can

be

To select

to the desired moved

up

a

function,

by

pressing

< Shaft > + < Tab > simultaneously.

4.4.1 When

Program selection “PROGRAM

screen

used

SELECT”

to specify

is selected

the name

from the initial menu,

of a source

program

the screen

to be used

display

with

the

switches FAPT

to the

LADDER-II

system. fi)

To spectfy

@

After entering FlO [END]

the source

program

the name

to return

name,

enter

of the desired

“drive:vsource-program-name.”

source

to the initial menu screen

program, without

press Fl changing

(EXEC]

or .

the source

program

Press

name.

Examples: Specifying

“SAMPLE”

as a source

Enter “CvDATAvSAMPLE

[EXEC].”

When the source

name

displayed

in the upper

Specifying The model name Fl

a new source setting

[COPY]

FAPT

creates

is pressed

LADDER-II

is specified,

program

screen,

as a new source

under the DATA directory

half of the initial menu

of the PMC model

copied

The

program

program

name

and source

program

name

are

screen.

name:

shown

below,

for a new

without

the PMC model

on drive C:

appears.

source

specifying

program,

Using the cursor then

a PMC model,

press

the

an existing

keys,

move

the cursor

to the

> key (Fig. 4.4.1). program

name

If

can be

program.

system

each of the source

creates

program

a directory

files.

-25-

for the

specified

source

program

name,

and

4. OPERATION

PMC I’MC

SPliTI

E;IB -NBZ

PMC type for new program.

Fig. 4.4.1

4.4.2 When

Selection of PMC type

Off-line function “OFF-LINE

(Fig. 4.4.2). software,

FUNCTION”

is selected

from the initial menu, the off-line menu screen appears

The off-line function includes

displayed

on the off-line menu

using a personal computer

a function

screen.

when connection

equivalent

with the CNC

KEY

EDIT

F2

KEV

PRINT

(PMC)

F3

KtV

COMPILE

f1

KEV

DECOHPIL~

f5

KEY

I/O

Ph

KEY

PROGRRH OPIIDN SLIPUP

f?

KEY

MNEMONIC EDIT

tB

KtV

UllLllV

tY

KtV

ON-LINt tUNCllDN

Fig. 4.4.2

LADDER

system

This function is used mainly for programming

details. see Section 4.5.

Fl

to the FAPT

Offline menu screen

has not been established.

For

4.

On-line function

4.4.3 When

“ON-LINE

FUNCTION”

programs

held

automatic

communication

4.4.4

by the

“ON-LINE


Programs

are

with the PMC.

(SELECTED

for the program

program

a monitoring

4.4.5

Utility “UTILITY”

method.

is selected

such as DOS, floadat.

press the corresponding

function

When

computer.

see Section

user to select a function

4.4.6

function

personal

is applied

computer

by

to the

means

of

function

is

4.6.


on the personal


key.

the on-line

the

see Section

is selected

on the personal

For details,

into

program)

PROGRAM)”

selected

loaded

For details,

held by the PMC and that selected

select

When

is selected

PMC.

On-line function (selected

When used

OPERATION

is made

If a mismatch

between

the

is detected,

4.6.

a function

View result,

For details

A comparison computer.

the on-line

selection

menu appears

and Linker.

of each function,

to enable

To start a desired

see Section

the

function,

4.5.

Termination “END”

is selected

from the initial

menu,

the screen

line.

-27-

display

returns

to the DOS command

4. OPERATION

4.5 Off-line function 4.5.1

KEY

F3

KEY

COHPILt

F1

KEY

OFCOHPILF

F5

KEY

I/O

Ff, KEY

PROGRRH OPTION SET-UP

FI

KEY

MNEMONIC EDIT

t8

KtV

UllLllV

tY

KtV

ON-LLNt CUNCIION

Fig. 4.5.1

4.5.2

PRINT

F2

Off-line Menu Screen

Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited. (1) Start [Operation] il!

Select (EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

m c

’

\ORIR\SRHPLI 1

Fl

KEY

C2

KtV

PRINI

C3

KtV

CUnPLLt

II

KFV

Df CnHPll~t

15

KLV

l/O

Fh

KFV

PROGRRH OPlION SCI-UP

tI

KtV

MNEMONIC EDIT

t8

KtV

UllLllV

tY

KtV

UN-LlNt tUNCIIllN

EDIT

Fig. 4.5.2 (a)

Off-line Menu

-28-

1

4. OPERATION

8

The followlng

editing

menu

screen

appears:

Fig. 4.5.2 (b)

0

69

Select

The

data to be edited

editing

displayed

screen

when

EDIT

selected

Menu

function

key.

For example,

data

appears.

m*<.

: y:,:. G&-@fj@~~~~$$;*$@&$$

is selected.

( TlTUi

)

1) 2) :O 4)

bWlllNI: TUJI. BLIUJIIH FMClllMi TWL NtW tK & NC ‘id: IW I’Ku;W No

5) 6) 7)

EIIITIUN No I’Ko(;I(I\M Inbfwliw; No DATA It I’RUXW4IftG

8) 9)

I’Rffilb’d DI:SICMiD WIM kRl1TEN BY

IO)

I

with the corresponding

for the

[TITLE]

Editing

NkW i l%NlJCF%CKIlELRC&I:16M4

UY

Rim

2

:I

4

5

6

Fig. 4.5.2 (c)

-29-

7 _I ‘I

Editing

p%,r:

Title

: 9, “‘f

l,).q&“’

the

screen

below

is

4. OPERATION

(2) Termination [Operation] cis Select

02

[END] or press the e ESC > key on the editing

The following

message

E-1

Save (update)

F2

Quit

F3

Edit

CC Press the desired

(0

UPDATE

editing

are written

(ii) When

QUIT

of editing

key.

is selected.

the

editing

operation

is terminated

after

the

(i)

To continue

(ii)

To terminate

the editing

operation

is terminated

without

writing

is selected,

or QUIT editing,

the editing

is selected, select

editing,

the display

the appropriate

select

[END].

returns

function

The display

the titles of sequence

programs

(1) Start

[Operation] ci? Select

[TITLE]

of

the results

is continued.

to the editing

menu

screen.

key.

returns

to the main menu.

Title data editing

Title data represents

results

to a file.

to a file.

When UPDATE

452.1

& quit

is selected,

(iii) When RESUME

0

appears:

function

When

screen.

on the editing

menu

screen.

- 30 -

generated

by a machine

tool builder.

4.

G9 The following

title edrting

screen

I) KKIIINI:TWI. Blllll)tiR WIIIM; 11XJI. NM 3) fm: & NCNM I) PMC PRICRAM NO 2)

OPERATION

appears:

NA’k’

: FINK I’M:HltlEl.K & I:IfM

8) I’RWAMW:SIGNRI) BY

!I) RtMMIII’KN HY

Fig. 4.5.2.1

(2)

Input

[Operation] (I)

Select

an input ttem (displayed

Q)

Enter data.

The maximum

number

in reverse

of characters

video)

usable

with the -Z 1 > and <

for each title data item IS listed below

:

32 characters

:

32 characters

CNC & NC NAME

:

32 characters

PMC PROGRAM

:

4 characters

MACHINE

TOOL BUILDER

MACHINE

TOOL NAME NO

NAME

:

2 characters

NO

:

32 characters

DATE OF PROGRAMMING

:

16 characters

PROGRAM

:

32 characters

:

32 characters

:

32 characters

EDITION

NO

PROGRAM

DRAWING

DESIGNED

ROM WRITTEN REMARKS

BY

BY

-31-

7 > keys.

4.

OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation ) 01 Select B,

[END]

The following

on press the -z ESC > key to return

message

lo the editing

menu

screen.

appears.

11

0

Press the desired

function

key.

Ladder diagram/step

4.5.2.2

(1) A program This screen

configuration

0 D u 0

LEVEL1 n Pt)ooi 13 PO008 11 PO021 11

(7 PO101

returns

sequence

to the editing

menu.

editing

screen

lists subprograms,

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

The system

and supports

SEQUENCE)

LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022

cl PO202

the selection

of a target

subprogram

Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:VFLYDATAYSFC~~J PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

[I LEVEL3 [:I PO004 u PO005 t3 PO014 0 PO015 fd PO024 113PO025

m]PO304

Sub-program

and editing

[1]PO405

0

PO006

q PO016 u .

PO026

oJPO406

u PO007 0 PO017 01POO27 . . 0]PO407

: PO001

DELETE

ADRESS

-32

-

I

NEW

ZOOM

4. OPERATION

(a) Screen display Screen 0

(Pxxx represents Meaning

display the 1stladder

LEVEL1

Display

level

a subprogram

by [ZOOM]

ladder

diagram

ladder

diagram

ladder

diagram diagram

or < Enter >

j--J LEVEL2

the 2nd ladder

level

0

LEVEL3

the 3rd ladder

level (Note

0

Pxxx

a subprogram

ladder

01

Pxxx

a subprogram

step sequence

diagram

step sequence

diagram

A ] Pxxx (Note 2)

a subprogram

x

a duplicate

Pxxx

Note 1) Note 2)

The 3rd ladder If the

the editing

Function

ladder

or step seqence

diagram

key

was

used

to

screen

of the subprograms

nest

a program

is displayed for which

are marked

to

upon

a certain

a single

the [ZOOM]

press

depth,

and

if the

of the [MAIN]

key was pressed

key,

is suspended.

with n J.

keys are useful in this screen. Other keys

key

[ ADRESS]

: Switching

[ DELETE]

: Deleting

[ NEW

] : Creating

[ ZOOM

] : Modifying

Meaning

subprogram

configuration

Such subprograms Following

in editing

level can be omitted.

[ZOOM]

subprogram

1)

number)

address’symbol

display

a subprogram

< Page Up >

a new subprogram

: Displaying

down > : Displaying

previous

screen

next screen

a subprogram

of display

IEDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

Edit (LADDER/STEP PMC-RC4

(STEP

SEQUENCE) SEQ)

[ AxFLADDERv

RC4(STEP

I ~LEVELI

FAPT LADDER

editing

:

The list screen

of subprogram

:

Setting

a model

:

Current

directory

:

I lLEVEL2

: The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2

: The 2nd level of ladder

LEVEL3

: The 3rd level of ladder

i1)POOO2

I I

:

I- I]

: a subprogram

a subprogram

SEQUENCE

Remarks

which

I

screen

DEMO PROGRAM) is one of the title data

i-tLEVEL3

LEVEL1

I1 1 PO001

[C:~FLADDERJ

:

PROGRAM:(STEP PROGRAM

SEQ)

11 PO004

F-1PO005

of the ladder of the step sequence

-33 -

f-1 PO006 11 PO007

I

4. OPERATION

(b) Creating a new subprogram -

Press the [NEW] key.

New program

-

Enter the number

(c) Modifying -

of the subprogram

Key in the number

[ZOOM]

or

or

message

Continue

session,

(P200, for example).

key.

to be modified

Alternatively,

position

(P200, the

for example),

cursor

to

P200

then then

press the press

the

key.

number

marked

with

LI]

(P21,

for example)

is selected,

the

following

is displayed:

this

To continue

to be created

of the subprogram

If a subprogram

Editing

1

a subprogram

[ZOOM]

-

name ?D

to

subprogram select

the editing

press

the

it

is

not

?

session

< Enter > key.

completed.

(Yes/No)

using

[Yl

the results

To cancel

obtained

the results

edit the subprogram from its original state, enter .

-34-

from

suspended

of the previous

previous

editing

editing

session and

4.

(2)

Editing

(4

OPERATION

a ladder diagram

Start Display the program list screen.

Position the cursor lo the program indicated

press the [ZOOM]

key.

or

The ladder diagram editing screen,

by 0,

then

shown below,

appears.

CCO=lESI

ItlD-XQ 8 ‘SY=S!JNPLE

DATR 00001

NO 1 RCO=RELRY

SANPLE

800Bl‘/kWOl‘ 00001?

I I

~mI~~3llmrm~m~n~

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2

(a)

Ladder Diagram Edrling Screen

(1) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. see (j) “Combining

W

a sequence

The line shows the name displayed on the screen,

(For the [View]

command,

program”

of the file which is being edited,

number

and the number of program steps/maximum

of the net which is number of steps that

can be edited. (iii) The line shows a sub-program

number (P address) or label number (L address).

(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment

added to the data at the address

selected

by the

cursor. 6,

AD = X000.0

:

Address on which the cursor IS placed

Q,

SY = SAMPLE

:

Symbol data

@

RCO = RELAY SAMPLE

($I

CC0 =TEST

0000 1

Total number of symbols

:

Relay comment

data

Total character

00012 DATA No. 1

0030’00030

:

Coil comment Total

numbers of relay comment data

character

numbers

displayed on CRTIMDI.

-35-

of

symbol/coil

comment

4.

C-9Function

key indications

The ladder

diagram

OPERATION

and selection

editing

functions

correspond

to the function

keys as indicated

below.

0)

(cornand] 63

0,

holding

down [SHIFT]

lets you select the following

items.

(a Under condition

8.

holding

down [SHIFT]

lets you select

items.

1

I

1

I

t

8

[comand]

(3) Under condition

:3

2

@

J

,“:‘?

4

5 ,&$&

6

‘..!

the following

, j. .:i; : :y

g .I,.,

*

11)

$&i’-

:

[Delnet]

WNC

inrnet

2

CihCet

3

search

4 <*down

5

2

InstIn

3

his&n

4

5

3

rrch

4

7 MICI+ZI 8

<*&I#$ 6

‘6

7 ‘.

9

.8

.' 9

'10

1

"

10.

:.

I

I

!‘i? [Search]

I

1

2 bottom

9

W-W&

5

t+trth

6

4 odown

5

'&up

6

g-srth

7 C-dOWi

8

7

i-Up

9

10

8

9

10

ftS+orfi 8

9

10

.

I

03 [Copy] I [Move] 1

until

2

cancut

3

search

*

t

1

*

(9

cancel

2

to

(to-erg]

3

Search

4 c+down

is displayed

5

in the [File]

c*up

6

to-fil

command

7

mode

[File] Opens

a window

processing

in which

from a POP-UP

the name

of an input

program

6

7

can be specified.

Select

menu.

do, [syEdit] 1

bX8C

I

only.

2

cancel

3

4

5

-36-

8

9

10

desired

4.

(Note)

Whrle the functron of 0

keys

can be executed.

screen

of 0

For

program

ladder

displays

menu

input.

select

IS displayed.

program

Use the cursor Examples

F4 [Adress]

the upper-case

name shown

[LADDER] When

only the rrght and left vertical

At this stage,

diagram and

editing,

a command

(COMAND]

on the @I screen.

letter

To select

(not necessarily

on the 8

on the 0)

screen.

the

editing

program

rails of a ladder

menu.

The

has been

function

entered,

key

the screen

diagram.

input can be started.

keys to move

of basic

from

no sequence

the cursor

rnstruction

program

to any location

In the ladder

input and function

instructron

diagram. program

input are shown

below.

(i)

Example

of basic

instruction

x0.1

D30.2

program

input

F14.2

Y52.7

X2.4

[Operation] Move the cursor The [ -I

t_

ILLEGAL”

to the start position.

] symbol

appears

user that horizontal

appears

on the screen.

at the lower-right ladder

[ -i

then press

diagram

corner

i-

1.

The message

of the screen.

line creatron

“HORIZONTAL

This message

is not completed.

Enter

LINE

warns

the

an address

and bit data.

and press the

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard contact,

and the cursor

As in 01 and 8.

Enter contact Press

enter

moves

contact

] and enter

is set on contact

Without

moving

A horizontal

> key.

The address

is set at the

right.

A of D30.2.

B of F14.2.

[e

address

symbol

a

initial letter)

input

program

programmer

command

in ladder

entering

as selecting

in this way, enter

in the correspondrng

Ladder

For example,

has the same effect

command

6)

of ti) are displayed

OPERATION

the cursor,

line segment

appears

address

F14.2,

B and the cursor

[

press extending

4

then

moves

press

-37-

key.

The

right.

1.

to the right is drawn

near the right vertical

the

rail.

automatically

and a relay coil

4. OPERATION

Enter address

Y52.7,

then press the < Enter > key.

The cursor

automatically

Next, enter

an OR conditron.

[ -#+-

Press

The address

To

I

enter

is set at contact

B and the cursor

line,

enter

1. The line segment

A vertical

extending

line

line extending

(ii) Example of function For function

upward

and

press

as many

exceeds

is required

the

times

horizontal

line

as the number

the right vertical

rail.

for OR.

[

Press

--!

key

entered.

) to enter

a

upward.

instruction

instruction

right.

line.

will be entered

that such a line never

vertical

moves

a number

Note, however,

on the next line.

X2.4, then press the -Z Enter > key.

] to enter a horizontal a horizontal

-

to the input start position

J and enter address

[ -

Press

moves

program input

input. press

the function

key (functn].

Next,

enter

a SUB number,

then press the c Enter Z- key. A function number If the

instruction

can also be entered

and pressing user

instruction displayed The table

does table

not that

the [functn] remember lists

by entenng

the function

instruction

name or SUB

key. a certain

function

instruction

instructions

name

and

or SUB

corresponding

number,

SUB

a function

numbers

can be

on the screen. can be displayed

Then the function Press the [functn]

instruction

just by pressing

the

table is automatically

key to return

to the ladder

(funcln]

key

without

entering

any data.

displayed.

diagram

screen

from the function

instruction

table.

MOVE

(1)

(2)

(.)!.)(.)i)

(3)

(.j(!!~K,

0000

(4) 0000

(SUB 8)

Control

Output

condition -Input -

When entering I

parameters

a function

of the function

-38-

data address

Low-order

-High-order

4-bit

address

4-bit logical

instruction instruction

logical

multiplication

multiplication

with this function. vertically

data

data enter the

as shown

below.

4. OPERATION

[Operation

0

1

Enter a control Press

[ ---I

l---

The cursor

Q

condition. 1. Next.

moves

Enter a function

key.

Instructton

press

shown

4-bit

key.

above

then press the

< Enter>

key.

8. then press the

key.

The

appears.

instruction.

logical

The

three parameters

(iii) Restrictions

and bit data,

SUB number

of the function

the high-order

the

remaining

Next, enter

diagram

Co Enter the parameters First. enter

an address

instruction.

Press the (functnj function

enter

right..

multiplication

cursor

data

automatically

of the first parameter.

moves

then

Enter

downwards.

the

one by one.

and notes on ladder editing

[Restrictions] Restrictions

related

to the ladder

1 net (corresponding

to the portlon

between

the RD

and WRT instructions) a)

When

the

ladder

corresponding

1 net

mnemonic

exceeds program),

256

steps

the following

(as

counted

message

as

steps

in

the

appears:

“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.” If there are more than 256 steps,

Restrictions

related

If an attempt described a)

to a ladder

is made

below

no net is displayed.

diagram

to display

display

more

than

per screen 70 ladder

net lines

per screen,

the error

occurs.

Symptom

(a-1 1

When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following “The

NET being created

If 70

lines

are

message

appears.

is too large.”

exceeded,

the

following

message

appears,

and

no

net

is

displayed. “A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”

(a-2)

When

there are more than 70 fines totaled

message “The

appears.

NET being created

If 70 lines message

are exceeded appears

and the display “The

NET

IS

In this case, function

How to obtain Even

if part

over two or more nets, the following

IS too large.” when

of the current

specify

the number IS

over

two

or more

net when

nets,

the following

70 lines are exceeded,

net IS dtscontinued.

larger than the edltlng

buffer.”

the net to be displayed,

(such as net number

of a net

totaled

for a net that is the current

using

the ladder

diagram

search

search).

of lines per screen

dlsplayed

on a screen,

- 39 -

all lines

of the

net are included

in the

4. OPERATION

total for that screen.

In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line.

The number of lines tn each net to be displayed is determined (b-l )

One line is comprised

(b-2)

as follows:

Basic instructions of one basic instruction.

+_I-

1 line

1-r

*lines

Function

instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is: or parameters. Examples

-

whichever

The number of control conditions

is greater, plus 1

of calculation follow.

When the number of control conditions

O_

1004 Fro00 ROlO R020

< number of parameters

Number of control conditions = 2 Number of parameters = 4 Number of lines = number of parameters + 1 = 5 lines

.

-

When the number of control conditions

> number of parameters

Number of Number of Number of conditions

00

-4o-

control conditions = 3 parameters = 1 lines = number of control + 1 = 4 lines

4.

(b-3)

Data table section of function instructions The data table section of the COD, CODB, follows:

-

or DISP

instruction

OPERATION

is calculated

When the data table is one or two bytes Number

of lines

= number

of data tables/6

( + 1 if there is a remainder)

ACT --i+

0011

SUB 49 DISP

0003 0300

000 003 006 009

-

0000

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000

Number section

0000 0000 0000

0000

of = = =

lines in the data table 1 l/6 1 with remainder 5 2 lines

When the data table is four bytes Number

of lines

of data tables14 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

= number

0005 0007 D300 0320 000 002 004

00000000 00000000 00000000

Number section

00000000 00000000

-

-4l-

of = = =

lines in the data table 514 1 with remainder 1 2 lines

as

4.

(b-4)

Example

of calculating

of lines per screen

shown below, the number of lines in the screen display section

For the ladder obtained

the number

OPERATION

is

as follows:

- The valid nets on the display - Number of lines in net A Function

instruction

section

screen

are nets A and 6.

+ data table section (11’6)

0 lines

= 6 lines

(3+1) - The number of lines in net 8 is 2. ACT Net A

+I-

0011

SUB 49 DISP

0003 Screen

section . . . . ..

displa!

,

I

0300

1

000

0000

003 006 009

0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000

Net B

....... :

: Net C

c)

Examples Example

-

of symptoms of symptom

(a-l)

The ladder

diagram

parameter

of the DISP instruction

the total number If a net that editing,

can be edited

only when (SUB

the “total

49) is less than

of steps is 396, the net consists

consists

the following

of a total message

of 396

appears,

“The data table is too large.”

-42-

number

steps

396.

of message

data steps”

This is because

when

of 70 lines. or more

and the display

is created

during

mnemonic

of the net is discontinued.

4. OPERATION

Example

-

of symptom

If an attempt that

(a-2)

is made

of a basic

to enter

instruction,

the net of a function

the

following

instruction

message

on the same screen

is displayed,

and

the

as

attempt

is

(SUB

8)

The results

of

rejected. “The

NET being created

For example, cannot

if the basic

be entered,

calculation

is too large.” instruction

(because

are described

the

net has 68 lines, total

number

the MOVE

of lines

exceeds

instruction 70).

below.

1

68-line

Dtsplay

screen

net

:-I L+

RST +“I

Number of instruction number of (4) + 1 =

SUB 8

:

:.

< Measure

of the 68-line

A baste tnstructton the total number

For example, the element

net is not scrolled,

.

68 + 5 = 73 lines

net cannot

be entered

of lines is greater

if a 68-line

the MOVE instruction

can be entered.

together

basic-instruction

with another

net, if

than 70.

basic-Instruction

net is followed

of the third line of the latter net cannot

by another

basic-Instruction

net,

be entered.

rr Display

5

>

If the display

-

MOVE lines = parameters

]

68-line

net

screen

---I+

No more lines can be entered.

I < Measure

>

If the display

of the 68-line

When the CODB same

screen,

steps

for

the

net

instructron

if an attempt DISP

IS

not scrolled,

the latter basic instruction

(SUB 27) and DISP instruction is made

Instructton

to enter

(SUB

-43-

49).

(SUB 49) are edited

396 as the total number the

following

can be entered

message

on the

of message appears.

and

data the

4.

attempt “The

OPERATION

is rejected.

NET being created

This symptom

also occurs

is too large.”

In a combination

of two DISP instructions

and a combination

of

CODB and COD instructions. For example, steps

if the number

for the DISP

shown

of tables

instruction

for the CODB

can be only

instruction

66 at maximum.

is 200, the total number The calculation

results

of are

below.

4 bytes 200 data tables Number

. instruction Display

196 198

I

._.. ._ 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000

Data table section = 20014 = 50 Calculation

of DISP data items that can be entered

_ instruction

Function sections Number lines

. .

< Measure Moving

instruction = 3 parameters + 1 of remaining = 70 - 55 - 4 = 11 lines

Data tables =

11’6=66

on the maximum

The maximum Without

number

however,

on how memory If a ladder

being

screen

makes

it possible

to set the

of steps

steps that can be edited

is as follows:

steps

: 24000 steps that the maxrmum

allowable

number

of steps can decrease,

depending

is used. edited

and the following

MNEMONIC

number

of ladder

EMS : 21840

With EMS

disabled

to the top of the display

of steps to 396.

Restriction

Note,

-

>

the DISP instruction

total number

0

-

Function instruction = 4 parameters section +1 ’

screen .._......

of CODB lines = 55

BUFFER

exceeds message

the maximum is displayed:

OVER

-44-

allowable

number

of steps,

editing

is

4. OPERATION

[Notes] 0)

An attempt ladder

A correct

8

IO scroll a program

program ladder

However.

This

this restriction

over several

does

in an already

before

cannot

this symbol.

created

be

addresses) the screen

keys fails if the

or invalid. can be scrolled.

in one line on the screen.

to a sequence

created

in mnemonic

lanes with a continuation

sections of a sequence

Replacing

not apply

program

symbol

to delete

with a scroll key or other

without

and one coil can be entered

continuation

deletion)

on the screen (for example,

must be created

When a sequence

displayed

Lines

program

Up to eight contacts

format.

(4

is incomplete

program

created

format

exceeds

in mnemonic this limit, it is

symbol.

deleted

with

(

-- ---

1.

Use

(Delnet]

(net

(See Item (6) in this section.)

program

sequence

program

can be replaced

rn the same

way as described

in Item (c) above. Move

the cursor to a program

@I Sequence

program

Press the [comand] indicated

section

to be changed,

then enter new data.

addition soft key of the function

key programmer

menu

and use the function

keys

below.

To terminate

the programmer

I

oekl@Jt

iflrmt

menu,

Insert

press the < ESC 7 key.

Adren

Search

COPY

MOW

File

rygdtt

I

I Insert 1

As described

(i)

below,

Example:

l

there are four types

of sequence

program

addition

in a ladder

diagram.

when a relay contact is added on a line

Addilion

on a line

HHt To be added

Move

the cursor

to the position

to add item(s),

Item (c) above.

-45-

then

enter

item(s)

in the way described

in

4.

l

When a vertical

line affects

OPERATION

addition

[Operation] Move the cursor

to the position

[

4_

] to delete

J

] to create

Press

shown the

above.

vertical

line

to

the

left

extending

upward.

This

disappears. Press

[

1. A horizontal

[ -

then press

Move the cursor Press

(ii)

When

[ -_I

a line

a vertical

line extending line and vertical

to the point on the line where

+

upward

to the right of the cursor,

line are created.

a contact

is to be added.

] to add a contact.

is added

vertically

iii+.’

N- To be added

_

To add a line vertically,

an area is required

lower

diagram

cursor

part of the ladder

to any point in the ladder

must

for the addition.

be shifted

diagram

enclosed

down

To create

by one line.

in dashed

lines,

such an area,

the

To do this, move

the

then press

the [insnet]

key. Each time the [insnetj

large enough

the lower

an area for addition.

line down to create After line addition,

key is pressed,

any remaining

part of the ladder

Make an addition

diagram

is shifted

in this area.

area (as In the case where

two lines are added

for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation] Move the cursor

to any point in the ladder diagram

enclosed

in dashed

Press [insnet]. The lower

part of the ladder

diagram

is shifted

-46-

one

down by one line.

Ilnes.

in an area

4.

When the [insnet) When

key IS pressed

the [rnsnet]

specified

key IS pressed

after

entering

a numeric

entering

a numeric

value,

one line is Inserted.

value,

the number

of lines

is inserted.

Move the cursor

to the desired

and press the
insertion

position

> key.

and press

The the cursor

] soft key to create

Press the [ L

(iii) Line

without

OPERATION

in a single-net

Blank lines are inserted

sequence

-_1 f--j.

[

moves

Then set address

data

right.

an OR circuit

program

one by one.

(Operation] 0

Enter

the number

number

of lines

to be inserted,

key is pressed

without

-v-

4

the

(inslin]

key.

The

entered

entering

a number,

just one line is added.)

-1 Cursor

If the (insltn]

key

IS

pressed

figure. a blank line is inserted

Elements

press

of lines is inserted.

(When the [inslin]

(iv) Element

then

insertion

when

as shown

in a single-net

are added

the cursor

is posttioned

in the right-hand

sequence

as shown

In the left-hand

figure.

program

one by one.

[Operation]

0

Enter the number number

If the character [inselm]

of elements

of elements

key

IS

(If the [Inselm] just one element

to be inserted,

then press the [inselmj

key.

The entered

is Inserted.

c A>

is prefixed

pressed.

elements

key IS pressed

to the number are inserted

without

entering

of elements

the number

of elements

is inserted.) II

1,

-47-

to be Inserted

and the

after the cursor.

. e .. ..,(..,.

II

I

to be inserted,

4. OPERATION

II the

(inselm]

key is pressed

figure,

an element

before

the cursor.

If the character placed

The element

in a sequence

(1) Deletion

A program

] :

I 4 I 2

]

Use the

in the following

and the [inselm] figure,

is inserted

deleted

one of the below

[ _____

is placed

as shown

figure.

The element

key is pressed

an element

in the left-hand

is inserted

when

is inserted

the cursor

as shown

Deletes

after the cursor.

by positioning

the cursor

at the location

to be deleted

three soft keys

a horizontal

line, relay contact,

relay coil, etc.

:

Deletes

a vertical

line extending

upward

to the left of the cursor.

] :

Deletes

a vertical

line extending

upward

to the right of the cursor.

[Delnet]

is

in the right-

program

can be partially

and pressing

(ii)

in the left-hand

cursor

the

as shown

is entered

as shown

hand figure.

(i)

is inserted

when

key to delete

a program

net (section

from

an RD instruction

to a WRT

instruction).

(iii) Multiple

nets can be deleted

in&net

lfisert

Reklai

one by one.

&dress

&.&.

Serrrh

..ki;e., SjrBiiR

MWQ

1

[Delnet]

[Operation] 0

Deletion Move

the cursor

deleted

G? Deletino Move

to the net to be deleted,

is displayed

multiple

by using keys such as the cursor

key, then display value

key.

The net to be

nets

the cursor

numeric

then press the (Delnet]

in red.

the nets to be deleted

is entered.

the cursor

value.

-48-

in red. moves

down key,

[c-down]

If the [c-down]

as many

times

key, or [search]

key is pressed as the entered

after a numeric

4. OPERATION

0

Execution

: Press the [exec] key.

Cancellation

: Press

the [cancel] key.

Deletion except

: Press

the [exclud] key. Exclude nets except specified nets in 8.

specified nets r4, When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to delete, enter the number of nets to delete, then press operatron. steps ci) and 8 (g) Searching

in a sequence

the [Delnet]

key.

With

this

can be omitted.

program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

J

[Search]

U) Itop When this key is pressed,

the start of the sequence program is drsplayed on the screen

and the cursor is moved to the start of the program. (ii)

[bottom] When this key is pressed,

the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and

the cursor is moved to the end of the program. (iii) [srch] Search

operatton using

this

key searches

the program for aspecified

current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. IS found, it is displayed on the screen.

address

from the

When an address

An address to search for can be specified in one of

two ways. CiJ Address

specrfication usrnq the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press key.

Thus operatron searches

the program for the specified address

the [srch]

from the current

location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. If the specified address

is found, the sectron of the program containg the address

displayed on the screen.

The cursor IS automatically positioned at the found address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move. To terminate searching, press the < ESC > key.

-49-

is

4.

F54.1

x2.0 -;+@ri@#%?.

Y52.3 I” Cl

OPERATION

G11.6

.(

035.3

I, II

G17.2

- When the same address as this address is to be searched for, move the cursor to this position, then press the [srch] key.

Y49.1

X4.2

032.0

x14.0 +I F54.1

G43.1

b

- When the same address is found, the cursor moves to this location.

D21.2

x0.5

G3 Address soecification Enter the address This operation

by address

searches

of the cursor

the program

on the screen

When the specified is displayed

on

inout

to find with the keyboard,

for the specified

address

.

key.

from the current

location

to the end of the program.

address the

then press the [srch]

is found, The

screen.

the section cursor

of the program

is automatically

containing positioned

the address at the

found

address. If the search

(iv) [w-srch]

operation

location

is found, closest

to search of the cursor

it is displayed to the cursor

the program

an error indication

appears.

Ci> Address

soecification

srch]

the cursor

address


If multiple

relay coils are found,

When

from the

a relay

the coil which

coil

is the

for can be specilied

in one of two ways.

usino the cursor

to the relay

coil with the address

to search

for, then

press

the

[w-

key.

This operation current

location

When

a relay

containing

searches

coil

with

it is displayed

If the search

operation

appears.

Address

spectfication

Enter

the address

srchj

key.

This operation location

the program

of the cursor

indication

current

coil with a specified

is displayed

of a relay coil to search

Move

for a relay

on the screen

on the screen.

The address

Q

address,

(WRT coil search)

This key is used current

fails to find the specified

the

for relay coils with the specified

on the screen specified

on the screen

bv address of relay

searches

coils

is found,

and the cursor coil

the

section

is positioned

with

the

of the

program

at the relay coil.

specified

address,

an error

input to search

the program

of the cursor

from the


address

fails to find a relay

address

for with

the keyboard,

then

for relay coils wrth the specified

on the screen

- 50 -


press

address

the

[w-

from the

4. OPERATION

When

a relay coil with the specified

address

is found,

the section

of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil. If the search

operation

fails to find a relay coil with the specified

address,

an error

Indication appears.

(v) [n-srch]

(net-number

search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of If the

the screen. advanced

[n-srch]

key is pressed

without

entering

a number,

the display

is

by one net.

(vi) [s-srch ] (function-instruction This key searches

search)

for function instructions.

Searching

is performed

instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch]

key.

by entering a function

If the [s-srch]

key IS pressed

while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as that function instruction are searched for.

(vii)Search

operation

using the cursor

c

*,

< -+ >)

l

Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key.

l

Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key.

l

The address is searched

for.

The NET No. is searched for.

Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number, then press a cursor key. Example:

Enter

Sl,

searched (viii)

keys (<

Searching When

The function instruction is searched for.

then press

a cursor

key.

The

function

instruction

END1

for,

in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)

the source

program

type is “FORMAT-B/C”,

global searching

in all main/sub-

programs is enabled.

l

is

The range of search All programs, whrch rnclude a currently dtsplayed subprogram, The subprogram

is searched

are searched

for.

for in the ascending order of P address.

a)

From the current cursor posttion to bottom of currently opening subprogram.

b)

From next numbered

c)

From LEVEL1 to subprogram

d)

From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

subprogram

to last numbered

one.

of which P address is small next to a).

-51-

4. OPERATION

G-SRCH

mode continues

unless

pushing

the c ESC > key or the [cancel]

key.

1st net of LEVEL1

Whole program

-

Final net of the maximum

numbered

subprogram

-1 (Searching

in the order of 0 -@)

. l

Searching

result

When the object

of search

In case of finding

in another

is found,

the cursor

program,

will move

the program

to the position.

which

is currently

displayed

will be

closed. Then,

the program

which

position

with the cursor.

At this

time,

modifications

When

whether

to save

in the program

two or more

contains

objects

the

or quit

object,

will be opened

modifications

to display

is inquired,

in case

the

object

there

are

to be closed.

exist,

the result

by one.

- 52 -

of search

are displayed

in order

of 1) one

4. OPERATION

Operation

l

The global

search

is operated

,,;‘~+.$-s+~

4-4

with the following

functton

key.

6 -..-L-,~‘L~_“a

5 -t&&t*

t@r .+_ s +r.

j

,o&~er)

(cornand] 8

i

[comand]

insnet

d)

J

2

D&net

Select

1

2

1

2

in5Qtt 4 AdrQSj, 5 %arctI

the (G-srch]

with pushing

command

Starting

is ” -z G >

of “G-SRCH”

Copy

the [SHIFT]

7

&lrruc 8

(the following

Fk

iyhdlt

9

will be displayed)

lo

in state of 03

It switches

Execution Refer

to the mode

of “G-SRCH”

by the operation

are searched

unless

quitting

of 0) +O.

“G-SRCH”

mode.

of search

to “(c)

[search]“‘“(d)

[w-srch]“/“(e)

for how to specify

program”,

c) End of “G-SRCH” “G-SRCH” different

+ [COMMAND]“)

mode

After that, all programs

b)

6

3

(Shortcut

4

3

[s-srch]”

the target

of global

by pushing

in “(7)Searching

in a sequence

search.

mode

mode

is ended

> or [cancel]

key.

The end method

is

individually.

-

=

Only “G-SRCH”

mode

is ended.

The program

on the opening

now

is the state as it is.

- [cancel]

=

It returns SRCH”

to the mode.

Whether

PI Copying sections of A multiple-net

sequence

net can be copied remains

a sequence program

tn the same

which

The program

will save

modifications

program

or quit

was

on the opening modifications

in the program

opened

which

at beginning

the

“G-

there

are

now closes.

is inquired,

is currently

in case

displayed.

program can be copied

net by net.

file that is being

as it was.

- 53 -

edited

Specify

the net to be copied.

or into another

file.

The selected

The net

4.

File which

OPERATION

is being edited

Specified

file

(COPY 1 Range

to be copied [until]

Fig. 4.5.2.2

I

to

cancel

sear&

c-down

(b)

&fil

Pup

tu-arg

[Operation] Copying Place

a net

the cursor

displayed

on the net to be copied

and press

the [Copy]

key.

The selected

net is

in yellow.

Copying

two or more nets

To select copied,

the nets to be copied,

then

pressing

move

the cursor

the cursor

up, cursor

are displayed

in yellow.

Alternatively,

enter

first move

to the net at the other down,

[c-up],

value

and press

a numeric

moves

according

Setting

the net or nels to be copied

Press the [until]

Specllying

the cursor

to the specified

[c-down],

the

to the first net of the range end

of the range

or [search]

[c-up]

key.

or [c-down]

to be

to be copied The selected

key.

The

by nets

cursor

value.

key.

the copy

destination

using the [to]

key

(Copying

the net or nets

in the same

file) Move

the cursor

selected

to the copy

net or nets are copied

destination

in the

immediately

- 54-

same

above

file and

the copy

press

destination

the

[to]

key.

specified

The bv the

4.

cursor.

To copy

the selected

they are to be copied

Specifying

before

net or nets two or more pressing

the copy destination

times,

enter

OPERATION

the number

of times

the [to] key.

using the (to-fill

key

(Copying

the net or nets into another

file) 1)

Press the (to-fill

key.

If no program

The following

is specified.

LATMP

is displayed.

is created.

,.

” (LATMP 2)

message

file:

Temporary

Enter the name of the file into which

work file used in editing)

the net(s) is to be copied

and press the < Enter >

key. 3)

Select

desired

4)

If the

selected

Select

desired

processing

from the following

destination

file is present,

processing

and 0 (Note)

(0

to be copied

enter

are known

the number

beforehand,

of nets to be copied,

nets cannot

menu

is dispfayed.

place

the cursor

then press

on the

the [Copy]

key.

program

A multiple-net

can be moved

sequence

The selected or output

program

net or nets can be moved

to another

The only difference

first net to be Steps

file.

between

The selected

copying

net by net. to another

Specify

place

a,

the net or nets

to be

net or nets are deleted.

and moving

Oelfiet

Wart

Adrew

karch

cancel

search

c-down

C-U&l

[Move] uirtll

0,

in the same file that is being

IS that the selected

net or nets are deleted

moving.

fnznet

the

be copied.

Moving sections of a sequence

edited

POP-UP

can be skipped. Incorrect

copied.

the following

Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces previous data of the file. Cancels output to the selected file. Appends the copy to the selected file.

-

If the nets

menu:

from the menu.

---t

copied,

POP-UP

c

- 55-

COPV

Mawe

Pile

it&B

rn

4.

OPERATION

[Operation] Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0

(Note)

(i)

to Q for copying.

Incorrect nets cannot be moved.

Combining

a sequence

program

A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited. The source program to be combined

can be displayed and edited separately,

then combined

to

the original source program that is being edited.

Original screen

View screen

File being edited

[Sourcefiie-

P-01

(original file)

Combine

File to be combined

IVfEWJ

combined

Input

(view file)

Section to be edited

Fig. 4.5.2.2

(c)

Combining

a Sequence

Programs of model which is different from the specified connection

(TO]

or enter

[VIEW].

(If a disagreement

Program

model can be specified is found,

to the files of

a warning

message

is

displayed.) In this case,

no errors will be detected

even if the file to be combined

range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified will be detected

in compilation.)

When ignoring the warning message,

continue the operation.

-56-

contains

an address

model.

(The error

be extremely

careful to

4.

(i)

OPERATION

Function keys

[Comand]

I

itwhet

Delnet

Insert

A&en

Mitch

Mbw?

COPY

r

; ‘Flli .’

::... i@llt

d SIIWPLE -+ t-------

__-_

-

YO 0 ---_c+-

I

I

rRD= 1SY=

~334~5ulumm3rn331~’

I

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (d)

cco-

wao1

RCO= -___

_

Screen Displayed when a File is Opened

- 57 -

by the [File] Command

4. OPERATION

(ii) Operation

flowchart

for combining

a sequence

program

Start ladder diagram editing (original screen)

1 Specify an Insertion point (The data is inserted Immediately above the cursor.)

1 Press the [File]

key

r_lrC1T7 Specify

a view file

menu

1 (View) Shows the ladder ‘< diagram of the file to be combined (View screen)

Combines the(To) file with the Ladder program on the original screen

1. Check the displayed data of the file to be combined 2. Edit the data of the file to be combined and combine it

1. The file is immediately combined. The data of the file is not displayed. L _I

1 on the view screen

Press the -z ESC z= key to terminate -z POP-UP

menu (Quit)

t (Save) Saves the Ladder program shown on the view screen L

*l: The name

editing

of the temporary

Fig. 4.5.2.2

(e)

*I

Saves the data in a provisional

Cancels the edited data -

(Edit)

(Temp)

work file

Returns to the ladder diagram screen (The view screen is continued.)

work file is LATMP.

Operation

Flowchart

for Combining

-58-

a Sequence

Program

4. OPERATION

(iii) Examples

Example

1. Combrning

a sequence

program

file

[Operation] Place the cursor

Select

on the insertion

point on the original

screen.

[File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined

From the following

menu,

select

Fl (To).

immediately

above

and press the -z Enter > key.

/I

The

file

is inserted

the

net

specified

in step

QI>.

(Original

screen)

Example

2. Combining

a modified

sequence

program

(Operation] t’il

Place the cursor

G3 Select

‘3

on the insertion


screen.

(File].

Enter the name of the file to be combining

6.9 From the following

menu,

select

and press the < Enter > key.

F2 (View).

jiil

@

Edit

the

Ladder

conventional

key.

program

on the

(Ladder

editing

view can

way.)

- 59 -

screen. be

To terminate

performed

and

editing, terminated

press

the

in

the

4.

From the following

menu,

Fl

Save (update)

F2

Quit

F3

Rename

F4

Edit

F5

Create

Return Then,

The

file

Fl (Save).

& Save

Latemp

to the screen select

select

OPERATION

file

of step @ and check

the name

of the file output

in step ‘$3.

Fl (To).

is inserted

immediately

above

the

net

specified

in step

0.

(Original

screen)

Example

3.

Combining

a specified

section

of a sequence

program

[Operation] Place the cursor

on the insertion


screen.

[File].

Select

Enter the name of the file to be combined

From the pop-up

Select

[Copy]

menu,

select

or [Move]

and press the < Enter > key.

F2 (View).

on the

view

screen

and

specify

a desired

range

with

[until].

From

the

original

following

function

menu,

select

(to-org].

(Specify

insertion

into

the

screen.)

[until] cancel

to

From the following

The

data

search

menu,

is inserted

c-down

select

to-fil

c-up

to-org

Fl (Exec)

immediately

screen)

-6O-

above

the

net

specified

in step

0.

(Original

4. OPERATION

(k)

Editing

a symbol

On the ladder

and comment

diagram

editing

from screen,

the ladder a symbol

diagram

editing

and comment

screen

added

at the specified

address

can be edited.

[syEdit]

[Operation] Specifying

an address

To edit a symbol address

Editing

the symbol moves

and press the
editing

section

> key.

in the bottom

The cursor

Terminates

editrng after modifying

key :

Terminates

editing

input

with

then

without

the [comand]

key can be directly

below.

brackets

to the symbol

:

Each function strings

the cursor

on the corresponding

moves

right part of the screen. to the comment

Edit

field.

editing

key

Abbreviated

place

and comment

The cursor

[cancel]

diagram,

key.

the symbol

[exec]

press

the data.

modifying

the data.

key

selected

the

[cornand]

with the [cornand] function

key.

key.

Those

Enter one of the character

portions

that

are enclosed

in

can be omitted.

I

(nsert)

D

(elnet)

S

(earth)

C

(OPY)

M

(ove)

F

(ile)

The function

(Note)

in a ladder

and press the [syEdit]

Terminating

(1)

and comment

The

keys in the menu above

1c

keys

extending

or 4.)

upward

line is for creation to a function

and

(SY) E

can be used for program

[A

or-4

] are used

to the left or right of the cursor and the dashed

key depends

W

vertical

on the ladder

-61

creation

to create

in a ladder

-

and cursor

or delete diagram.

line is for deletion.

diagram

and search

a vertical

line

The solid vertical

The menu

position.

operations.

item applying

4.

OPERATION

(m) ZOOM Subprograms

called

by the currently

can easily be referenced

(i)

selected

issuing

of a CALLCALLU

instruction

and edited.

Start up of zoom 0

Moved

the cursor

> key.

to the parameter

ROOl .O ACT IL

@

The program

-

now

SUB65 CALL

on opening

of the CALLCALLU

instruction

and push the

PO01

hides from the editing screen.

which is specified by the parameter (ii)

program’s

Then

the subprogram

in mentioning above appears on the screen.

Start up under editing When ZOOM be inquired.

is attempted Select

while editing

the program,

the preservation

of

modificatibns

will

either

(ii,) End When the end operation with the < ESC > key is attempted by ZOOM,

it will return to the state when

return to the program

configuration

screen

ZOOM

in the program editing

is started.

Moreover,

screen

it is possible

to

all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

~1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Save(update) Quit Rename,save Edrt Main

Fl :Save(update)

& quit & quit

& quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM

was started, after the content of current

program screen is preserved.

F2:Quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM program

screen

IS cancelled.

-62

-

was started,

after the content

of current

4. OPERATION

@

Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,

and the area for comment

enclosed

by

‘(*’ and “)’ is inserted. Then the cursor changes

into character-size

cursor,

and type comment

sentence

onto

the area. The area for Net comment

expands

display mode) automatically

according to the comment

and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines sentences.

Every Net comment

can expands up to a hundred lines.

RlOOl .o

Y2000.4 A

R1000.2

R120.3 X-+’

character cursor

(* Net comment (* All characters R1OO1.O ----IMI

(ii) To determine

@

To cancel cancelled

Note)

‘) ‘) Y23.4 A

R1000.2

or cancel the editing Net comment

@I To determtne comment

1

is written in here. you can enter are available.

the editing Net comment,

is fixed,

and the Net comment

the editing Net comment,

press [ end ] or .

Then the editing

editing mode is finished.

press

[cancel].

The new Net comment

will be

and erased.

The number of characters ASCII character

in a Net comment

as one byte,

one Japanese

is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one kana as one byte, one kanji character

as two bytes. ‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment.

Line feed is helpful to save memory

for Net comment.

(iir) To modify Net comment 0

Place the cursor on the Net comment ” < Shift z= + [netcmt 1” or < Enter > and the Net comment

@

At Net comment

which you want to modify and press The Net comment

ediling mode becomes

active,

will be ready to modify its contents.

editing mode,

to Insert a blank line tnto Net comment,

(’ Net comment

is written in here.

7

(’ All characters

you can enter are available.

7

- 64 -

press [inslin].

4.

[inslin]

will shrfl irnes at the cursor

at the cursor

and after down

by one line,

and make

a blank

line

position.

(’ Net comment

is written

in here.

‘)

(’

‘)

(’ All characters

l)


(’ (3

OPERATION

*)

At Net comment

editing

mode,

to delete

by line, press

[dellin].

l)

(* Net comment

is written

in here.

(’ Net comment

will expand

(’ All characters


or shrink automatically.

‘) ‘)

(‘

‘)

[dellin]

will delete

whole

one line at the cursor

and shift lines after the cursor

up by one

line. (’ Net comment

is written

(’ All characters


@I To exit from Net comment

@

To cancel the

editing

the modifications

modifications

and

l) l)

in here.

press ( end 1 or < ESC >.

mode,

you have just made,

the

Net

comment

press

will

be

[cancel].

restored

[cancel] as

it

will abandon

was

before

the

> with

the

modifications.

(iv)To

delete

Net comment

There are two ways to delete

0

0

Net comment

Use [Delnet]

as same as deleting

“[command]

+

Entering cursor

[Delnet]

Net comment

normal

+ specify

editing

on the Net comment

ladder

nets.

area to delete

-x [exec]”

by ”
mode

> + [netcmt]”

which you want to delete.

or

and then press

[delete].

(v) Lost Net comment A Net comment “Net

comment

themselves.

of the information

pointer”, These

and

two

but the partner

comment, copying

consists

the ladder

When a Net comment

called

“Lost

normalized comment,

comment are

string

usually

pointer

data”

which

combined

be lost by illegal

or modifying

in sequence

one

file operations

the Net comment

loses its Net comment

program

which

is comment to one

to

is called

sentences make

or something,

a Net such

data file “NETCMT.000”

string data, the Net comment

as by is

Net comment”.

Lost Net comment displayed

might

file “‘.#LA”

user.

“Net

elements

of posttion

is displayed

in purple by editing

or

dimly

as blank on

operation.

such as deletion,

copying

Net comment

monochrome Lost

-65-

display.

Net comment

and so on.

enclosed Lost can

by “(“’ Net

be edited

and “‘)” comment

which can

as a normal

is be Net

4. OPERATION

(p) To edit New page

It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. the position is called “New page”,

0)

This specification

and each of them occupies two steps in sequence

of

program.

To enter New page 0

Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page.

And then press ” +

1 page 1”.

R1OO1.O

R1000.2

Y2000.4 A ”

R1000.2

Y23.4

R120.3 zJ+” R1OO1.O

n v

+Ht @ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,

R1OO1.O

and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1000.2

Y2000.4

A

.

R120.3 =LI’
page>

R 1000.2

Y23.4

n

----1Hl (ii) Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. copying [ Copy 1, moving ( Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] New page.

(q)

Terminating

editing

of a sequence

program

[Operation] 0

Press the < ESC > key on the following editing screen.

- 66 -

The operations

such as

ladder nets are also effective on

4.

The following

a)

editing

Fl :Save(update) After current

b)

& quit of the editing

is preserved,

the editing

screen

will be ended.

content

of the editing

is cancelled.

the editing

screen

will be ended.

FB:Rename,save

editing

& quit

content

screen

of the editing

is preserved

into specified

subprogram

name,

the

will be ended.

F4:Edit The < ESC > key operation

e)

appears.

content

After current

d)

menu)

F2:Quit Alter current

c)

end menu(pop-up

OPERATION

is canceled

and it returns

to the editing

screen

of former.

F5:Main With the operation was started

“a)“.“b)”

or “c)“.

But with this operation,

once from the nested

it returns it returns

to the program to a program

screen

where

configuration

ZOOM

screen

at all

state.

Either the above-mentioned

is selected

the main menu or the program

screen

and it returns where

ZOOM

NET

NO.”

to the program

configuration

screen,

was started.

When error net exists When

the error

displayed.

a)

” ERROR

After the error net is corrected

When

is displayed

and

the end

menu

is not

Cope thts case by the following.

operation

b)

net exists,

pressed

CANCEL),

or deleted

and the state of the error is released.

the end

will be done.

< ESC>

the menu

of 8

-

When Save is ordered,

-

When

Quit

cancelling

is ordered, the content

key

in the

state

of 0

after

“CAN”

is typed

(meaning

of

editing

by

will be displayed. it will be preserved it will

be

of the editing.

-67-

able

after removing to return

to the

the error net. state

before

4. OPERATION

(3)

Step sequence Position

diagram

the cursor

The step sequence

to a program editing

ZDIT(LADDER/STEP

0

Cl s3

screen

marked

SEQUENCE)

then press

as shown

the [ZOOM]

or < Enter > key.

below:

R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

cl s13

Sll

with 01,

is displayed

Cl s21

0

s31

P3 s4

0

n s15 r======================I=I

0

S24 l-l

Note

1 (Note 1)

_. 1)

The current The

entire

position screen

and 64 elements any element

On the step sequence

of the cursor consists

on the

screen

of 32 elements

from top to bottom.

is indicated.

across

The cursor

the

screen

is positioned

to

on the screen.

screen,

different

soft keys

are displayed,

depending

on the position

of the

cursor.

When the cursor

is on the step line, following

softkey

r1

III

1111

is displayed.

+ L4 L-1 s30

I

I

I n1 s2

menu

SlQ

1 II

I

+

Cl

s20

JMP

+

-L

LBL

[

Cl

]

:

Step subprogram

( +-LBL

]

(

[Ll]

]

:

initial step subprogram

I

I:

[

rl]

] : Block step subprogram

[ FUNC

]

:

Various

] :

[

]

:

Grammatical

]

:

Zooming

I I [ -+JMP

]

Line for link

: Jump to label

-ICHK

[ ZOOM

-68-

:

FUNC

CHK

Label for jump The end of block step functions checking

into a subprogram

ZOOM

4.

OPERATION

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

P30

t 1==

1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I

I t I l1

l=

=

I I I t1

T=

=

I [ FUNC [

CHK

[ ZOOM

(i)

: : : : : : : : : :

1

(f-1

f-.-

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

CHK

ZOOM

Transition Divergence

of selective sequence

Divergence

of simultaneous

sequence

Line for link Convergence

of selective sequence

Convergence

of simultaneous

sequence

Various functions Grammatical

checking

Zooming into a subprogram

Entering a step Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key. Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [rl)

key causes a step to be created,

A free step number is automatically

as shown below

assigned.

I

q Sl

t STEP ACTION

: Sl : l-l

u

101

I:1 1

I

+

The specified subprogram number (Pi0

JMP

+- LBL

in thus example)

-69-

-L

FUNC

is displayed below Sl.

4. OPERATION

STEP ACTION

: 61 : PlO l-l

To change

the step number,

press the

STEP and use the [BS] key to change

STEP ACTION

> key to position

the character

cursor

”

” on

the number.

: Sl(f : PlO l-l

(ii)

Entering

a transition

Position

the cursor

to the desired

Enter a subprogram

input position,

then press the [ + ] key

number

Press the [ + 1 key.

I InI

Sl

PLO0

+ ACTION

: l-2

[

I+_Il==l

f

Enter a subprogram

I

It-_l

FUNC

number.

I [l3lsl

PlOO

+ ACTION

: PlOO l-2

-7o-

CHK

ZOOM

4. OPERATION

(vii)

Specifying Position

a label for jump destination the cursor

to the desired

input position

(step line), then press the [c

LBL] key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the I+- LBL] key.

IiWI Sk PI0

I-

PlOO

LABEL

: Llo l-l

II

[l.ll

I II

I

+

JMP

+

LBL

-L

FUNC

Enter a label name.

STEP ACTION

: $1 : PlO l-1

-73-

CHK

ZOOM

4.

(viii)

Specifying Position

OPERATION

a label jump the cursor

to the dewed

input position

(step line), then press the [-

JMPJ key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the [-

t

JMP]

key.

LlO

[OISl

to I

Ells2

f

PlOO

.-

LEBEL

: 2-3

[Ul

0

I

01

--*JMP

+-LBL

-L

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

Enter a label name.

1

+ LlO [UlSl

PlOO I--Tcl]S2 t

PlOO

--, tY.cl

PlOO

LEBEL

: Llo 2-3

-74-

4.

Deleting

an element

Position

the cursor

In the example selected

to the element

shown

Specify

two figures

the element

video.

To position

restore

the state shown

--

above.

the cursor

to be deleted.

displayed

above.

then press the < Delete > key.

(elements)

to be deleted

of a selective

with the narrow

in reverse

press the (ESC]

OPERATION

video,

branch

cursor,

and transition

displayed

press the
are

in reverse > key.

To

key.

PlOO

If the
> key is pressed

the following

screen

in the state shown

is displayed:

c

IO] Sl

PlOtt

-75-

above,

the selective

branch

is deleted

and

4.

To specify

another

figure,

OPERATION

press the < Delete > key again.

I IO1 Sl

PlQO i

Inserting

an element

Position

the cursor

to the desired

an empty

row, press the
To create

an empty

column,

insertion

position,

then press the c Insert > key. To create

> key.

press the [Shift]

and
> keys

I IO1 Sl

c ,;,= ==i====; dlS2

I1

P2

SlO

PlO

P20

Sll

n s21 I

IP1l

n I

Cl s20

t s3

n I

STEP ACTION

: S2 : P200 1-3

-76-

4. OPERATION

Press the < Insert > key.

c PI

1-3

Press the (Shift]

and < Insert > key.

I

c

101 Sl

Pl

============

I

I

n SlO

rllS2

P2 t Ll I

s3

t r3

s20

PlO

P20

Sll

Ll s21

t

I STEP ACTION

I i-l

I : s2 : P102 l-3

- 77 -

4. OPERATION

(xi)

Search

Pl ~,=y==

i ====

; =

ols2

El

SlO

cl s20

Pll

P21

Pl ;.

1 u I

ciilS2

If the [F8] (FUNC) shown

t 0 I

SlO

s20

key is pressed

in the stale shown

above,

a pop-up

menu

below:

l-7 Fl F2 F3 F4 F5

Search

COPY Move mAin List

I

I

Ells3

El Sll

Press the (Fl]

(Search)

0

key.

s21

A pop-up

menu

Pl ===========

t

uls3

I

F6

Toe

jP7180ttoln

-78-

is displayed,

as shown

below:

is displayed

as

4. OPERATION

Then, press the [Fl]

(Step)

key.

Another

pop-up

menu is displayed,

as shown

below:

Pl

t

.xb

La

I

search

string:%Ai

SI

Position Toe Bottom

Enter the step number The system

(xii)

starts searching

Fl F2

Se Co F1

;:

",; ;:

F5

Li %:

Copying

to be searched

or moving

through

for (S20, for example), the part subsequent

an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC)

key.

Pl =========== f IYISZ

I L_) SlO

I 1-J s20

Pll

P21

Pl I

t

t

-79-

then press the

to the cursor.

key.

4.

When the [FBI (FUNC)

t

key is pressed,

a pop-up

menu

is displayed

as shown

OPERATION

below:

Pl PI=========

Fl F2

Search Copy

F3

Move

F4 F5

mAin List

:

Press the (F2) (Copy)

t

key.

The system

prompts

the operator

to enter a start point.

Pl =========PI

I L71s2

I

cl

SlO

Pll

Pl i......+

P21 1

Specify

Posltion

Ll s20

ACTION : Start position

the cursor

press the
l-t

to the desired > key.

l-2

start point (position

The system

prompts

2-3 in the example

the operator

to enter

Pl ===========

I

I

13JS2

cl s10

17 s20

Pl

Pll

P21

i Specify

t ACTION : End position

+

2-3

-8O-

shown

below),

the end point.

then

4.

Position

the cursor

to the desired

press the < Enter > key.

t

end point (position

The system

prompts

3-4 in the example

the operator

to specify

shown

OPERATION

below),

then

a copy destination.

Pl ===PIIP===I

SpeciEy

Position

ACTION End position

the cursor

: 3-4

to the desired

then press the < Enter > key.

copy destination

The specified

(position

4-3 in the example

part is copied.

t ==I=====

ACTION

: PlOO 4-3

When a part is copied,

-

The S address

is not copied.

-

The P address

is copied.

Assign a free number.

If required,

change

-81

the address.

-

shown

below),

4.

(xiir) Returning

from the ZOOM

To return to the program procedure

below.

subprogram

Press the [F8] (FUNC)

to the program

configuration

The system

from which the [ZOOM] The edited

destination

screen,

assumes

key was pressed,

configuration

displayed

that the editing

screen

when editing

OPERATION

(MAIN).

was started,

of the step sequence

follow

subprogram,

is suspended.

is not saved in the source

program

file.

key.

Pl t==========

(t

I UlS2

u

t

t

After pressing

s20

P21

Pll

Pl i

I

17 SlO

the [F8] (FUNC)

key

I+

Pl ===========

After pressing

the [F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

RC~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 a PO(fOl u PO008 n]POO21 .

LEVEL2 0 PO002 fl PO009 cl PO022

LEVEL3 n PO004 n PO014 n PO024

u 0 0

t~jPO101

c-1 PO202

01PO304

tT]]PO405

-82-

PO005 PO015 PO025

0 PO006 fl PO016 fl PO026 . .

0 0

PO007 PO017 q ]POO27 . .

a]PO406

u]PO407

the

4. OPERATION

Following

keys are useful in this screen.

Function

key

Other keys

] :Displaying

[ MAIN

the subprogram

configuration

[ CHANGE

] :Creating

(ZOOM

J :Modifying

Screen

: Displaying

< Page up >

< Page down > : Displaying

screen

previous

screen

next screen

a new subprogram a subprogram

display

U]P200

The subprogram program which

which

to a certain they

displayed

I0

are

is being

depth,

nested.

is displayed.

the subprogram The

If the [ZOOM]

numbers

subprogram

for which

are arranged the

[ZOOM]

fl

PO016

key is pressed

to nest the

from the left in the order key

was

pressed

first

in is

at the left end.

PO008

Subprograms following

(ii

PO009

referenced

mark:

:

Ladder

cl]

:

Step sequence

(xv) Checking

c~] PO014

0

by the subprogram

:

0

subprogram subprogram

the syntax

Press the [CHK]

It

edited

key.

Pl

i

cl162

I

I II

Pl

SlO

Ll

P21

Pll t

s20

t

-84-

PO015

that

is currently

being

0

PO017

edited

are listed

I

with the

4. OPERATION

When the [ZOOM]

key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram

which is to be edited.

Meaning of the figure

Figure

Step sequence

cl

Subprogram

to be edited

Ladder subprogram

subprogram

01

Initial step sequence

subprogram

Ladder subprogram

n1

block step sequence

subprogram

step sequence

t

Transition

subprogram

Ladder subprogram

(xvii) End of modifying Press the [ESC] key.

t

Pl ==I========

Fl F2 F3 F4 F5

Save(update) Quit Edit Rename, save Optimize

I

h quit

b quit

I

I

Menus

Result of editing

Editing

Menu

Display Optimized

Save

End

Updated

Quit

End

Discarded

Edit

Continue

Continued

Not optimized

Rename

End

Updated

Optimized

optimize

I Continue

I Optimized and continued

-86-

-

I Optimized

4. OPERATION

4.5.2.3 l

Symbol & comment editing

Moving

< t

the cursor

>, < +

>, CT

>. <

1 >

+ ,<-+>

Moves

the cursor

to another

field to be edited.

Moves

the cursor

to another

position

within the field to

be edited.

l

Entering When

a comment a front-end

Japanese. compiled

in Japanese processor

for Japanese

When a comment (an object

are replaced

containing

file is created),

word

input

is used,

kana characters

all the kana characters

a comment

or m-type

and m-type

with spaces.

(1) Start

[Operation] 0

Select

[SYMBOL]

8

The following

(symbol

symbol

and comment)

and comment

RDDRESS SYMBOL

~

Xlwm3.8

editing

from the editing

screen

menu.

appears:

COIL_COMWENTB88BBBBB/8BBOBBlL RELRV CONMENI COIL COHNENT

SYMBOL-A'

RELQV COliNENl-fl COIL C6NNENTki

Fig. 4.5.2.3

- 87 -

can be entered

alphanumeric alphanumeric

characters characters

in is

4.

(2)

Entering

a new symbol

A new symbol

OPERATION

and comment

and comment

can be added

at an address

to which

no symbol

or comment

is

assigned.

[Operation] m

Select

8

An input window

0

[ADD]

opens

t

Address

Symbol

field

45) The cursor

is positioned

(9

Relay

t

COmmenl

Coil comment

field

entry field.

to the symbol

is positioned

entry field

to the relay comment

Enter coil comment

entry field.

data.

is positioned

@I The entered

screen.

data.

G9 Enter relay comment

@I The cursor

editing

t field

in the address

Enter an address

Enter symbol

and comment

on the screen.

t

‘$9 The cursor

0

on the symbol

to the coil comment

entry

field.

data.

data is stored,

clearing

the previous

address,

symbol

data, and comment

data

from the window.

When

no symbols

and comments

a symbol

and comment

are entered,

the system

is automatically

set to receive

new

data.

(3) Editing

A symbol

and comment

assigned

to an address

can be edited

[Operation] (1) If the system

8

is set to receive

Move

the cursor

by pressing

To move

the cursor

withln

new data, select

the < + >,

a field, while

(QUIT]

to exit from that state.

< + >, < ? >, or < 1 ) key and edit the data

pressing

key.

- 88 -

the

< Shift > key press

the -z t)

or < + >

4. OPERATION

(4) Moving a comment A comment

assigned

to an address

can be moved

to another

address.

[Operation] 0

Place the cursor

8

Select

0

The following

on the comment

to be moved.

[DELETE].

message

Comment

appears

data copied

@

Place the cursor

0

Select

on the screen.

to paste buffer

at the place the comment

is to be moved.

[PASTE]

(5) Copying a comment A comment

assigned

to an address

can be copied

into another

address.

[Operation] Ct> Place the cursor

8

Select

0

The following

on the comment

to be copied.

[COPY].

message

Comment

appears

data copied

@

Place the cursor

@

Select

on the screen.

to paste buffer

at the place the comment

is to be copied.

(PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address [Operation] 0

Select

[SEARCH]

@

The following

SEARCH

on the symbol

input window

and comment

appears

editing

screen.

on Ihe screen.

:

CO Enter the symbol

or address

to be searched

-89-

for and the data number.

4.

6% The system cursor

(7) Deleting

searches

is moved

for the symbol

to the searched

or address

and the data

number

OPERATION

in that order.

The

data.

a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment [Operation] 0

Place the cursor on the NO field.

8

Select

[DELETE].

Both the symbol

and the comment

are deleted

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment ]

[Operation

@ Place the cursor on the SYMBOL

8

Select

[DELETE].

or COMMENT

Only the selected

symbol

field

or comment

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments

is deleted.

simultaneously

[Operation] 0

Place the cursor

8

Select

The

IAREA].

message

Selectrng

appears

entrre

line

is displayed

in reverse

on the screen.

Move the cursor

@

Select

to the end of the range to be deleted.

[DELETE].

All the data displayed

in reverse

video

the symbol and comment editing

[Operation] 0)

On the edit screen,

8

The following

0

Specify

video,

the area

0

(8) Terminating

at the top of the range to be deleted.

select

message

a desired

[END]

appears

or press the < ESC>

on the screen:

Fl

Save (update)

F2

Quit

F3

Edit

option

8 quit

and return to the edit menu

-9o-

key

is deleted.

and

the

following

4. OPERATION

(9) Editing

screen

+Symbol entry number CRT/MD1 can display

--) Coil comment size (byte) CRT/MD1 can display / Total

/ Total

I ( SYMBOL

EDIT +YYMBOL

NO.

b

COMMENT

PMC-RB4

)

[A:vFLYDATAYRB4

COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090 RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT

000001/000003 ADDRESS SYMBOL I

I AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB cccccccccccccccc

00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 00003*X00000.2 CCCCC 1 I*' means a symbol data which can be displayed

,;

..j

Note

2 s;e#tfl

1)

It is the indicator. diagram

(10) Searching Search

ADD

3 .::.#@A : 4

editing

by a part

function

I

F

(Motel)

I I I I AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc on CRT/MDI.

5 :;;:,:i$ .,...I 6 &TE.. , ,;,;.,.:I ., ::.a &$&i I,.:: 9 ;..&&&" ,c, &$' '.. .., :. ...

Symbol/comment

are displayed

with

turning

at this point

in ladder

screen.

of strings

is active

for specified

field,

LINE

NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOURELAY

or COIL

COMMENT. Especially

you

can

find relay/coil

comment,

which

is too

long,

by specifing

a part

of data

strings. 1)

Press

[SEARCH]

Furthermore,

I1 2)

and the pop-up

the display

NO.

2

Input strings

AORS

3)

If search

of function-key

5

cursol

strings

.&tl,.

‘.

6

,

,. : .: .: 8

by function-key.

only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

moves

for search.

as the undermentioned.

the data kind for searching

is available

is success,

to specify

changes

3 SYMbQL 4 RELAY

and specify

A part of strings

menu apears

to the found place.

-9l-

,I

1’. ,:I. 9 1...... .: .

,o

‘:. ,,

I

4. OPERATION

4.5.2.4

Message editing

An arbitrary message instruction

(SUB

described

below.

(1) Types

can be displayed

on the CRT/MD1

screen

and quantity

using the DISPB

Such a message

41), which is one of the function instructions.

is created

as

that can be used

of characters

The types of characters

of the CNC,

usable in message

data vary lrom one CNCPMC

model to another, as

listed below.

Characters CNCPMC

JIS levels 1

Full-size

Half -size

Alphanumeric

and 2

hiragana

katakana

characters

n

0

0

0

PMC-Rf33RB4/RB5/RB6/

F16

that can be entered

RC3IRC4 F18

PMC-RA3

n

0

0

0

F15B

PMCNBINB2

X

X

0

0

PMC-PA3

X

X

0

0

Power Mate (A

-

.

: Some characters

cannot be drsplayed.

The half-srze kana and alphanumenc keys on the keyboard.

. . . ._ -.--. -. I hey cannot be checked by t-API

characters

can be entered

Similarly to symbols and comments,

usrng the Japanese-language

using the kana and alphanumeric

Japanese-language

input FEP (front-end processor).

_----.

LAUUtH.)

text can be edited

The number of characters

is limited

as follows:

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used 2) When only half-size kana characters are used 3)

When only alphanumeric

characters

are used

:

62 characters

:

127 characters

:

256 characters

(2) Edit procedure The edit method

that can be used varies between

language

(excluding

describes

the procedure

using the PMC-RC4

half-size

characters)

common

can

to all models

as an example.

(a) Startup [Operation ]

(1) Select [MESSAG]

from the edit menu.

-92-

be

the CNCiPMC used

and

model in which Japanese

other

(only alphanumeric

models. characters

This

section

are entered),

4.

8

The following

message

EDIT

data edit screen

OPERATION

appears.

W&AGE)

_~ NSSAGE

IO ADDRESS

___001 AOO.0 1234567890ABCOEFCHIJUMOPWSTllWYZ1234567890AlKDEFGHIJKlM~ST UVWXYZ1234567890AKDEFGHIJKUR(DFQRSTUYWXYZ

002 AOO. I

003 A00.2

004 A00.3

Fig. 452.4

(a)

Message

Data Edit Screen

(b) Input

[Operation]

(c)

0

Place the cursor

Q

Key in the desired

on the message

message

address

where

message

data is to be entered

address

where

message

data is to be entered.

data

Modification

[Operation] (11 Place the cursor

8

The character

0

Place the cursor

cursor

@iI Key in the desired

0

Press the
(d) Search

[TOP]

on the message

moves

on to the message

at the location

where

characters

to modify

and blinks there.

modification

is required,

the message

data.

> key.

[BOTTOM]

[Operation] 0)

On the message

8

The cursor

moves

screen,

select

[TOP]

or [BOTTOM].

to the start or end message

-93-

address.

using the cursor

keys.

4. OPERATION

(e) END [Operation) 0

On the edit screen,

8

The following

0

Select

452.5

press

message

[END]

or < ESC >.

appears.

one of the above

items,

and return to the edit menu.

I/O module editing

The address

of each module

in the I/O unit IS set and deleted

as described

(1) Startup

[Operation] 0

Select

[MODULE]

Q

The following

(l/O module)

I/O module

ADDRESS

GROUP

from the edit menu.

edit screen

BASE SLOT

NAME IDl6C lD16C

x0000 x0001

appears.

ADDRESS

CROUP

BASE SLOT

NME

YOODO YDOOI

YODOZ YDDO3 YDW YOOOS vooD6 vooo7 YOOOB YOOO9 YOOIO YODll YDD12 YDD13 YOOl4 YOO15

x0002 x0003 x0004 x0005 X0006 XODDI x0008 x0009 XOOIO x0011 x0012 x0013 x0014 x0015

Fig. 4.5.2.5

(a)

I’0 Module

-94-

Edit Screen

below.

4. OPERATION

EDIT II/O ICHANNEL 11 1 ADDRESS

GROUP

MDDULE) BASE SLOT

xoooo xoool x0002 x0003 x0004 x0005 X0006 x0007 XGQOE xOiw9 x0010 XOOII x0012 x0013 x0014 x0015

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (b)

(2) Channel (I)

0

\B& NAUE

ADDRESS

PX

YOoilO YOoill YOoO2 YGilO3 YooO4 Yooo5 YOOo6 YOoO7 YOOo6 YOO09 YOOIO YOOll YOO12 Yoo13 YOol4 YOOIS

Do 00

i 0 0

i 0

ii

0

0

01

ux ux x(1

XI

GROUP BASE SLOT

NAUE

I

I/O Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one cl annel can be set) (only for models in which more than one channel can be set)

switching

.

To switch to the next channel:

[Operation] 0 (ii)

Select

To switch

[NXT.CH]. to the previous

channel:

[Operation) Select [PRV.CH].

0 (3) Setting (Operation] 0

Place the cursor

on the start address

8

Key in the module

address

when

in the following

a module

is to be set.

format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1)

The module

name

that can be specified

or l/O unit.

Selecting

[HELP]

may vary depending

can display

the module

names

on the model

of the PMC

that can be displayed

in

the NAME field.

(Note 2)

The I/O unit MODEL-B

is allocated

“GROUP”

:

Specify

“BASE”

:

Must be fixed at ‘0’.

“SLOT”

:

Specify power

a group

as follows:

number

the unit number ON/OFF

information

in the configuration.

of the I,‘0 Unit-B.

Alternatively,

‘##’ is to be allocated.

set to ‘0’ if

4.

OPERATION

[Input item] COUNTER

DATA TYPE

This parameter

specifies

whether

the format of a counter

value used with the CTR

function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

lnitral value

LADDER

0 : BINARY

0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

Setting

EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter levels.

This

specifies an incremental setting

reduces

100

Setting range

processing

ladder

scan

time,

time for the first and second ladder thus

achieving

high-speed

ladder

execution.

Initial value

1 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution

I time status during an execution

penod of 8

ms.

First and second level processing

Note

however,

that increased

ladder execution

time

time on the first and second

levels

reduces the following processing times: l

PMC screen display time

l

Language

l

Ladder processing time on the third level

LANGUAGE As the

EXEC RATIO

language

parameter l

program processing time

program

and

PMC

specifies the percentage

screen

display

have

the

same

priority,

of the following processing times:

PMC screen display time

l

Language program processing time

l

Processing

time of third-level Ladder program

While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed

Initial value

50

Setting range

0 to 99

-99-

I

cyclically.

this

4. OPERATION

LANGUAGE This

ORIGIN

parameter

language

specifies

the

start

I

Initial value

000000

Setting

range

I

When there

is no language

OPERATOR

PANEL

This parameter When

YES

program,

(connectinq

specifies

is specified

in this

specify

parameter,

operator’s

panel,

and an addresses

connected,

0 : NO

control

statement

data

of a

in the language

program

storage

OOOOOOH.

operator’s operator’s

specify

an address

is used

DVDO

transferred

with

addresses

for key images

for LED images

Setting

the

panel) panel

the FSO. where

transferred

to the operator’s

0 : NO 1 1 : YES

the

from the panel.

I

KEY DI ADDRESS Specify

the start address

panel is actually

Settrng

(PMC

address)

of the external

DI where

the operator’s

DO where

the operator’s

connected.

X0 to X127,

range

Xl000

to X1019

KEY DO ADDRESS Specify

the start address

panel is actually

Setting

iii)

link

I

a machine

is actually

itial value

Address

an FO machine

whether

panel

ii)

of the

area

operator’s

0

address

program.

range

(PMC

address)

of the external

connected.

YO to Y127,

YlOOO

to Y1014

KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify

the

start

address

an arbitrary

internal

(PMC

address)

of key

images

referenced

by

user

referenced

by

user

programs. Usually iv)

relay area is set.

LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify

the

start

address

(PMC

address)

programs. Usually

an arbitrary

internal

relay area is set.

- loo-

of

LED

images

4. OPERATION

4.5.3

Printout

4.5.3.1

Overview

A sequence

program

(1) Compatible

can be printed

out.

printers

This software

EPSON

is usable

with the printers

VP1 000 (default

listed below.

setting)

NEC PR201H FANUC

(Note)

PRINTER

To use a NEC PR201H derails.

(2) General

see Section

and FANUC

PRINTER,

a program

4.5.3.6.

flow of operation for printout. IOffline [PRINT] I (Specifyoutput

t [SETUP]

Fig. 4.5.3.1

Operation

- 101-

Flow of Printout

modilication

is required.

For

4. OPERATION

Starting and ending printing

453.2 Printing

is performed

according

to the following

procedure.

SYSIEM PRRAWETER SYMBOL 8 COMWFNI LROOER OIRGRRH

[OPTION1 INOm1 IOPTIONI

STEP SEOUENCE OIRGRRH I/O HOOULt HESSRGE

'"PTIONI

CROSS REFERENCF LIST

8% 'ml1 rurlION1

BII ROORESS MRP

Fig. 4.5.3.2

Drawing

Output

Menu

(Operation] ci’, Set the desired

print format

b,

output

Set the desired

CZ Start printing

items.

by pressrng

m

Press F9 [BREAK]

C!

Press FlO [END]

Note 1)

Perform

Note 2)

Some

by pressing

F2 [SETUP].

(See Section

Fl (PRINT].

to suspend

printing.

steps iI> and 8

print formats starting

4.5.3.4.)

4.5.3.3.)

or the < Esc > key to terminate

file before

(See Section

the print menu

only when the settings

that cannot

display.

must be changed.

be set in step 0) may be set by editing

FAPT LADDER-II.

-102-

For details,

see Section

4.535.

the setting

4. OPERATION

453.3

Output item setting

Items to be output to a drawing are specified specified at a time.

(1) Specifying

as described

below.

More than one item can be

Some set items may not be displayed, depending

output

Specify whether

of each

on the model of the PMC.

data item

a data item is to be output, by pressing the < 7 > key or < 1 > key after

positioning the cursor with the < c > key or c + > key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option

specification

When specifying a data item for which options are available, option, then press the < Enter :, key.

position the cursor to the desired

The option specification

screen will appear.

option, enter the desired value, then press the < Enter > key.

(3) Detail a)

of each data time Title printing The data of the title is printed.

b)

Parameter

printing

The data of the system parameters c)

is printed.

Symbol printing The symbol comment

data is printed.

:\DRTF!\SflWPLE

I

1

SYMBOL

PRINT

1

STRRT LINE NUMBER END LINE NUMBER APPOINT COWHENT

FlB

( ESC 1

,rn 8 r~coIL/RLLl

END

Fig. 453.3

(a)

Symbol Print Option Menu

- 103 -

To set the

4.

i)

OPERATION

Option (symbol printing)

.

When

printing symbol/comment

data,

specify

an output

range.

When

0 is

specified as the print end line number, all data up to the last line is printed.

.

Comment

specification

: Prints relay comment data.

[RELAY]

d)

[COIL]

: Prints coil comment data.

[ALL]

: Prints both relay comment data and coil comment data.

Ladder diagram printing A ladder diagram is printed.

r--

END

_J

Fig. 4.533

i)

(b)

Ladder Print Option Menu

Optton (ladder diagram printing) The

output

diagram

unit,

net

to be printed

If a diagram

is output

range,

page

break,

and

cross-reference

of

a ladder

are specified. as a list file, the unit of printout

must

be specified

as a

module. If “0” is set as the output

end net when

continues

up to the last net.

If a page

break

every

is specified,

a page

a range

break

of nets is specified,

is made

in the ladder

printing

diagram

at

new file or subprogram.

If a cross-reference cross-reference.

is specified, (Fig. 4.5.3.3

the

ladder

diagram

(h))

Relay information [SYMBOL]

: Prints symbol data.

[RELAY COMMENT]

: Prints relay comment data.

- 104-

is accompanied

with

a

4.

e)

OPERATION

Printing of step sequence figure Step sequence figure is printed i)

Option (Step sequence figure printing)

:\DtllA\SRWPLE

I

I

STEP SEDUENCE PAINT

1

PRINT UNIT MODULE NM SUE-PRDGRRM NUMBER

FlB

t tsc

I

oRLLn5m5l r~/vEsl

END

,-a3333momm

-__-

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (c)

.

Step Sequence Print Option Menu

PRINT UNIT Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for a single subprogram or all subprograms.

When printing a figure for a single subprogram,

specify the

subprogram name for MODULE NAME. .

SUB-PROGRAM

NUMBER

Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed for each step. f)

I10 module printing The I/O module data is printed.

9) Message printing The message data is printed.

\DRTR\SRMPLE

I

- --I

MESSRGE

PRINT

RDDRESS RRNGE STRRT ADDRESS tND ADDRESS

18 I FSC I

I

‘rn

END

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (d)

Message Print Option Menu

- 105 -

4. OPERATION

i)

Option

(message

printing)

The range of messages

h)

Cross-reference

to be printed

is specified.

list printing

A cross-reference

list is printed

r

Fig. 4.5.3.3

i)

(e)

List Print Option

Menu

Option CHECK Check

DUPLICATE multiple

instruction APPOINT Specify

specification

WRITE

writing

(ex. timer,

to a coil and

multiple

use of same

number

ADDRESS address.

Cross-Reference Example of keying in

mode

It can be specified

List Address

Specification Address

I

as below.

to be output

ALL

ALL

I All addresses

Initial letter of an address

Y

IAll addresses

Bit address

Rl .O

I Specified

Byte address

x10

Specified (including

Address

FlO.O-F12.7

All addresses

in a specified

X2.3-END (Note 1)

All addresses

after a specified

(Note

1)

range

When

an address

specification

is made,

F, G. R, A, C, K, D, T, variable subsequent

functional

counter).

the range of printing

Table 453.3 Address

Cross Reference

addresses

are output.

-106-

P.

a specified

bit addresses

initial letter

only

byte addresses bit addresses)

addresses

address,

having

are output

In this

range address

in the sequence:

example,

therefore,

X, Y,

Y and

all

4. OPERATION

APPOINT Specify

COMMENT the kind of comment

data

‘RELAY’

Print Relay comment.

‘COIL’

Print Coil comment.

ii)

Bit address

map

The bit address

map is printed.

.\DAlA\SRMPLE

BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT

I

I

OUTPUT RDDRESS RPPDINT RDDRESS

FIB

I FSC

FND

Fig. 4.5.3.3

iii)

Option

(Bit address

Output

Bit Address

(f)

Menu

map)

address

‘ALL’

All available

‘USED’

The addresses

(Including

.

Map Print Option

Address Specify ‘h) Cross

addresses ‘Not used’ which

are printed. addresses.) are used in a sequence

program

are printed.

specifications the range

of outputting

Reference’.

-107-

addresses.

For details,

refer

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(f) in

4.

(1)

Printout

example

by “F2[SETUP]”

(print menu)

mode printout >

+

mode printout >

4

Initial step

I’ Sl : Pl

f

Initial step

4

Transition

+ PlOO

4

Transition

Label

c-L1 * s210 : PlOl

Pl PlOO

OPERATION

( c-L1

0

s210 fP160

0

S211

0

S215

Divergence

of selective sequence cDivergence of simultaneous I sequence 0 S217

+ P150

Step

-

Convergence

of selective sequence Block step

e + P160

: P151

; S215 : P161

+ P152

+ P162

* s212 : P153

; S216 : P163

+ P154

+ 164 4-

l

-Convergence of simultaneous sequence

Label

El*

s211

SlOOO

Divergence

of selective sequence t-Divergence of simultaneous sequence ’ S217 : P165 f-Convergence of simultaneous sequence Step

4

Convergence

4

of selective sequence Block step

4

Jump

: P2000 + P102

Jump

(2) Printout

example

by “SUB-PROGRAM

-z Not print sub program number > l-

I

->Ll

NUMBER

[NO/YES]”

< Print sub program number >

AlSl

Pl

1

PlOO c-L1 0 5210

-

Sub program number

PlOO +=-Ll l--J s210

i-f

P160 /j+i

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(i)

Example of Printout of Step Sequence

- 109-

P160

Diagram (l/2)

4. OPERATION

(3) Printout

example

of more than one page.

Size of one page

I

q r-l-l

ttd Cl

Cl

cl

22 element (28 element)

tttll

El

cl

cl

cl

Cl

cl

cl

cl

0

cl

cl

tttt

14 element

0 t

Note)

The maximun element count for printing without sub-program number is given in parentheses.

(l/3)

I

q 7G-l cl cl

r-

Link number

cl

<- L>

t

t

p=>:

cl

Cl

0

Cl

v2

v3

Cl

(3’3)

< - Number of a sub program

5=>-,

cl

t

ttt vl

’

4= > J VI

v2

v3

0

Cl

0

tt cl

(2’3)

= >4

L

cl

J 0 t

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(I)

Example of Printout of Step Sequence

-llO-

Diagram (2/2)

4. OPERATION

Print format-l:

4.5.3.4 Specify

printer

forms

SETUP

and a print format

PtlPER SIZE

menu as described

below.

/ LADDER PRINT

15 INCH/ RSCII 15 INCH/ GRRPHIC

Fig. 4.5.3.4

[Operation

0

SETUP

Menu Screen

]

Select

F2 [SETUP]

@I The SETUP @I Position

from the output

menu

screen

the cursor

item selection

screen.

appears.

to a desired

item (e.g.,

forms

size/ladder

diagram

print format)

with the

< t > or < 1 > key. @I Select 6)

the item by pressing

Position

the

cursor

< c >, or -z -+ @

If FlO [END] selection

(1) Forms Specify format

7

to the

the < Enter > key. desired

item

(e.g.,

10 INCHIASCII)

key, then make the selection

is selected

after forms

selection,

by pressing the screen

with

the

< 7 >,

< 1 >,

the < Enter 7 key. display

returns

to the output

item

screen.

size/ladder a forms

diagram size.

(ASCII) or graphic

The currently

specified

print format

In addition, format

output

specify

whether

to print the ladder

(GRAPHIC).

format

is indicated

-lll-

by “*“.

diagram

in character

4. OPERATION

4.5.3.5

Print format-2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/message

Each parameter that the output

file of this software format

shown

can be rewritten

in each of the following

-AMROFTRP. [Diagram

output

]b

+

1.

Change selection Set the Set the Set the

2. 3. 4.

file) using frames

a commercially

-PR201-10 . INF PR201-15 . INF PR201-A4 INF PRlO-A INF PRl5A INF PRA4-A : INF ESC-P-10 INF ESC-P-15 . INF ESCPl O-A. INF ESCPIS-A. INF -FANUC-10. INF

and

paper

-CROSSINF.

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

Set the guidance Set the Specify Set the guidance Specify Specify

-(Message

For these parameter

DAT

(Setting the cross-reference list output format)

--f

--)

text editor

can be changed.

DAT the paper name top margin net interval printer model

available

7.

output format information output information the output format read/write coil information the linefeed the page break

5. 6.

file)

Set the title 01 printout

files, do not change

any item not described

-112-

here.

Set the line spacing Set the left margin

-5”

4. OPERATION

(1) Changing

the paper selection

name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format selection.

Name of file to be

Point of change

edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Settings

#l O-A = 1O-inch/ASCII

Arbitrary character string consisting of

#l O-G = 1O-inch/graphic

up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size)

#15-A = 15inch/ASCII

characters

#15-G = 15_inch/graphic #A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII #A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

(Note)

#A4L-A= and #A4L-G =are unavailable in the output to VPlOOO.

(2) Settlng

the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be

Point of change

edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Settings

TOPMGL = 0

Decimal number

TOPMG = 0 (for each form)

t

(3) Setting

the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below.

NO0003

NO0003 C

C 00001

NO0004 0

l00006

E

II YO.0 *00006

YO.0

YO.7

NO0004

HHF YO.7 00001

NO0005

II

YO.7 00001

HHbl)L,, YO.1

D

YO 1

YO.7 00001

+00006 NO0005

YO.2 +00008

E

-lHHIL-ilF YO.0 +00006

When LCNTL = 4

YO.1

00001

YO.1

YO.7 00001

When LCNTL = 5

-113-

YO.2 *00008

4.

Modifications

File edited AMROFTRP.DAT

OPERATION

Settings

LCNTL = 4 (Set for each sheet)

Specify

either

4 or 5 ,

(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item

can

change

the

printer

model

and

print

paper

that

are

specified

during

paper

selection.

Name of file

Point of

*.INF that can be

to be edited

change

set

AMROFTRP. DAT

Print paper type/print

mode

PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 FANUC printer

1O-inch 1O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch

1O-inch continuous

form/ASCII

PRlO_A .INF PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO A. INF ESC_P_iO. INF FANUC_10. INF

PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 FANUC printer

1O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch

continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous

form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII

=

PRlS_A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15 A.INF ESC_Pj5. INF

PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000

15inch 15-inch 15-inch 15inch

continuous continuous continuous continuous

form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic

=

PRlS_A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15_A.INF ESC_P-15. INF

PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000

15inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous


PRA4_A PR201_A4

.INF INF

PR201 PR201

A4 portrait, A4 portrait,

cut sheet/ASCII cut sheet/graphic

PRA4_A PR201_A4

INF .INF

PR201 PR201

A4 portrait, A4 portrait,

cut sheet/ASCII cut sheet/graphic

: C.-FILE =

#10-G

C.-FILE =

#15-A

#15-G

C-FILE

name

PRlO_A INF PR201_10 . INF ESCPlO A.INF ESC_P_iO. INF FANUC_10. INF

#l O-A

C;FILE

Printer

#A4L-A : (Note)

continuous continuous continuous continuous


C.-FILE = #A4L-G : (Note) C.-FILE =

(Note)

#A4L-A = and (#A4L-G

= are unavailable

in the output

- 114-

to VPIOOO.

4. OPERATION

(5) Setting

the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output.

The file to be edited is

the one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited ‘.INF

(6) Setting

LPI

(H) (1B) (C) (T20) ;

(H) (18) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;

LDRLPf

(H) (18) (C) (T15) ;

(H) (1B) (C) (Tcdecimal

number >) ;

the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output.

The file to be edited is the

one specified according to the descriptions in (4).

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited ‘.INF

LMARGIN

(H) (1B) (C) (LOOO) ;

-115-

(H) (1B) (C) (Lcdecimal

number>)

;

4. OPERATION

(7) Setting the title of printout This item can change

the title of a diagram

Vame of file to be

when

it is output.

Point of change

Settings

edited .PRTOUT.

JPN.

@ SYSTITLE

.PRTOUT.

ENG.

(-

SYSTEM

(C) (
;

-)

of up to 60 half-size characters

@ CMT.TITLE

(-

SYMBOL

& COMMENT

-)

DIAGRAM

:

character

string consisting (or 30 full-size)

> ) ;

;

@ LAD-TITLE (-

LADDER

-)

@ STEP-TITLE (-

STEP SEQUENCE

DIAGRAM

-)

;

@ IO-TITLE (-

I’0 MODULE

;

DATA -)

@ MSG.TITLE (-

MESSAGE

;

DATA -)

@ TIT.TITLE (-

;

TITLE DATA -)

@ CRSTITLE (-

CROSS-REFERENCE

;

-)

@ BKTITLE (-

(Note

1)

(Note 2)

These

BIT ADDRESS

point of changes

Half-size

katakana

(8) Setting the cross-reference

This item can specify cross-reference

listing.

are valid as guidance

MAP -)

:

are in the file, ILPRTOUT.

characters

cannot

ENG.

be used.

list output format guidance

characters

to be output

In the CROSSINF.DAT

lnformatlon

as guidance file, lines

with

informatron

no semicolon

during

at the beginning

information.

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited CROSSINF.DAT

to be output

GUIDE =

Any character to 19 bytes

-116-

string consisting

of up

4.

(9) Setting the cross-reference

list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference both step and net numbers the CROSSINF.DAT

OPERATION

are specified,

information.

which is to be printed first can also be specified.

file, lines with no semicolon

If In

at the beginning are valid as cross-reference

information.

Jame of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited NET-INF =

:ROSSINF.DAT

STEP-INF

When only the net number is output: =

NET-INT STEP-INF

= 1 =0

When only the step number is output: NET-INT STEP-INF

=0 = 1

When the net and step numbers are

*

output in the stated sequence: NET-INT STEP-INF

= 1 =2

When the step and net numbers are output in the stated sequence: NET-INT STEP-INF

(10) Specifying the cross-reference This item enables numbers.

a character

In the CROSSINF.DAT

Name of file to be

=2 = 1

list output format string to be printed

at the beginning

of the step

file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Point of change

Settings

edited CROSSINF.DAT

(Note)

FORM =

Only letters in lowercase

and net

Character

are valid as ‘%s’.

-117-

string + ‘%s’

4. OPERATION

(11)

Setting

the cross-reference

list read/write

This item can set a comment

coil guidance

about coil attributes.

informatlon

In the CROSSINF.DAT

file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited READ =

CROSSINF.DAT

Character

WRITE =

string consisting of up to

13 bytes. -1 ! I-

READ = -1 IWRITE = -(

(12)

Specifying

the cross-reference

:

-( / )- :

)-

list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between

addresses.

In the CROSSINF.DAT

file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited NL=

CROSSINF.DAT

(Note)

In this case, addresses.

Decimal number

space lines as many as the specified (If 0 is specified

as the linefeed

value plus 1 are inserted

count, no space

line is inserted

between between

addresses.)

(13)

Specifying

the cross-reference

list page

This item can specify a page break between

break address

types.

In the CROSSINF.DAT

with no semicolon al the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be

Point of change

Settings

edited CROSSINF.DAT

FF=

‘0’ = the page is not advanced

’ 1’ = the page is advanced

-118-

file, lines

4.

Environment

settings for diagram printout - example

#PAPER = 10-G = 10 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 L TOPMGL = 0 . TOPMG = 0 . LCNTL = 4 L C-FILE =PRlO_A.INF 4Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP

I #IO-A

When ‘1’ is selected as the printout paper

When ‘2’ is selected as . the printout paper

When ‘3’ is selected as the printout paper

e I1 O-G = 10 Inch/graphic LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = IO WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 . TOPMGL = 0 * TOPMG = 0 * LCNTL = 4 . C-FILE = PR201_10.INF $Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP +#15-A=151nch/ASCIl LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/120 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 . TOPMGL = 0 * TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 + C FILE = PR15 A.INF O-FILE = PRT6AT.DMP &ND + #15-G = 15 Inch

OPERATION

1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

Changing the types of printout paper The name is changed from 1:lO inch’ to ‘l:NEC 10’. see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.)

*

Changing the upper margin (The upper margin is set to * 5 characters.) Changing the types of printout paper (The name is changed from * ‘2:15 inch’ to ‘2:EPSON 10’. See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)

Changing the type of printer * (The printer is changed to EPSON VP1000 and the paper is changed to lo-inch forms.)

Changing the spacing between the LADDER nets _ * [The net spacing for the LADDER diagram is widened.)

#PAPER = 10-G #lo-A=NEC 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 2/3 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 5 TOPMG = 0 LCNTC = 4 C_FILE=PRlO_A.INF RF&E = PRTDAT.DMP #lo-G=EPSON 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 151120 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 LCNTL = 4 C-FILE = ESCPlO_A.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP #15-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 LCNTL = 5 C-FILE = PR 15_A.INF yE&l;E = PRTDAT.DMP II #15-G = 15 Inch

.

(Note)

An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modrfied.

-119-

“..

4.

Environment

settings

for diagram

- example

printout

2 (settings

in file PR201_10.INF)

.

PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF

(

CPI CANCEL LDRCPI LPI LDRLPI LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET

* * *

(H)(W(C)(T20); (H)(W(C)(T15); (H)(W(C)(LOOO); (H)(W(C)(/O7W (H)(W(C) (50014); (H)(W(C)(K); (H)(W(C)(H);

I . .

.

Setting the spacing between lines

Setting

the left margin

(Line spacing

characters.)

(Left margin

is set to 25.) I

is set to 5

1

I

PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF

CANCEL CPI LDRCPI LPI LDRLPI LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET

( I~~I~~j"A): .

U-W$ (H) (1B) (C) (H) ;

(H)(W(C) (Q); (H)(W(C)(T25); (H)(W(C)(T15); (H)(W(C)(LOO5) (H)(W(C)(/O7B) (H) (1B) (C) (JO014 (H)(W(C)(Q (H)(W(C)(H);

3

(Note)

An astensk

(*) indtcates

data which can be modified.

- 120-

. , . i;

OPERATION

4.

Environment

settings

l Sample

for diagram

setting

: GUIDE=STEP No./NET NET-INF=2 STEP-INF=l FROM=S%s/N%s READ=-1 I- -I/IWRITE=-()-(/INL=l FF=O ;

0 Sample

output

- example

of the CROSSINF.DAT

cross reference

3 (sample

setting

OPERATION

1 of the CROSSINF.DAT

file)

file

No.

: :

output

[A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE] l l l

Cross reference

***

STEP NO./NET Address

Symbol

PAGE 1 No.

Comment

x0.0 -II----#-

x0.1 --it-#

: S00045/N00009 S00088/N00020

S00049/N00012 SOOO94/NOOO2

S00053/N00013

S00082/N00017

: S00050/N00010 S00077/N00029

S00054/N00012

S00059/N00015

S00065/N00017

S00045/N00009

S00128/N00062

S00256/N00098

: S00009/N00003 S00022/N00010 S00047/N00019 : SOOOO2/N00001

S00012/N00008 S00024/N00012 S00074/N00032

S00014/N00009 S00033/N00015 S00079/N00035

YO.0

Double

--O--CD-:

RO.0 --It--+-

--@-

+

- 121-

writing

S00015/N00010 S00045/N00017

4.

Environment l

Sample

settings setting

for diagram

output

- example

of the CROSSINF.DAT

4 (sample

setting

OPERATION

2 of the CROSSINF.DAT

file

: GUIDE=Step number NET-INF=O STEP-INF=l FROM=S%s READ=read WRITEwrite NL=O FF=O ;

0 Sample

cross

reference

output

(A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE] *** Cross reference

***

PAGE 1 Step number

Symbol Comment Address x0.0 : 500045 SO0049 SO0053 Read

x0.1 Read YO.0

: SO0050

SO0054

SO0059

Write

: SO0045

SO0128

SO0256

: SO0009 so0047 : soooo2

SO0012 so0074

SO0014 so0079

SO0082

SO0088

SO0065

SO0077

SO0094

Double

writing

RO.0 Read Write

SO0015

- 122-

SO0022

SO0024

SO0033

SO0045

file)

4. OPERATION

4.5.3.6

Changing the printer specification

Upon the completion

(1) Changing

of installation,

the default

the printer specification

printer

is set to EPSON

lo NEC PR201

To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer,

change

described

the floppy

installed

below.

(In the following

under the C: \ FLADDER

VPlOOO.

example, directory,

the setting

file by means

disk drive

and the file is changed

is drive

of the procedure

A, FAPT LADDER

is

from the DOS prompt.)

[Operation] OCopy

the

LADDER-II

AMROFTRP.PR system

file

floppy

C: \ FLADDER

@I Delete

0 Change

C: \ FLADDER

Note)

C: \ FLADDER

(2) Changing

AMROPTRP.DAT

> DEL

> RENAME

For details, see Section 453.5

Please

PRINTER

(Example)

5 of the

FAPT

install directory.

\ AMROFTRP.PR

c

C: < Enter >

install directory.

Enter >

file to AMROPTRP.DAT.

AMROFTRP.PR

printer,

AMROPTRP.DAT

perform

< Enter >

steps @ through

0,

replacing

to a FANUC printer

(4).

is connected

set the communication

the following

of Volume

with AMROFTRP.ESC.

the printer specification

FANUC

directory

file from the FAPT LADDER-II

To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 AMROFTRP.PR

Note)

A: \ APPENDIX

the name of the AMROFTRP.PR

Example:

APPENDIX

< Enter >

> COPY

the AMROPTRP.DAT

Example:

the

disks to the FAPT LADDER-II

C: \ CD FLADDER

Example:

from

to a serial port with RS-232-C mode

from DOS prompt

command. When connected C:/ > MODE

to a serial port COMl.

COM1:4800,N,8.2

-123-

< Enter >

before

cable. starting

FAPT LADDER-II

by

4. OPERATION

4.5.4 Compilation During PMC. RAM

compilatron, Uncompiled for the

condensed

an edited programs

PMC.

mode.

source cannot

Compilation (except

program

is translated

be transferred

can

be performed

to the ROM writers in one

I

----)

6

Condensed

A source

0

(PMC writer modes:

by the

or FA writer)

normal

mode

or and

Transferred

to the ROM writers

and PMC

mode

program

can be compiled

of steps is compiled created

of two

file executable

PMC-PAB.)

Source program

l

into an object

rn normal

in condensed mode.

A larger C language

in condensed mode,

As a result,

When

the size of the created

condensed

mode

a ladder object

with the same file is smaller

has the advantages

mode

Condensed

Ladder

mode

Ladder

file

t C

C language

8

Time required

for compilation

Q

Time required

for transfer

@

A ROM module

language

is reduced.

from the personal

with a smaller

capacity

computer

may be used.

- 124-

number than that

listed below:

area can be allocated.

Normal

Object

mode.

to the PMC is reduced.

4. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed

Memory

map changes

mode has the restrictions described

(area expansion)

below.

are likely to occur when

instructions,

comments,

and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated

condensed

mode is transferred

symbols,

by compilation

to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function.

this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between

in In

the ladder area and

C language area.

Ladder

ROM format file

& .’

.,. .:.

. ..’

Overlap (A C language program map change is required.)

,......

C language

b,

A ROM format file generated a ROM format file generated

l

by compilation in condensed

mode cannot be compared

with

by compilation in normal mode.

Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, to a single ROM subprogram

file.

numbers.

built-in programmer

the source program,

The order in which subprograms

function of the PMCRB4

are arranged

is converted

in ascending

order of

are displayed on the edit screen of the

or PMC-RC4

program has been uploaded to FAPT LADDER,

4.5.4.1

subdivided into subprograms,

Within the ROM file, subprograms

decompiled,

may be changed compiled,

after the source

and downloaded.

Start and terminate

(1) Start [Operation]

0

Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu.

@

The compile screen appears.

PMC-RB4

Compile program

Source

Output

EXEC

[C:~CFLADDERY

1

name

to

ROM

format

file

SYMBOL 6 COMMENT NET COMMENT

[F6] (F7]

2

5

3

Fig. 4.5.4.1

YES POINTERS

ONLY

DOS

(a)

Compile Menu Screen

-125-

OEND

4. OPERATION

l

General

Flow of Operation

Fig. 4.5.4.1

for compiling

(b)

I

Offline menu

I

I

Offline

I

Compiling

menu

General

Operation

and Screens

(2) Compile (a) Normal

mode

With PMCPA3,

compile

[Operation]

6

Select

0

Compile

0

Select

0

Compile

(b) Condense

Pressing object The

is always

performed

in condense

mode.

Fl [EXEC]. processing

is performed

in normal

mode.

is performed

in condense

mode

[Operation]

(3) Displaying

processing

the results F2 [MAP]

F8 [CONDNS]. processing

of compile

mode.

processing

after the completion

of compile

processing

displays

displayed

by pressing

a memory

map for the

file. results

of compile

processing

are

screen,

regardless

of whether

an error

or warning

compile

processing

are output

lo a text-format

has been

file, as described

F3 [ERROR]

output.

on

Moreover,

the

compile

the results

below.

1

C:YDATAYSAMPLE

t Output the compile result in two passes. tttC# PASS1 ##tilt MESSAGE SYMBOL LEVELl.NLA (00111net)tNet No. Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. in each LEVELZ.#LA subprogram. Pl.#LA PZ.#LA There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram. #Wt## PASS2 #tl#t

Compile completed

Error count =00002 Warning count =OOOOO Fig. 4.5.4.1.

PASSl: PASS2:

(c)

Compile

Convert to object Syntax check

- 126-

result

of

4. OPERATION

If many

errors

have

wtth the text editor

occurred, or by printing

The results of execution

When

Example:

those

can be easily

identified

by viewing

the relevant

file

out the file.

can also be displayed

the program

C:VDATA

errors

shown

below

using a utility function.

is compiled,

the following

(See Section

4.5.9.)

files are output

lo the

directory:

Execution

result file SAMPLE.ERR

Map file SAMPLE.MAP

PMC-RB4

Compile

[C:yFLADDERSr'

]

:C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Source program name

..::_':'::'.:$,: ‘.:il':.",:'.' ::::I::' :,;:.:<::y::jj qij!::,:; .j: .:.(.,,:, .. '.:j:.. .." 5.,.',::.':,,.: ;,:.:. '.. ... Compile Rormal End ,.; :,..,..

Compile completed

EXEC

2HAP

error count=000000

3ERROR

warning count=000000

5

Fig. 4.5.4.1

(d)

OEND Complile

Completed

Screen

shell from FAPT LADDER

by pushing

F9 (DOS)

this, key in the command

as bellow

at MS-DOS

(4) DOS command You can call MS-DOS If you want to terminate

vA:\>EXITl

(5) Termination [Operation] 0

Select

[END]

@I The screen

or press the < Esc > key.

drsplay

returns

to the main menu

- 127-

screen.

key. command

line.

4. OPERATION

4.5.4.2 Compile options These

options’

initial value can be changed

(Refer to 4.5.7 Program

(1)

option

option

set-up.

set-up.)

F6 [SYMBOL] Select

whether

However.the

output

l

“YES”: The

or not output

symbols

the coil comments

which

(Default

"NO"

& comment

to them never

output

data to ROM format

on CRT/MD1

(7bytes

to ROM format

file.

or more

symbols)

and

file.

setting)

which

assigned

can be displayed

on CRT/MDl(Gbytes

to them are output

to object

They can be displayed

0

the symbol

can not be displayed

assigned

symbols

comments

or less

symbols)

and the coil

file.

on CRT/MDI.

:

No symbol/coil Any symbol

(2)

at the Program

comment

is converted

and coil comment

to object

is not displayed

file. on CRT/MDI.

F7 [NETCMT] If Net comment

is used

(Note2)

to object

0

0

is output

in ladder

program,

“POINTERS

ONLY”

: (Default

setting)

To edit

ladder

program

by

the

CNC

LADDER,

select

this setting.

However,

ladder

size gets larger because

"NO"

whether

‘Net

comment

pointer’

built-in

editor

and

‘Net comment

decompile

pointer’

the

is output

data

by

to object

FAPT

file.

pointer”

is not output

to object

file. In this case,

ladder

size in the ROM

file is saved.

However,

Note 1)

can choose

:

Any ‘Net comment format

you

file or not.

decompile

the object

Net comment personal

Only

has its own

‘Net

ROM format comment

character

information

format

file

file does not include =

pointer’(

to ROM format

This ‘Net comment ROM

its net comment

data information

only

in a source

lost.

program

on the

computer.

Compiled

output

file makes

information

file as an functional

pointer” that

helps

is edited

any net comment

to restore on

LADDER.

-128-

CNC

of net

instruction

comment

position.)

can

be

“NOP”.

net comment built-in

characters.

editor

date at decompiling and

uploaded

to

the FAPT

4. OPERATION

4.5.4.3

Password set function

This function It enables The

is supported

a password

password

CRT/MDI.

only in the FS15B16/18/21

to be added

can be used

This function

during

to prohibit

requires

-B.

compilation. ladder

programs

to be set the program

from

being

option.

displayed

(Refer

or edited

to 4.5.7

on the

Setting

program

options.)

types

(1) Password

There are two password

types.

Each password

of up to 8 alphanumeric

consists

characters.

Use

We Password

(R)

Password

to allow display

on the CNC

Password

(RAN)

Password

to allow display

and editing

(2) Password setting

0

After

compilation

whether

Do you

I

+

Goto@.

RW & R, RW or R [EXEC]

or

[CONDNS]

is selected,

you

will

be

prompted

to

to use a password.

enter

To set a password,

password?

(Y/N)

J

+ If password

press l-lY I -

If it is unnecessary

.

(compile)

When no password

When password

on the CNC

to set a password,

press

N l-l

- 129-

If password +Goto@.

RW & R or R go to 0. RW go to 8.

specify

4.

0

The password

(R) set screen

Enter password

@

appears.

(R)

Enter a password.

.

A password

that can be used is a combination

Uppercase

and lowercase

letter is entered,

.

It is impossible Some

letters

it is assumed

character

If the

.

When

password

password

are not distrnguished

characters

string

is entered character

is not displayed

key

is pressed

as a password,

configuration

any

valid

to specify

password

use

of a

If password

= RW&R go to @.

If password

= R go to @.

a password

’

is discontinued.

GotoO.

1

You will be prompted

to enter

password

correctly.

was entered the

is specified,

appears.

(R)

Verification

is displayed.

string.

before

an attempt

screen

message

on the screen.

+

< Esc > is pressed,

When

(If a lowercase

(such as *, #, and @).

an error

+

.

numerals.

from each other.

kana, kanji, and special

is not specified.

@I The password

and/or

strings are unusable.

In such a case, use another An entered

of 8 or less letters

to be uppercase.)

to use space,

If one such character

0

OPERATION

password

the same

entered

this

password

time

matches

as entered

before,

one

was

that

to ensure

entered

that your

before,

it is

accepted. When they do not match, You are allowed When

< Esc > is pressed,

If password

@

01

password

A password Uppercase

mismatch”

is displayed.

to specily

a password

is discontinued.

+

GotoO.

--*

Go to @.

appears.

(R/W)

(RW). that can be used is a combination

and lowercase

letter is entered, It is impossible Some

an attempt

(R’W) set screen

Enter a password

.

“Password

twice.

= R is specified.

The password

Enter

the message

to retry entering

character

letters

it is assumed to use space, strings

If one such character

of 8 or less letters

are not distinguished

and/or

from each other.

numerals. (If a lowercase

to be uppercase.) kana, kanji, and special

characters

(such as

l, #. and @).

message

is displayed.

are unusable. string is entered

In such a case, rrse another

character

as a password, string.

- 130-

an error

4. OPERATION

An entered If the

password

.

password

-z Enter >

When

key

is not displayed is pressed

on the screen.

before

any

valid

password +

is not specified.

c Esc > is pressed,

the attempt

to specify

@

The password

confirmation

Verification

(9

screen

of a

is rejected.

Go to 0.

appears.

(R/W)

You will be prompted

to enter

password

correctly.

When

use

Goto@.

a password -+

is specified,

was entered the

password

the same

entered

this

password

time

as entered

before,

one

was

matches

that

to ensure

entered

that your

before,

it is

accepted. When they do not match, You are allowed

.

When

the message

to retry entering

c Esc > is pressed,

“Password

mismatch”

twice.

the attempt

to specify

a password +

@l Compilation

4.5.5

is rejected.

Go to 0.

begins.

Decompilation

During

decomprlation,

printed

out.

Data that is uploaded cannot

is displayed.

be edited

a ROM format

lile is translated

into a source

from the PMC or is read from ROM is object

or printed

out.

Such data must be decompiled

program

file data. before

that can be edited

or

Data in the object

file

it can be edited

or printed

out.

(Note)

To decompile (See Section

a password-protected

object

4.5.4.)

- 131-

file,

it is necessary

to enter

a password

4. OPERATION

4.5.5.1

Operation

(1) Start

[Operation] 0

Select

[DECOMP]

@

The decompile

(decompile)

screen

appears.

PMC-RB4

Decompile Source

Output

program

to

from the main menu.

Program

SYMBOL h COMMENT [F4] YES Merge Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY

EXEC

2

3

MERGE

Fig. 4.551

(a)

Decompile

[EXEC]

Q

Decompilation

on the decompile

is performed

Menu Screen

screen.

and the result is displayed.

-132-

(effective)

OEND

[Operation] Select

CARD DATA

5SYMBOL6

(2) Decompiling

0

1

:C:\DATA\SAMPLE

name

Source

[C:\FLADDER\

4. OPERATION

(3) Decompiling Upon the completion the object

pressing

the F2 [MAP]

key can display

the memory

map of

file.

The result screen,

of decompiling,

of decompiling

regardless

If many errors

can be displayed

of whether

have occurred,

The result of decompiling

(Example)

shown

Result file SAMPLE.ERR

below

key on the decompile

using a text editor.

using the utility function

(see Section

4.5.9).

:

is decompiled

are output

to directory

C: \ DATA.

PMC-RB4

program

:C:\DATA\SAMPLE

name

Decompile

.’

error

completed

3ERROR

MAP

EXEC

or printed

and map file SAMPLE.MAP

Decompile

Decompile

the F3 [ERROR]

has occurred.

the error file can be viewed

can also be displayed

When the program

Source

by pressing

an error or warning

MERGE

normal

en8

count=000000

warning

count=000000

SSYMBOL

Fig. 4.5.5.1

(b)

OEND

P

Decompile

end Screen

(4) Termination [Operation] 0

Select

[END].

8

The screen

display

returns

to the main menu

screen.

4.5.5.2 Decompile option (1) Merge

In case source

the existent program

In this case program

file is specified

is deleted

it is possible

by specifying

for output

and new source to merge

the Ladder

the undermentioned

source

program

in object

function-key.

-133-

program

is created

when

decompiling,

with the contents

the existent

of object

file with the SymboVCommnet

file. in source

4.

PMC-RB4

Decompile Source

program

[C:\FLADDER\

OPERATION

]

: c: \DATA\SAMPLE

name

Output to source program SYMBOL h COMMENT Merge Duplicated symbol definition

3

MERGE

[F4] YES (FS] MEMORY

CARD DATA

(effective)

5SYMBOL6

Fig. 4.5.5.2

OEND

P

Decompile

Menu Screen

(a) F4 [MERGE] This specification

decides

whether

source

program

to merge

the symbolicomment

by “NO”

or “YES”

program

is created

1) "NO" : The

existent

contents There

of object

is no display

: (Default

2) “YES”

of “F5(SYNBOL]”

Just

definition

in source

symbolicomment,

after

this

and

new

source

with

the

in this condition.

setting)

The symbolkommnet data except

is deleted

file.

specification,

is effective,

either

program object

is merged

FS(SYMBOL] in source

with that in object

file. As for the other

file is effective.

program

will

be

displayed

or in object

to

file, when

specify

which

symbol

they are in conflict.

(b) F5 [SYMBOL] F5[SYMBOL] This

specification

effective

decides

when “YES”

which

symbol

is specified definition

The symbol

DATA” definrtton

rn source

“MEMORY

CARD DATA”

The symbol

definition

program

: (Default

in object

is effective.

setting)

file is effective.

- 134-

for F4(MERGE].

in either

when they are in conflict.

1) “SOURCE

2)

will be displayed

source

program

or object

file is

4. OPERATION

(c) The combination -

Object

and F5[DUPADR],

and its result.

file

- Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYHBOL(Cbyte)

*c-

x0.0

xxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

YYYYYY

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

program

- Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) x0.0 Y2.3 Y4.7

-+(i)

x0.0 R1.4

COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

program xxxxxx YYYYYY

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol DATA". Source

x0.0 Y2.3 Y4.7

+(iii)

AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY

RELAY-COMMENT(16byte)

The result of "MERGE = NO" Source

*(ii)

COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

R1.4

Source

t

of F4[MERGE]

definition

= MEMORY

CARD

program xxxxxx BBBBBBBB YYYYYY

BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol .. Source program AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA x0.0 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB Y2.3 YYYYYY R1.4

-135-

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

definition=SOURCE

DATA".

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

4.

4.553

Password

To decompile

a password-protected

file, it is necessary

Set password Both password

I

Password

@

OPERATION

to enter

type

a password.

Password Password

(R) and (RAN)

I

(R/w)

After discompilation

[EXEC]

Enter password

is selected,

the following

(R/W)

Password

(R/W)

Password

(R)

password

Note)

(R)

type to be entered

entry

screen

If an R/W password up, “password

appears.

has been set

(R/W)”

is

displayed.

0

When the valid password If the newly

entered

is entered,

password

discompilation

is incorrect,

an error

begins. message

is displayed,

discontinues. (You are allowed When

to retry entering

-z Esc > is pressed,

twice.)

the request

to start discompilation

-136-

is rejected.

and processing

4. OPERATION

455.4 When

Outputting to split files the results of decompilation

subprograms

are output to a source

and output to different files.

program,

they are split into units of

For details, see Section 3.4.2.

Object file

PO0 1.#LA Subprogram (Ladder)

Pl

POO2.#SS Subprogram P2 (Step Sequence)

P003.#LA Subprogram (Ladder)

P3

The END instruction is not included in the source program. The instruction is automatically when the program is compiled.

-137-

added

4. OPERATION

4.5.6 There

Input/Output are three

types

of inputioulput

operations,

as described

below.

1) ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer). 2) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.

3)

Input/output Adapter

between

or Handy

PMC RAM and a memory

card or floppy

disk (FD) via a Floppy

Cassette

File, respectively.

[Operation] 0

Switch

off the personal

cable.

(See Appendix

computer

and input/output

unit, and connect

them

via an RS-232-C

8.)

@I Start FAPT LADDER. 0

Select

[l/O]

(input/output)

@I The input/output

from the main menu.

menu appears.

Table 4.56 Input/output

Baud Rate Setting Baud rate setting

destination

4800

ROM writers (PMC WRITER, Series

16’18/20

FANUC

Series

15B (PMC-NB)

FANUC

F-D Mate mini (PMC-OC)

FANUC

Power

Mate-MODEL

sets up ports according

IBM PC/AT version

These

(PMC-R

48OOl9600

series)

D (PMC-PAlIPA3)

I/O port setting

FAPT LADDER

1)

FA WRITER)

FANUC

4.5.6.1

(bps)

:

to the values

in the following

data files.

FLIO - AT.DAT

files are in text format.

So, a text editor

can be used to change

-138-

set values

in the files.

4. OPERATION

2)

Contents

of the FLIO_AT.DAT

(effective

data section

DATA-BLOCK

only)

= IO-PORT-SET

PMC-WRITER

=COMl

‘48.

FA-WRITER

=COMl

:48.N,8.2

PMC-L

=COMl

.48,

PMC-M

=COMl

r48.N.8.2

PMC-M (TT)

=COMl

: 48. N. 8. 2

PMC-M (AXIS)

=COMl

: 48, N. 8, 2

PMC-MMC

=COMl

~48.N.8.2

=COMl

r48.N.8.2

PMC-N

=COMl

y96.N.8.2

PMC-P

=COMl

48. N. 8. 2

PMC-OA

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-M (I/O)

=COMl

: 48. N. 8. 2

PMC-M (l/O. TT)

=COMi

.48, N. 8.2

PMC-M (I/O. AXIS)

=COMl

.48. N. 8. 2

PMC-N (I/O)

=COMl

: 96. N. 8, 2

PMC-RB

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RC

=COMi

96. N. 8. 2

PMC-RAl

=COMl

96. N. 8. 2

PMC-RA2

=COMl

96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RBP

=COMl

96. N. 8. 2

PMC-RA3

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RB3

=COMl

: 96. N, 8. 2

PMC-RC3

=COMl

: 96, N. 0. 2

PMC-PA1

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-MMC

(AXIS)

N. 8.2 N. 8.2

PMC-PA3

=COMl

: 96, N. 8, 2

PMC-QC

=COMl

: 96. N. 8. 2

PMC-NB

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-R04

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RC4

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RB4

(STEP~SEO)

=COMl

: 96, N. 8. 2

PMC-RC4

(STEP-SEC))

=COMl

: 96. N. 8. 2

Entity on the left-hand Entity

on the right-hand

command.

Only

the

side of each equal sign ( =) : Device side of each first

parameter

equal (port

sign (=)

: Represented

number)

and

changed.

- 139-

second

in the format parameter

of each

(baud

rate)

MODE can

be

4.

OPERATION

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

4.5.6.2 ROM format

data is written

PMC model,

as indicated

to ROM installed in Table 4.5.6.2.

Table 4.5.6.2

in the PMC.

ROMs

which can be used depend

When using the FA writer,

ROMs Usable

place it in remote

on the

mode.

with Each PMC Model Usable

PMC model PMC-RA3

lM-bit

ROM

PMC-RB3

lM-bit

ROM/ROM

PMC-RC3

ROM module

ROM

module

B (note

1)

A, B, C, and D

(1) Read

[Operation] Select

Fl : [FAWRT]

Select

Fl : (READ].

(FA Writer)

Enter the name of a source

Read operation

is executed.

When read operation

or F2 : [PMCWRT]

program

name

containing

During operation,

terminates

normally,

(PMC Writer)

on the l/O menu screen.

read data.

the indication

the indication

“EXECUTING”

“NORMAL

END”

blinks.

is output.

(2) Write

[Operation 1 Select

Fl : [FAWRT]

Select

F2 : (WRITE].

(FA Writer)


Writing

is executed.

When writing

or F2 : [PMCWRT]

program

During operation,

terminates

normally,

name

(PMC Writer)

on the l/O menu

to be written.

the indication

the indication

- 140-

“EXECUTING”

“NORMAL

END”

blinks.

is output.

screen.

4. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation] 0

Select

Fl : [FAWRT]

@

Select

F3 : [VERIFY]

0


@

Verification

0

When verification

(4) Blank

(FA Writer)

is executed.

or F2 : [PMCWRT]

program

normally,

on the I/O menu

screen.

name to be verified.

During operatron,

terminates

(PMC Writer)

the Indication

the indication

“EXECUTING”

“NORMAL

END”

blinks.

is output.

check

[Operation] 0

Select

Fl : [FAWRT]

8

Select

F4 : [BLANK]

6

Blank checking

(FA Writer)

or F2 : [PMCWRT]

(PMC Writer)

on the I/O menu

screen.

(blank check).

is executed.

@I When blank checking

During operation,

terminates

normally,

the indication

the indication

“EXECUTING”

“NORMAL

END”

blinks.

is output.

(5) Termination [Operation] FlO : [END].

@

Select

Q

The screen

(Note

1)

display

When

writing

displayed

(Note 2)

returns

to the main menu screen.

1Mbit

on FA writer.

PMC except

PMCRA3,

ROM

for

PMC-RB3

But writing

with

terminates

RB3, RC3 not transfer

-141-

FA writer,

“ID

ERROR”

normally. data to and from EPROM.

will

be

4. OPERATION

4.5.6.3

Transfer to and from PMC

(1) Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PA3/NB/NB2KJC Data can be transferred

FAPT LADDER

serially

via RS-232-C.

FS16/18/15B -Power Mate-D/F/H, 1 F-D Mate mini

7 9600 bps14800

bps

9600 bps14800

bps

9600 bps14800

bps

-

Upload

Comparison

Baud rate settinq

for FS16/18/158,

Power

Mate-D/F/H,

and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download [Operation] (i> Q,

Select

F3 : [PMC]

on the VO menu

Select

Fl : [DNLOAD]

(download)

screen. on the PMC menu

screen

to display

the source

program

name. *c3) Press the < SYSTEM

> key of the CNC.

t(4) Press the CNC soft keys

[PMC],

II/O),

[HOST],

and [EXEC)

in this order.

Press the < Enter > key. Downloading

is executed.

When downloadlng

During operation,

terminates

normally,

the indication

the indication

“EXECUTING”

“NORMAL

END”

blinks. is output.

(2) Upload If the

PMC-RC3’RC4’QCNB’NB2

programs one

can be used.

of two

following

data

types

When

used, uploading

(LADDER

language

data

or comparison

or ALL)

can

be

(C

language)

is executed

specified.

Sequence

program

only

ALL

Sequence

program

and language

-142-

than

Ladder

from one of these

LADDER

meantngs:

LADDER

other

data (C language)

and

ALL

PMCs,

have

the

4.

Specify

either data type in step 6I of the operation

described

OPERATION

below:

[Operation] 0

Select

@ Select

F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu

screen.

F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display

*@ Press the
Press the

8

Select

(?I

Uploading

either

name.

[l/O].

[HOST],

and (EXEC]

in this order.

key.

LADDER

or ALL with cursor.

is executed.

@I When uploading

program

> key of the CNC.

*G?JPress the CNC soft keys [PMC]. 0

the source

During operation,

terminates

normally,

“EXECUTING”

the indication

the indication

“NORMAL

blinks. ,

END” is output.

(3) Comparison [Operation] 0

0

Select

Select program

F3 :[PMC]

on the I/O menu screen.

F3 :[COMPAR]

(comparison)

on

the

PMC

menu

screen

to display

the

source

name.

*O Press the c SYSTEM

> key of the CNC.

$0

Press the CNC soft keys

@

Press the
6)

Comparison

0

When comparison

(PMC],

[l/O],

[HOST],

and [EXEC]

in this order

> key

is executed.

During operation,

terminates

normally,

the indication

the indication

“EXECtJTlNG”

“NORMAL

blinks.

END” is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation] 0

Select

@

The screen

(Note)

[END]

dtsplay

returns

to the main menu

In the operations

above,

an asterisk

prefixed

on the CNC.

-143-

screen

to a circled

number

represents

an operation

4. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI

of the Power Mate-D

The NC of the Power Mate-D/H of the Power procedures above).

Mate-F

has only the DPLIMDI

for data input/output

When the DPLIMDI

the

DPLIMDI

screen.

screen and the DPL/MDI When the CRT/MD1

are the same as those with the PMC-R

screen is used, the procedures

from those with the PMC-R When

have the CRTiMDl

screen.

screen Series

for data input/output

The NC

is used, the ((1) to (4) are different

Series.

screen

is used,

perform

downloading,

uploading,

and

comparison

as

described below:

(a) Press the < DGNOS

> key on the DPL/MDI

(b) Press the
> or
(c) Follow procedures

(1) to (4) described

4.5.6.4

Memory card

A object file compiled

card

screen and select the diagnostic data screen

> key on the DPLIMDI

interface

in a personal computer

screen.

above on the personal computer.

in the personal

can be converted

computer

and memory

to a memory card format file, and

output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer.

The PMC

program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory the memory card interface

in the CNC.

By reversing the procedure,

from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

- 144-

card in

programs can be transferred

4.

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC [Operation] Install a memory card interface

F3 : Select

[COMPILE]

in the personal

and compile

Return

to the main menu,

Select

F5 : [M-CARD]

a source

and select

(memory

KEY

F2

KEY

PWC WRITER

F3

KEY

PHC Handy Clle

FS

KEY

Henorv Card

F6

KEY

BFICKUP

l/O MQBRY

(programmer

END

(a)

InputIOutout

- > memory

Menu

card)).

CARD)

Fl KEY

F:!

menu.

FR WRITER

Fl

Fig. 4.5.6.4

(write

from it.

card) from the input/output

F18 KEY

[WRITE]

program.

[l/O] (input/output)

F-5 KEY

Select

computer.

WRITE ( PROCRAMER

KEY

FIO KEY

READ ( PROCWR

:

Fig. 4.5.6.4

J Memry Card

)

( Memory Card

)

END

(b)

Memory

Card Input/Output

- 145-

Screen

OPERATION

4.

OPERATION

Convert the file from source program to memory card format. Specify the following items for execution. l

Name of the source program Display the source program name.

l

Name of the memory card file Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the CNC) to be created by conversion,

WHITE ( Programx

) Merry

Source program name

and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

Card

1

: C : YDATAWMF’LE

Memory Card FILE NAME : D: YSAMPLE. #BF (Specify the MEMORYCARD drive)

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (c)

Input/Output

(to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

-146-

4. OPERATION

The following the memory l

two methods card interface

Using the I/O function Specify

M-CARD,

FUNCTION,

can be used to insert

the memory

in the CNC and read programs

on the memory

in step @ into

card.

of the PMC

READ,

and

the

desired

filename

and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen,

[EXEC]. Sequence

card output

programs

or

file

respectively,

are read from the memory

number then

card file created

at press

DEVICE, soft key

in step 0.

PMC l/O screen

-~~ MONIT STOP

PMC l/O PROGRAM CHANNEL = 1 = M-CARD DEVICE ::FtJNC:T~I.Oti = READ DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME )

[ EXEC I[CANCELI[WRITE I[ READ I[COMPARI

l

Using the BOOT SYSTEM

at power-on

Each CNC can read the sequence SYSTEM

at power-on

Refer to manual

time

program

from the memory

time.

of each CNC for the operation.

-147-

card by using the BOOT

4. OPERATION

(2)

PMC program PMC

transfer

programs

PMC programs

0

the CNC to the personal

are written

When the memory

[Operation

from

card

to a memory

is inserted

on the memory

card,

computer

using

in a memory

a memory

card interface

card can be accessed

card

interface

in the

in the personal

as ordinary

CNC.

computer,

the

DOS files.

J

Specify

M-CARD,

FUNCTION,

WRITE,

LADDER,

key (EXEC].

DATA

KIND,

and the desired

filename

and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen,

Sequence

programs

are output

(omissible)

respectively,

at DEVICE,

then press

soft

to the memory.

PMC l/O screen

‘PMC

I/O

MONIT

PROGRAM

STOP

CHANNEL = 1 = M-CARD DEVICE FHNG:TIiON: = WRITE DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME 1

/ [ EXEC

The following

operations

@

Install a memory

0

Select

[I’O]

@

Select

F5 : [M-CARD]

61

Select

[READ]

@

Convert

card interface

(input!output)

(memory

format

the name

Name of the source Display

the source

computer

side.

computer.

card) from the input/output

<- memory

output

card)).

to a memory

by specifying

menu,

(See Fig. 4.5.6.4

(See Fig. 4.5.6.4

card in step 0

(b).)

from memory

the following

items and running

source

card

(a).)

card format

the utility.

card file

of the conversion

card, and the memory l

I[COMPARI

from the main menu.

Name of the memory Specify

READ

on the personal

in the personal

(read (programmer

program

I[

are performed

the PMC programs

to source l

I[CANCELl[WRITE

memory

card drive in which the memory program

program

name.

- 148-

file written

card is inserted.

to the memory

4. OPERATION

Handy file + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

4.5.6.5

If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted 3.5”

floppy disk (DOS

format),

Handy File interface connected (1) PMC program

the PMC to the CNC.

program

can be read into the RAM of the CNC

This operation can be reversed.

from the personal computer

transfer

to Handy File format and output to a

to the CNC

[Operation] Compile a source program.

Select [l/O] (input/output)

Select F4 : [FDCAS]

Select [WRITE]

from the main menu.

(Handy File) from the input/output menu.

(write (programmer

->

FI

KE\

WRITE

(

Programer

F?

KEY

READ

(

Programner

Fig. 4.5.6.5

(a)

(See Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a).)

Handy File)).

)

FDCAS

Handy File) Handy F i I e)

Input/Output

Screen

via a

4. OPERATION

@

Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying

the following items and

running the utility. l

Name of the source program

l

Name of the Handy File format file

Display the source program.

Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible File) to be generated

by conversion,

by the Handy

and the 3.5” disk drive to which the file is output;

5” floppy disk cannot be used.

WRITE ( Programer

> Handy File

Source program neme Handy File File name (Specify the floppy dish

Fig. 4.5.6.5

)

: C: YDATAYSAMF’LE

(b)

:

drive)

C:YSAMPLE. #SF

Input/Output

(to FDCAS)

Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

8

Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5” floppy disk generated

in step @ into

the Handy File.

(2) PMC program

transfer

from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation] 0

Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program to a 3.5” floppy disk (DOS format).

The following operations are performed on the personal computer

@

side.

Select [I.‘01 (input/output) from the main unit.

(31 Select F4 : [FDCAS]

@I Select [READ]

(Handy File) from the input/output menu.

(read (programmer

< -Handy File)). (See Fig. 4.5.6.5

- 151-

(a).)

4.

Convert source l

the PMC program program

Name Specify floppy

l

by specifying

of the Handy

the following

Frle format

the program

name

the source

READ

items and running

generated

in step 0

to

the utility.

in step 0,

and the 3.5”

floppy

disk drive

where

the

program program.

I Prograr

Source program

I~ Handy File

the source

(c)

program

on the personal

1

: C : YSAMPLE. #SF drive) : C :YDATAYSAMPLE

naiw

Fig. 4.5.6.5

Decompile

File format)

file

output

Handy File File naw (Specify the floppy disk

to be edited

disk (Handy

disk is inserted.

Name of the source Display

on a 3.5” floppy

OPERATION

InputlOutput

(from FDCAS)

file after conversion,

computer.

-152-

Screen

and the resultant

file will become

able

4.

Backup of user program

4.5.6.6 This backup program Please

OPERATION

function

can back up the source

and can restore use this function

the backup

source

program,

the system

tl

KEY

BACKUP

t2

KtV

txSlORl

FlB

KEY

END

(a)

Backup

program

under editing

Menu Screen

(1) Backup

[Operation] 0

Select

[BACKUP]

0

Select

Fl : [BACKUP]

0

Enter a backup

from the input/ output

from the backup

program

BRCKUP (SOURCE

name,

PROGRRH ->

uses,

to another

source

program.

when you back up the source

Fig. 4.5.6.6

which

menu.

menu.

and press

(EXEC].

RRCKUP PROGRAM)

BRCKUP PROGRRW NW

mrmm3m3amm3mnm Fig. 4.5.6.6

(b)

Backup

-153-

Screen

or under debugging.

4.

@ When backup terminates

normaly,

the “NORMAL

END”

message

OPERATION

is displayed.

(2) Restoring

[Operation] @I Select

[BACKUP]

from the input/ output

(3

Select

F2 : [RESTOR]

0

Enter a backup

from the backup

program

name,

menu.

menu.

and press (EXEC].

RLSIORC (SOURCE PROGRRH (- BRCKUP PROGRRH) BRCKUP YROGRRH NRWF

Fig. 4.5.6.6

@I When restoring

terminates

normaly,

(c)

Restoring

the “NORMAL

-154-

Screen

END”

message

is displayed.

4. OPERATION

Setting program options

4.5.7

This function

Specified

the setting

data is stored

[Operation

0

enables

of options

for each source

for each function.

program.

j

Using the < J > or c T > key, position

the cursor

to the function

for which

options

are to

be set.

@

On the setting

screen

for each

function,

< l > or < T > key, then change

select

the setting

an item by positioning

with the et>

the cursor

with the

or < -_$> key.

.\DRTA\SFlnPLE

Fig. 4.57

457.1

Compile

The user can set the compile used

as the initial

values

processing

performed

For details

of each option,

(1)

with the on-line

see Section

as described

options

below.

for the off-line

These

function,

options,

functions.

4.5.4.

specifies

whether

condense

mode

is to be used for compile

specifies

whether

to output

symbol

whether

to output

net comment

or comment

processing.

data to an object

Net comment This option

specifies

-155-

data to an object

when

or are used

Symbol This option

(3)

options

Condense This option

(2)

function

of the compile

file.

file.

set, are

for compile

4. OPERATION

(4) Password This option

specifies

whether

to display

the password

VW

Does not display

[RW&R]

:

Displays password

the

the dialog

password

(R) setting

setting

box.

(Password

(RN)

dialog

dialog

setting

Displays

only the password

(RAN) setting

[RI

Displays

only the password

(R) setting

-156-

setting

dialog

dialog

dialog

box

box.

box.

time.

is disabled.)

box.

Fw

Fig. 4.5.7.1

box at compile

as well

as the

4.

4.5.7.2

OPERATION

Decompile

The user can set the decompile used as the initial values

options

of the off-line

processing

performed

For details

of each option,

(1) Symbol

function

with the on-line see Section

function

decompile

below. options,

These options,

when set, are

or are used for the decompile

functions. 4.5.5.

merge

This option

specifies

data at decompile

whether

to merge

source

program

data

symbol

and comment

and object

file symbol/comment

time.

PJOI

.

Does not merge

[SOURCE]

T

Gives source

[MEMORY

as described

CARD]

:

Gives

prionty

to the source

program

priority

the source

data when

and the symbol

to the object

program

~~INO/SOURCE~I

Fig. 4.5.7.2

-157-

duplicate

addresses

data of the object

file data when

and the symbol

IDecomDilel

data. exist

in the

file.

duplicate

data of the object

addresses file.

exist

,

in

4. OPERATION

4.5.7.3

Modifying program option initial values

When a new program the procedure

is to be created,

described

the initial value

(OPTION.CNF)

of each option

can be modified

by means

of

below.

[Operation] Using the text editor,

file under the directory

open the OPTION.CNF

where

FAPT LADDER-

II is installed.

Find the section starting

corresponding

to a model

#32;(RA3)

A section attempt

having

Find the subsection

Specify

for PMC-RB4

a line

to modify

a line starting

0

(that is. a line

for PMC-RA3

#4l;(Rl34_STEP)

0

modification

with #).

Example:

Note)

to initial value

subject

beginning

such a section

corresponding

with

(STEP

SEQ)

a semicolon

(:) contains

legend

data.

Any

is ignored.

to a function

subject

to initial

value

modification

(that is,

with ‘).

a new value

for the option

whose

initial value

is to be modified.

Table 4.5.7.3 Option

Subsection

0:

condense

‘COMPILE

1:

0:

symbol (Symbol/comment)

1:

0:

netcmt (Net comment)

password

DECOMPILE

symbol-merge

Never

attempt

Otherwise,

to modify

the system

the values

and function

compile

processing

in normal

compile

processing

in condense

Does not output symbol/comment data to the object file. Outputs symbol/comment data to the object file.

1:

Does not output net comment data to the object file. Outputs net comment data to the object file.

0: 1: 2: 3:

Does Sets Sets Sets

0: 1:

Does not perform merge processing. Performs merge processing with priority given to source program data. Performs merge processing with priority given to object file data.

2:

Note)

Performs mode. Performs mode.

Setting

not set a password. a password (R/W) and password a password (RMT). a password (R).

of options

may malfunction.

-158-

that are not listed

(R).

in the above

table.

4. OPERATION

4.5.8

Mnemonic editing

4.5.8.1

Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic

file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation] 0

Select [MNEEDTJ

Q

The mnemonic

(mnemonic

editing) from the main menu.

menu screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1

FI KEY :

SOURCE PROGRAM-) WEUINIC FILE

F2 KEY :

MNEWNIC FILE ) SOURCE PROGRAM

F3 KEY :

EXECUTEUSER BATCH FILE

FIO KEY :

END

Fig. 4.5.8.1(a)

0

Select [MNECNV]

(a)).

Mnemonic

(conversion to mnemonic).

-159-

Menu Screen

4.

@I The mnemonic

conversion

screen

appears

OPERATION

(Fig. 4.5.8.1(b)).

I) SOURCEPROGRAMNM(E 2) WEMUNIC FILE NAME 31 CUNVfRTADI)TA KIND SELECTIUN (0 { ; : yqgl PARAMETER (3

SwBULLCMMENr

Fig. 4.5.8.1

Specify l

l

the following program

the name of the source

Conversion

Screen

name program

to be converted.

file name

the name

40 characters Data conversion Specify

Mnemonic

P-C

items:

Display

Specify

l

(b)

Source

Mnemonic

: LADDER : I/U MODULE MESSECE

: FUR

4) MODE

0

: 4 , 5 . 6

of Ihe mnemonic

file to which

a source

program

is converted.

Up to

can be specified. selection

data files subject

to conversion.

All data files can be specified

or specific

data

files can be selected. l

Mode

(setting

Specify < +

setting

item selection) items.

Select

items

from

> keys.

- 160-

the

table

below,

using

the

-z t

>

and

4. OPERATION

:OR - P-G

P-G output Converts Comment

lapanese

(Note)

format

IJLL - OPTIONS

Data names

data, which may include address

treated

Data

all

Converts

.ABEL/

Data

is converted

SUB-PROGRAM

(JMPB,

JMPC,

highlighted.

Select

[EXEC]

0

Source

@

An error

and the jump

The

operand

function

sections,

step

number

message

destination

SP, or another

setting.

the text

specifying

(label)

instruction)

of the

converted

(The function

instruction

and

comment

to Japanese-language

of a function used

instruction

in a sub-program

mnemonic

instruction

section

data used

does

is not

in the sub-

setting.)

of a Japanese-language

Japanese

mode

displayed

message


language

comment

conversion

cannot

be selected

system.

on the code

or Japanese-language

input

mode

screen

during

editing.

upon completion

program

conversion

and

(Note 3).

on an English

@

is converted.

comments,

sections,

does not agree with the other

Converts

Format

and

of a Japanese-language

CALL,

with other

program

message


is converted.

instruction

the text

(Note 3).

(Note 2, 3)

message

is converted.

format

The item

(Note 2).

is converted.

kanji characters,

symbols

as comments

including

sections

(Note 1)

to code format

kanji characters,

the text of a Japanese-language

including

format

may include

message

(Note 3).

Comment

agree

data is converted.

data, which

Converts

anguage :omment

format

the text of a Japanese-language

is converted

message screen

of item specification.

to a mnemonic

is displayed appears

when

if

file.

is pressed

< SPACE > is pressed

-161-

after

conversion.

after conversion.

The

mnemonic

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.2

Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic program

text file edited

in a certain

that can be edited

format

with the personal

using a atandard computer

version

text editor

is converted

to a source

of FAPT LADDER.

(Operation] Select

[MNEEDT]

The mnemonic

Select

(mnemonic

editing)

menu screen

appears.

[SRCCNV]

The source

(conversion

program

I)

conversion

WEMONIC

FILE

2) SOURCE

Specify l

PROCRAM

the followlng

Mnemonic Specify

from the main menu.

to a source

screen

program).

appears

(Fig. 458.2).

NAMT NAME

items:

file name the name

of a mnemonic

file to be converted.

Up to 40 characters

can be

specified. 0

Source

program

Display

the name of the source

Select

[EXEC]

Mnemonic

name

upon completion

file is converted

An error

message

program

conversion

to which

a mnemonic

file is to be converted.

of item specification.

to a source

is displayed screen

program

if

appears

program

c Enter> when

is pressed

after

-z SPACE > is pressed

-162-

conversion.

The

after conversion.

source

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.3

Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially

available text editor is to be converted to a source

program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format. (1) Identification

code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification

codes that each begin with %.

Description

ID code

Beginning of ALL-format data

%@A %@E

End of ALL-format data

%@O to 5

Beginning of unit-format data

% only

End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below. ‘I PMC model Unit-format data R series/PAS/QC/NB/NB2 %@O

Parameter

%@l

Title

%@2 or %@2-C (Note 1)

Symbol & comment Ladder

%@3

Message

%@4

l/O module

% @5

Note 1) “%@2”, and “%@2-C”

correspond to source format types as follows:

% @2

:

FORMAT-A/B

%@2-c

:

FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER-II uses FORMAT-C only. a mnemonic file, conversion

to “%@2-C”

to a source program, however,

This means that, as part of conversion type code is performed.

both type codes (“%@2”

used.

-163-

to

For conversion

and “%@2-C”)

can be

4.

OPERATION

(2) Linefeed code Control

character

LF (OAH) is defined

as a linefeed

Control

code.

character

CR (ODH) is

ignored.

symbols

(3) Reserved

0

cd

This special l

character

A semicolon

is reserved

comment.

Characters

When a mnemonic a comment @

r:j

This special

(4) Control The

character

(f)

character

A colon

l

A colon

is also

number

from

channel

number.

data section

follow

to separate

a semicolon

are

back to a source

ladder

treated

data from a

as a comment.

program,

a semicolon

and

it are not generated.

is reserved

for use in ladder

is used in the ladder data section Data that precedes used

data.

a colon

in the

I/O module

is treated

Data

data.

a net number

from ladder

as a net number.

l/O module

data.

and l/O module

to separate

data

that

section

precedes

to separate a colon

a channel

is treated

as a

character

dollar

(a) Symbol

that

file is converted

that follows

l

data.

for use in ladder

is used in the ladder

character

“$”

is used

in the sentence

and comment

Description

must be described

of address the address

Describe

the address

with blank character

R0200.0

character

as “$$‘I

in the

mnemonic

in the mnemonic

file.

Every

dollar

file.

data

Describe

L

as control

and symbol data and the symbol

strings

in a same

data to top of line and the symbol or horizontal

tabulation

UNIT - 3 - POWER

-164-

character

line.

strings

describe

as delimitter.

after address

data

4.

OPERATION

@ Description of relay comment and coil comment Describe the relay comment The first string between next string between

and coil comment

after address defined in (1).

two single quotation marks after mark “$1” is relay comment.

And

two single quotation marks is coil comment.

I $1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’

Blank character

‘KEEP UNIT-3

POWER

ON’

or horizontal tabulation character Mark of comment

When relay comment

is not used, a part of relay comment

data line (only ‘$1’)

must be described

by double

single quotation marks.

I

Note)

$1 ”

‘INITIALIZE

Every single quotation

OF SEQUENCE’

mark in the relay comment

described as “$‘I + ““’ in the mnemonic

and coil comment

string must be

file.

(b) Ladder data

Description of net comment The net comment

data is specified by ‘(” and “)’ characters.

31

Designation

of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

Designation

of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described

the mnemonic

file.

(for ladder diagram printing)

-165-

as “$P” or “$p” in

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.4

Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter 0

PMC-PA3:RA3!Rf34!RB4

%@ 0

1

1

2. Counter

dala type

NOJ.

3. Whether

an operator’s

PMC-RB41

4.

2

BINARY1

3 4

(STEP)IRBSIRBG

(Binary

(YES: Used, NO: Not used)

panel is used

(PMC-RA3/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4

PMC model

81 [EOBI (Note)

or BCD)

(STEP SEQ) PMC-PAYPMCRB5/PMC-RB6)

When specifying the

YES in Item 3 above

KEY address,

LED address,

(whether

KEY image

an operator’s address,

and

ROOlOl

1

panel is used), LED image

specify

address

as

follows:

(3 @

YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO

PMC-RB3

%@ 0 1 (Binary

2

BINARYJ.

Counter

data type

3 4

NOi PMC-RB31

Whether

an operator’s

7

1001

Ladder

panel

or BCD) (YES: Used,

is used

NO: Not used)

(PMC-RB3)

PMC model execution

time

(100% (fixed))

%l IEOBI (Note)

When

specifying

specify

the

KEY

address

as follows:

YES

in Item

address,

3 YES X0000

LED

3 above address,

(whether KEY

an

operator’s

image

address,

YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

-166-

panel and

is used),

LED

image

4. OPERATION

0

PMCRC3IRC4IRC4

se

0

2

BCDl

1 2. Counter

3 4

ND1 PMC-RC41

5

000000

7

(STEP)

data type

3.

Whether

4.

PMC model

5.

Start address

(Binary

an operator’s

(PMCRC3/PMCRC4/PMCRC4

of language

program

%l IEOBI

link control

(0 or 800000

statement

data

to SFFFFF

(hexadecimal)) 7. When

Ladder

specifying

YES

specify

the

KEY

address

as follows:

execution in Item

address,

time

(1 to 150%)

3 above

LED

3 YES X0000

@


(STEPSEQ))

1001

(Note)

or BCD)

panel is used

(whether

address,

KEY

an

operator’s

image

address,

panel and

is used),

LED

image

YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

PMCQC/NB/‘NB2

se

0 1

2

BCDl

3 4

NOi PMC-QCJ

5

000000

6 7

501 1001

Counter

data type

3.

Whether

an operator’s

4.

PMC model

5.

Start address

(Binary

or BCD)

panel is used


(PMC-OC/PMC-NB/PMC-NB2) of language

program

link control

(0 or 200000

statement

data

to 2FFFFF

(hexadecimal)) 6.

sl [EOBI (Note)

2.

Percentage

of language

7. Ladder execution

If YES

is specified

addresses

in item

program

execution

time

time

(Always

100%)

3 (whether

an operator’s

panel

of KEY, LED, KEY image,

and LED image

as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO1

-167-

(1% to 99% 1

is used),

specify

the

4.

OPERATION

(b) Title (common to all models)

%@

11

'01

MACHINE

TOOL

BUILDER

02

MACHINE

TOOL

NAME1

03

CNC

7

IO4

PMC

PROGRAM

~05

EDITION

'06

PROGRAM

'07

DATE

'08

PROGRAM

109

ROM

~10

REMARKS1

PMC

NAME

1

NAME1 NO.1 NO.1 DRAWING

OF

NO.1

PROGRAMING1 DESIGNED

WRITTEN

BYi BY1

I% 1

~

[EOB]

(c) Symbols and comments

Symbol

rp

%@2-c R0200.0

(common to all models)

UNIT-3-POWER 'KEEP UNIT-3

$1 'KEEP POWER ON'

POWER ON' Coil Comment

I Relay comment

R0200.1

UNIT-2-ACT 'KEEP UNIT-4

$1 *$'PowER$$'

$$POWER$' -Control

R0300.0 $1

'KEEP POWER ON'

PO008

ON'

'KEEP INIT-

POWER ON'

OPEN-FRONT

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' LO100 $1 " 1

INITIALIZE 'INITIALIZE

OF SEQUENCE'

no Relay comment

% IEOBI

-168-

code

4.

OPERATION

Q) FULL- OPTIONS

%@3

r-

1

NOOOOl:

SUB

71

; SP

Pl

;(SUBPRl :

N00002:

RD

x0.0

;(XADRSl

68

; JMPBJ

LlOO

;(LABELl

N00003:

RD SUB

SUB

SUB

N00006:

SUB

N00007:

73

; JMPCJ

LlOO

;(LABELl

69

; LBL

LlOO

;(LABELl

71

;

P2

DEC

DO

: (DADRSOI

N00009:

SUB

64

LOOl" 1

) 1

)l

spl

RO.0

72

) "JUMPB LABEL

1

RD

SUB

no Relay comment

1

; (SPlOOO ; (RADRSOO

WRT

)1

[LABEL ~ooooi] 1

i- SPE

N00008:

LOOl" 4-_1

[LABEL ~ooool] 1

72

21 DO.0

) "JUMPB LABEL

[LABEL ~ooooi] I1

;(XADRSI

; N00005:

1

DATA NO.Ol] 1 Coil comment

no Comment

x0.1

; N00004:

Relay comment

) "SUB PROG. NO.O1"

[SUB PROGRAM

SUB

;

Symbol r

) "SUB PROGRAM

1 1 1 )

1 : SPE 1 : END 1

81

-170-

DATA NO.l"l

4. OPERATION

@

LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

8@3

I

3

SUBPRl

SUBPRl

SP

Address

I

> “SUB

;
PROG. N0.01"

; [SUB PROGRAM r

DATA NO.011 1 Coil comment

Symbol

-

> "JIJMPB LABEL LOOl"J.

RD

XADRSl

;
JMPB

LABEL1

;
RD

XADRSZ

;
> "JUMPB

JMPC

LABEL1

;
> [LABEL Looooi] 1

;
>l

LBL

LABEL1

>l ; [LABEL ~ooool] 1

: SPE SPlOOO

Relay comment

LABEL LOol"1

[LABEL LOOOOl] 1

1

SP

;
> "SUB PROGRAM

RD

RADROO

;
'

DEC

DADR04

;
'

WRT

DO.0

NO.l"l

1 1

21 SPE

1

END

1

1

01

(4

J

Message

%@

4

A0

0.

1 0

AOO.l L

2100020

ATC

2101022

SPINDLE

NOT

SIGNAL

EDTOK

%l IEOBI 0)

NOT SPEED

CLOSE1 ARRIVA

ON1

2100020

A00.2

DOOR

I/O module

%@ 5 1 x000

1

0

1

ID64AJ.

YOO8

1

0

4

OD64Bl

sl [EOBI

- 171-

KEY

SWITCH

ONJ.

4. OPERATION

Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

458.5

(a) PMC-FIB4 %@A 1 %@O 1 2 BINARY4 3 NO& 4 PMC-RB4 %1 %@l 1 01 MACHINE

1

TOOL BUILDER

NAME1

-10 REMARKS 1 %1 %@2-c 1 R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1 'KEEP UNIT-~ SSPOWERS' ON'1 $1 'S'POWERSS' R0300.0 1 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'J. $1 'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT1 PO008 $1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1 INITIALIZE1 LO100 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'1 $1 " %

1

%@3

1

RD RlOOl.01 OR R120.3 1 AND R1000.2 1 WRT Y2000.4 1 (* Any characters Inscribe the net comment here. A Net comment which are input with personal computer can be used. 1) RD R1OO1.O 1 AND R1000.2 1 WRT Y23.4 1 form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing) 1* SP l) RD R1O1.O 1 OR R123.4 1 AND R100.21 WRT Y200.4 1 % 1 %@4 1 AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1 % 1 %@5 1 x000 1 0 1 ID16CI YOO8 1 0 4 OD32A1

1 %@E 1 %

-172-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.6

function is selected when setting a

The note if the step sequence model

When using the step sequence The mnemonic

method, mnemonic

instructions cannot be coded.

conversion functions need following notes:

1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions A step sequence

program cannot

create a step sequence

subprograms step

conversion

are converted

sequence

source

mnemonic-to-source

instructions.

It is impossible

to

conversion.

and Mnemonic-to-Source

If source-to-mnemonic

with mnemonic

program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER

by means of mnemonic-to-source

2) Source-to-Mnemonic

be created

Conversions

is executed

to mnemonics,

program

conversion,

for a step sequence step sequence

is subjected

source program, only ladder

subprograms

being ignored.

to source-to-mnemonic

conversion,

If a

then

to

the original source program will not be replicated.

3) Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics A program can be converted

by using mnemonics,

as shown below:

*

PMCRC3 1 PMCRC4

e

J PMCRC4

A program (STEP

for the PMC-RE34

SEC)

converted

are

not able

(STEP

SEC)) cannot

to use mnemonics

if a ROM file is used, however.

1 (STEP SEQ)

be converted

for step

for use with the PMCRC4

sequence.

The

(For details of this conversion,

3.)

- 173-

program

can

be

see the APPENDIX

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.7

User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT

A user’s

own

text editor

l

batch

can be executed

file generated

by suspending

by editing

the contents

the execution

of FAPT LADDER.

of the FLMNE.BAT

file with a standard

can also be executed.

Example

1

The execution

of FAPT LADDER

VZ must be defined

is suspended

in the environment

variable

and text editor

VZ is activated.

(in this case,

PATH beforehand.)

[Operation] Use a standard

text editor

to create

the batch file FLMNE.BAT

as follows:

vz

Select

MNEEDT

The mnemonic

Select

(mnemonic

menu screen

([BATCH]

The following

message

Add

parameter(s)?

Specify

A (Add),

with the extension

To restart

Example

appears.

file execution).

appears:

[A(Add),

and specify

N(Not

*.HEX

add),

S(Stop)]

as the parameter.

VZ is activated

and a list of files

.HEX is displayed.

FAPT LADDER,

Press any key.

The

(user batch

from the main menu.

‘FLMNE.BAT’.

Execute

l

editing)

terminate

VZ.

display

returns

The screen

to the mnemonic

menu

screen.

2

execution

COMMAND.COM

of

FAPT

is activated

LADDER

is

suspended.

and MS-DOS

commands

follows:

COMMAND

I

-174-

Then,

the

are enabled.

command Create

processor

FLMNE.BAT

as

4.

4.5.9

OPERATION

Utility

Selecting

(UTILTY]

functions

from the off-line

are registered

menu

enables

the use of the utility

functions.

The following

at installation:

UTILITY Pl

DOS

F2

f loadat

F3

View

F4

Linker

result

Fig. 4.5.9 (a) Utility Screen

Moving

to the DOS command

Data transfer

between

line (starting

the P-G and personal

(For details,

see Section

Referencing

the results

3.4 in Appendix

of compile

:

COMMAND.COM)

computer

c F2 > : floadat

(FLOADAT)

3.)

or decompile

< F3 > : View result

processing

< F4 > : Linker

Link function

0

and 0

are detailed

The user can register registration,

below. any desired

command

2.1 of Appendix

see Section

(1) Referencing

the results

of compile

Upon the completion

of compile

are created.

files

available

These

editor.

FAPT LADDER

DOS

By using

are

as a utility.

For an explanation

of how to perform

this

2.

or decompile or decompile

of text

(starting

processing,

format,

this function,

processing

enabling

however,

FLVIEW.BAT)

an execution their

these

reference

result

file and map file

using

a commercially

files can be referenced

even

before

is terminated.

[Operation] 0)

Press

< F3 > on the utility screen.

8

Then,

the pop-up

pressing

the
screen

shown

below

appears.

These

files can now

be referenced

by

> key.

$P. :.er C .. :.... ..::i..l::>. .j: .‘.+ The user can specify (.err:

Execution

result

the type of files to be referenced, filei.map:

Map file).

simply

by changing

the file name extension

4. OPERATION

(2)

Link

During

linking,

language required

can

load modules

created

be used

with

only

when the C language

are linked

in the C language

(STEP

PMCRC3RC4RC4

with a ROM format

SEQ)IQCINBINB2.

file.

The C

Linking

is not

is not used.

U 1 II ROM format file

- gig -

U

Transferred

to the ROM writers

andPMC

Load modules fn C language

(Note 1)

This function

enables

this function,

an object

and linked

C proqram

l

-

and

to be performed

C

on the PMC (dotted

development

Personal

linking

environment

language

line in the figure

for PMC-RC

In addition,

with

transferred

to

below).

(IRC3IRC4IQCINB)

Link control

source

-

FAPT

LADDER

source Ibject file MCARD file)

FANUC library

iC286 (compiler)

I ,tt BND386

(binder)

BLD386

t (binder)

OJ386

computer.

can be separately

computer Link control statement creation tool

C language

on a personal

load modules

$_ (converter

c Intel hexadecimal load module

distribution

W ROM format file

Convert (Note 2) Link _ROM format file -Object file (MCARD file) with C language

‘) _

Convert (Note 2)

HEX2SREC

(Note

l)--

I-I-

-176-

l

.I

4.

(Note

l)FAPT

LADDER-II does not allow Intel hexadecimal

load modules

link operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC

(Note

2)With

FAPT LADDER-II,

format

file cannot

ROM format files are no longer used.

be created

by compile

processing

object file and ROM format file being required.

OPERATION

to be linked.

Before

User’s Manual.

This means that a ROM

alone,

conversion

between

an

A detailed description is given below.

(4 Uselng method of HEX2SREC Clanguage

load modules

directly linked.

created

in the development

languages

indicated

above

cannot

be

Perform the below operation before linking.

[Operation] in response to the DOS prompt.

@I Execute HEX2SREC.EXE

IA:\FLADDER\APPENDIX>

8

Specify as follows:

input-file-name

HEx2sREc

output-file-name

I

Conversion is performed.

@I Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

@

Specify an output file name (for example,

SAMPLE.SR)

as the load module file name for

linking.

(Note)

When

the extension

assumed. changed

Output

of an input file name

is directed

to “.SR.”

is omitted,

“.HEX”

is

but the extension

is

of the following files has the same effect

in

to a file with the same

The specification

the extension name

input/output:

(b) Converting

HEXZSREC

SAMPLE.HEX

HEXZSREC

SAMPLE

HEXZSREC

SAMPLE.HEX

HEXZSREC

SAMPLE

SAMPLE.SR

SAMPLE.SR

between an object file and ROM format file

With FAPT LADDER-II,

a ROM format file cannot be created

Instead, in the case of link processing,

Before link processing:

After link processing:

Conversion

Conversion

by compiling

a source program.

the following extra work is required.

from an object file (MCARD

file) to a ROM format file

from a ROM format file to an object file (MCARD

-177-

file)

4. OPERATION

[Operation] @

Compile

G3 Select

0

(Note)

the source

program

(I/O) from the off-line

(to create

an object

menu.

Press the < F9 > key on the I/O screen.

The 110 screen

does

file).

not display

Then, the l/O (ROM FILE) screen

information

relating

to the

c F9 > key,

to convert

the object

file (MCARD

F2 [READ]

to convert

the ROM

is displayed.

but the

< F9 >

key can be selected.

Before

link processing,

format

file.

object

file (MCARD

select

Fl [WRITE]

After link processing,

select

file).

Fl

KEV

WRITE ( Memory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F2

KEY

AEFlO ( Memory Card <- ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F10 KEY

END

Fig. 4.5.9 (b)

-178-

file) to a ROM format

file to an

4.

(c) Starting

OPERATION

link processing

[Operation] @

Press

GZJ Then,

< F4 > on the utility screen.

the pop-up

screen

shown

below

Pressing

appears.

the

key displays

the

link screen.

Specify

the model

The table

to be used for link processing,

below

indicates

by changing

the correspondence

between

the model

the PMC

models

names.

PMC model

PMC-RC3

f103400. tbl

PMC-RC4

1104000. lbl

PMCRC4

0

Model

(STEP SEQ)

fl04200.

1103700. tbl

PMC-NB

1103800. tbl

PMC-NB2

fl04300.

The link screen

file name (Initial value)

tbf

PMC-QC

tbl

(Fig. 4.5.9 (c)) appears.

Linker

Load

wdule

ROM forut

f i Ie name file

Series

name Edlllan

A:YDATAYC-WDULE.

:

SR

A:YDATAYSAWLE.UEX

bchlne

tool

name

NC d WC na.e

Progru

Fig. 4.5.9 (c)

Link Screen

-179-

no

file name. and

model

file

4.

If an

(Note)

OPERATION

invalid model file is spectfted, the status line of the link screen does not display a

model name.

In such a case, check the following:

When the newly entered file name is invalid + Enter a valid file name.

.

When the specified model file is not installed --* Install the model file.

(d) Linking

[Operation] m

Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link.

The load module file

name

file name

must conform

specified

to DOS

with its extension

specifications. (--------.

l

Here the load module * *).

(Specity

an output

program

should be name

for

HEX2SREC.)

@

Select [EXEC].

(3) Termination

[Operation] 0

Select [END].

Q

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.10 Selecting

On-Line Function from Off- Line Function

Selecttng

FUNCTION”

“ON-LINE

program)” functions.

(Correct

from the off-line menu enables the use of the “On- Line (selected

For details, see Section

a part of the “(4) Coversion

LADDER”

in the “APPENDIX

“4.6

of a ROM

3 CONVERSION

On-Line Function”.

format

file ” in the “3.2 Conversion

OF SEQUENCE

from FAPT

PROGRAM”)

[Present] (1‘) Select

]Off-Line

Function]


then select

F6 [l/O].

The

[l/O]

screen

The

[l/O]

screen

appears.

[Correctron] (5) Select

[Off-Line

Function]


appears.

- 180-

then

select

[l/O].

4. OPERATION

4.6

Online function

4.6.1

The outline of Online function

4.6.1.1 The

Outline

on-line

signal

function

statuses

enables

the onscreen

using a personal

The main features

of the on-line

l

Onscreen

monitoring

l

Online editing

l

Display

l

Onscreen

l

Input and output

function

of ladder

of ladder

and modification

monitoring

computer

monitoring connected

and

modification

to the CNC through

of ladder

programs

an RS232C

cable.

and

are:

programs

programs

of PMC parameters

and modification

of a program

of signal statuses

to and from the PMC (loading

from the PMC and storing

to

the PM0

l

Writing to F-ROM

[Note] The on-line

The on-line

function

monitoring

can be selected

function

of a step sequence

from the initial

menu

options:

0

ON-LINE

FUNCTION

@

ON-LINE

(SELECTED

The two options

are outlined

PROGRAM)

below:

- 181 -

program

by selecting

is not supported.

either

of the following

two

4.

OPERATION

(1) On-line function outline (a) ON-LINE Select

FUNCTION

this option

subsequently

- FAPT LADDER-II Select

to load

monilor

“ON-LINE

monitor

program

the ladder

from program

,

the PMC

to a personal

computer

and

and signal statuses.

,----

CNCiPMC

FUNCTION”.

A sequence program the PMC (automatic). Ladder

a ladder

and modify

is loaded

from

1 Sequence

program

(RAM)

I

Sequence

On-line function *IB, Diagnosis . lnputioutput (Loading from or storing to the PMC, writing to FROM) Communication (Communication with the PMC)

program

I

01

(RAM)

1 Sequence I

J @

File storage

-182-

1

7 Power program

ON

(F-ROM)

1 I

4. OPERATION

(b)

ON-LINE

(SELECTED

PROGRAM)

Select this optron to store a program

selected

using [PROGRAM

SELECT]

on the initial

menu of the PMC and to monitor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses. This function enables

a ladder program,

held by the PMC,

to be loaded into a personal

computer. This function

enables

the ladder

comment or net comment

- FAPT LADDER-II

monitor/online

edit function

of the program selected by [PROGRAM

to be applied SELECT].

CNUPMC

1,

Select “ON-LINE PROGRAM)“.

(SELECTED

0 r

A sequence program held on the PMC is compared with the sequence program specified on the personal computer (automatic). < If the programs do not match > Select one of the following monitoring methods: . Loading of the program from the PMC . Storing of the program to the PMC . Respecifying the program on the personal computer Continuing or stopping the processing Ladder monitor

Sequence

Sequence

@1 1 Sequence

t program (RAM)

On-line function . Diagnosis 2@ . Input/output (Loading from or storing to the PMC. writing to FROM)

. Communication

to a relay

(Communication

with the PMC)

File B

. Relay comment . Net comment L

- 183-

program (RAM) 1 Power ON program (F-ROM)

1

4. OPERATION

4.6.1.2

Starting the on-line function

(1) Specifying the on-line function To

use the on-line

function,

select

“ON-LINE

FUNCTION”

or “ON-LINE

(SELECTED

PROGRAM)” on the initial menu screen. The operation of the function (SELECTED

PROGRAM)”

partly depends on whether “ON-LINE

is selected.

For details

FUNCTION”

of the subsequent

or “ON-LINE

operation,

see the

description of the function to be used.

RBO(STEP SEQ)

[ C:YDATRYSAWLE I

ROBE-9201-3503

Version 01.0

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and press [ENTERI or [SPRCEI key to select.

r

bff-Line Function

I

On-Line Function

I

On-Line (selected orogram)

I

Exit

I

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (a)

(Note)

Before attempting to use the on-line function,

connect all cables and set up the PMC.

Before selecting the on-line function, see Section 4.6.2, “Preparation.”

- 184-

4.

(2) Selecting “ON-LINE If “ON-LINE screen

is selected,

With lhe ladder

from a pull-down

[Displaying

FUNCTION”

FUNCTION”

to appear.

performing monitor

menu or by pressing

the ladder

monitor

the following

screen

steps causes

displayed,

the corresponding

select

function

“ON-LINE

the ladder

a desired

monitor

function

either

key.

screen] Related

Select

OPERATION

section

FUNCTION”.

J

8

Communication

with the PMC is executed.

. .

.. . . .

See Section

4.6.6,

“Communication.”

(automatic) &

0

A program

is loaded

.

from the PMC (automatic).

(This step is executed

.

See Section “Loading

onlv when required.)

4.6.5.1,

from the PMC.”

J The ladder subproaram

monitor screen

.

. . .

appears

..

.

. .

.

.. .

(automatic).

J Select

a subproqram.

The screens

are outlined

1

See Section

. _. . . . .

.

.

J The ladder monitor

.

screen

below.

.

appears.

For details,

see the corresponding

-185-

“Ladder

sections.

4.6.4.1,

monitor.”

4. OPERATION

(a) Communication Selecting

with the PMC “ON-LINE

COMMUNICATION”

FUNCTION” dialog

causes

box) to appear

the

as shown

online

monitor

below.

screen

Communication

(“SET

with the PMC

starts automatrcally.

Try

to

connect

with

0000 0000

PllC

F7 Splist

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(Note)

If communicatron

Check

the settings.

dialog

box.

The

(See Section

4.6.6,

- 186-

Symbol

Fl@ Seting

(b)

falls. click the (“PARAMETER”]

COMMUNICATION”

F9

FB Search

button

communication “Communication.“)

in the “SET parameter

settings

appear.

4. OPERATION

(b) Loading After

from the PMC

communication

box closes program

with the PMC

automatically

starts

and the “LOAD

is automatically

loaded

normally,

the

FROM PMC”

“SET

dialog

COMMUNICATION”

box is opened

dialog

in its place.

A

from the PMC.

-Transfer

Lid

ftom

data

type

PNC

..,

0 ALL

. LADDER

0

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(Note)

(c)

When the most be skipped. Displaying

recently

the “SUBPROGRAM”

Once a program

is loaded

monitor

appears.

described

monitored

function

(c)

program

dialog

is to be used,

box (Ladder

monitor

loading

function)

from the PMC, the “SUBPROGRAM” Specify

the subprogram

from the PMC can

dialog

to be monitored

box for the ladder

in the dialog

box as

below:

[Operation] il,

Posrtion

the cursor

8

Press the

@

The ladder

diagram

to the desired

subprogram

by pressing

the

< t > or < 1 7 key.

key.

for the selected

subprogram

appears.

... ‘, ,.,. :. : . j .:..,.,; :,.,: ,:.,

LEVECl LEVEL2 PO0001

(OPEN RIGHT DOOR

)

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Rl

PO0002

(OPEN LEFT DOOR

)

MOVE

P00010

(GRIP WORK PIECE

)

PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

PO0011

(PUT WORK PIECE

)

PUT DOWN A WORK

PO0021

(CLOSE RIGHT DOOR)

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2

PO0022

(CLOSE

MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

LEFT DOOR

)

LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Ll

1

Fig. 4.6.1.2

- 187-

(d)

Ok

11 Cancel]

4. OPERATION

(b) Decompiling

a selected

If “ON-LINE input/output following

function

message

IMemory

card

For details,

Selecting When

PROGRAM)”

of the

file

format

function

see Appendix

a monitoring

after

but before

a program

is obtained

the program

using

is decompiled,

the the

has

updated.

been

obtained

Decompile

it

? (Y/N)

using the input/output

function,

1

type Y.

1.

method

communication

with

is selected,

the programs

do not match,

a desrred

function,

for the program

PROGRAM)”

Select

on-line

is selected

appears:

To use the on-line

6)

program

(SELECTED

the

PMC

the selected

starts

normally

program

the dialog

after

is compared

box shown

below

“ON-LINE

(SELECTED

with that held on the PMC.

If

appears.

function.

:

[LOAD]

A program

is loaded

from PMC memory

and the selected

program

is overwritten.

:

[STORE]

The selected replaces

program

[SELECT]

:

The selected

[CONTINUE]

:

The

selected

monitor

:

N:E-3160 1

Load

program

display

Selected

program

Load

from

Store

to

Select

1

Quit

1

Quit

If the selected above

program

appears.

of off-line

editing

When the on-line

is

dialog

box

does

not

screen,

but

Note that ladder

same.

memory. memory.

difference.

On-Line

function. (e)

the program

for example,

function

appear.

monitor

correctly.

not

PMC program

or by using an internal monitor

on the ladder

PMC program

does not match

This occurs,

appears

terminates.

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(Note)

program

program.

Disregard

IDisregard]

The selected

on the PMC is not replaced.

is not performed

function

IStore)

to the PMC.

on the PMC.

is modified.

already

The on-line

1

already

program

the program

[END]

is stored

the program

on the PMC the dialog

when a single program

is modified

box shown by means

edit functron.

is started Instead.

immediately.

- 189-

for a program the

subprogram

that is loaded selection

or stored,

screen

the

appears

4.

(4) Displaying

OPERATION

the PMC status (icon)

The on-line

functron

indicates

PMC statuses,

the current

using

Icons

at the right

end of the

status line.

(a) Display

positions

and types of icons

Displayed of icon 1.

File

2.

Diagnose

3,

l/o

4.

~OmWniCakiOn

I t t 000

Fig. 4.6.1.2

0

PMC alarm The following

status icon indicates

whether

the PMC is in the alarm state.

Fig. 4.6.1.2

Ladder

executron

The following

Gray : Alarm not exiits on PMC

(g)

status

icon indicates

whether

a ladder

program

Program on PMC is running.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (3) PMC communication The following

r

(f)

Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC

(2,

position

is running.

Program on PMC is stopped.

(h)

status

icon rndrcates

whether

a communication

Fig. 4.6.1.2

-190-

(i)

link with the PMC is established.

4. OPERATION

4.6.1.3

Menus

The following function,

figure

shows

the menu

see the corresponding

On-line

function

-

configuration

of the on-line

function.

For details

of each

sections.

-1

I. File

File save Off-Line -E

Function

Exit

-_; !. Diagnose

Ladder

Monitor

(on-line

Editor)

PMC Status Signal

Status Timer

PMC Parameter -I-

Counter

I:

Keep relay Data table control Data table

PMC alarm

status

RUN/STOP

the ladder

System

Information

Load from PMC Store to PMC 4. Communication

Fig. 4.6.1.3

F-ROM write -

Communication

Menu Configuration

4. OPERATION

4.6.2

Preparation

Before

0

attempting

Connect

($1 Check

4.6.2.1 Connect Specify

to use the on-line

the PMC to the personal

and set the parameters

Connect

ONLINE

make

computer

the following

via an RS232C

for the PMC.

(4.6.2.2

preparations:

cable.

(4.6.2.1)

to 4.624)

Connecting the cable one end of the RS-232C the selected

dialog

the other Specify

box of the on-line

end of the cable

the

MONITOR

for CHANNEL.

cable to the COMl

port in the “PARAMETER”

COMMUNICATION”

CNC.

function,

selected screen

port

of the PMC.

When the cable

CHANNEL When

is connected

-

box, called

computer.

from the “SET

function.

to the RS232-1 in the

or COM2 port of the personal

dialog

or RS232-2 parameter

the cable

to RS232-2,

192-

port on the main board of the

is connected specify

of the

PARAMETERS to RS232-1,

2 for CHANNEL.

FOR

specify

.

1

4. OPERATION

4.6.2.2 The

Parameter parameters

MONITOR causes

for

screen.

the

orvline

Pressing

the on-line

PARAMETER

screen for on-line monitor

monitor

FOR

monitor

are

the [MONIT)

parameter

ONLINE

set

then [ONLINE]

screen

RS-232C CHANNEL BAUD RATE PARITY STOP BIT TIMER 1 TIMER 2 TIMER 3 MAX PACKET

= ‘&Q/NOT =

RUN

USE

= 300/600/1200/2400/4800~ih%tti/19200 = *ONE/ODD/EVEN = 1 BIT/%.'&S = 0 = 5000 = 15000 SIZE = 1024

:

the g-inch

screen

is displayed

page,

use the
ONLINE

screen

to appear.

0

INIT

Fig. 4.6.2.2

The CRT’MDI

soft keys on the PMC menu

ONLINE

1

EMG ST

[Note] 2.

FOR

,. .,.

=

using

PARAMETERS

MONIT

CPU ID

When

the

MONITOR

RS-232C=INACTIVE

[Note] 1.

using

CRT

using

the PARAMETERS

two pages.

Up>

is necessary

MONITOR”

screen,

(a)

or
To switch

from

FOR ONLINE the current

page

MONITOR to another

Down > key.

the parameter

screen.

- 193-

is set on the “PARAMETERS

FOR

4. OPERATION

4.6.2.3

Modifying parameters

Some of the parameters can be modified by the cursor on screen moved by the cursor keys, and some of them can modified by entering number or characters with the cursor on them. [INIT] Soft key [INIT] initializes all these parameters to the default value. have to modify any initial parameters,

however,

In most case, you don’t

you should confirm the ‘CHANNEL”

and

“BAUD RATE” parameters at least.

[Note] 1. The parameters “CHANNEL”,

“BAUD

RATE”,

“PARITY”

and “STOP

BIT”

must

correspond with the parameters used by On-Line Function of FAPT LADDER, which can be set at “Parameter” parameters

dialog box of “Communication”

are independent

of the parameters

dialog hoc.

And these

used in [L’OJ screen which can be

changed on [SPEED] screen. 2.

A modified

parameter

operating.

After

becomes

modifying

valid when the on-line

a parameter,

specify

parameter to stop the on-line monitor driver.

monitor driver next starts

NOT

USE for

the

RS-232C

Then, restore the setting to USE.

This

operation validates the modified parameter.

4.6.2.4

Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function

When using the on-line function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the on-line monitor driver that provides the communication parameter on the parameter monitor

driver.

Setting

function

screen of the on-line

USE for the parameter

of the PMC.

monitor controls starts the on-line

The setting of the RS232C the operation monitor

of the on-line

driver.

occupies the line specified in the CHANNEL parameter and enters the wait state.

The driver

In this state, the

PMC and personal computer can be connected. When the on-line monitor driver starts, the status indication

at the bottom of the screen changes

from INACTIVE TO STAND-BY. RS232C = INACTIVE

: 0

1 RS-232C = STAND-BY Conversely,

setting the RS232C

: 21 parameter to NOT USE stops the on-line monitor driver.

state, the PMC cannot be connected use the RS232C

to the personal computer.

Another input/output

line connected to that channel only after termination

Once the on-line monitor driver stops, the status indication is set to NOT USE while the PMC is connected

to the personal

STOPPING is displayed as the status. The following statuses can be displayed:

- 194-

function

can

of the on-line monitor driver.

changes to INACTIVE.

driver stops as soon as the personal computer is disconnected.

In this

computer,

If the parameter

the on-line

While disconnection

monitor

is pending,

4. OPERATION

Status of the on-line

Status indication The on-line

INACTIVE

The on-line

STOPPIMG

computer

monitor

monitor

driver

is not operating.

monitor

driver

is waiting

for the personal

to be disconnected.

STARTING

Start processing

STAND-BY

The on-line

monitor

driver

is operating.

The on-line

monitor

driver

is connected

CONNECTED

driver

for the on-line

monitor

driver

is in progress.

to the personal

computer. NO OPTION

The reader/punch

TIMEOUT

The connection

was lost because

The connection

terminated

ERROR

DISCONNECTED

interface

function

is not supported. of a time-out

normally.

(Same

error. status as

STAND-BY) NO CONNECTION

The cable

is not connected.

[EMG ST] Pressing

the

whether

]EMG

ST]

the connection

terminated

[Note] 1.

normally

driver

on-line

monitor

cannot

monitor

[I’O],

[EDIT],

the

monitor

this key

if the

driver

irrespective

connection

of

cannot

be

condrtions.

of the on-line

the CNC

line while

monitor

is subsequently

it is operating.

driver, turned

the on-line on.

In this state,

The other

use the line.

driver

is operating,

the following

functions

cannot

be used:

[SYSPRM].

Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function (Only for Power Mate-H)

4.6.2.5

When using the on-line that provides

It is necessary

monitor

function

the communication

to set either

of the following

Parameter

screen

Parameter

“RS-232-C”

[Note]

for on-line

The CRT/MD1 ONLINE

monitor

(“PARAMETERS

USE”

is necessary

a personal

of the PMC.

computer

to the PMC, first start the

When starting

or stopping

FOR ONLINE

MONITOR”)

the driver,

parameters.

= “USE”

MONITOR”

Bit 6 of parameter

to connect function

“NOT

l

when

occupies

functions

While the on-line

Use

parameter

automatically

driver

the on-line

communication

as the control

starts

stops

established.

of abnormal

If USE is specified monitor

[PMCLAD],

l

is currently

because

inputioutput 2.

driver

soft key immediately

:

On-line

monitor

driver

is used.

:

On-line

monitor

driver

is not used.

when

the parameter

screen.

No. 0101 in the Power

Mate-H

is set on the “PARAMETERS

FOR

4. OPERATION

#7

#5

#4

#6 = 0 : On-line

monitor

driver

is not used.

1 : On-line

monitor

driver

is used.

When either

of the following

0

Parameter

l

Bit 6 of parameter

[Note] 1.

2.

conditions

“RS-232-C”

The on-line

consists,

#3

the driver

#2

monitor

in the Power

driver

occupies

Mate-H

is “1”

the line while it is operating.

functions

cannot

If other

use

line,

input/output

functions

parameter

While the on-line [PMCLADJ,

l

[EDIT],

#6

is “USE”.

No. 0101

l

#f

is started.

In this state, other input/output

mentioned

4.6.3

#6

monitor

[l/O),

[SYSTEM

the

and stop the on-line driver

[EDIT],

it is necessary

monitor

is operating,

and [SYSPRM]

PARAM],

use the line.

the following functions

and (I/O] functions

to display

the

above-

driver. functions

cannot

be used.

on CRT/MDI.

on DPLIMDI.

File

4.6.3.1

File save

A program

modified

“File save”

function.

(1) Menu

with online

editor

or transferred

program”

dialog

box, pull down

from

PMC will be lost unless

executing

this

position

To activate

‘Save

[ 1, File] menu,

menu.

Il.

File

1

Fiie

,s& .... ... Off-Line

Function

Exit Fig. 4.6.3.1

-196-

(a)

and select

[File save]

on the

4. OPERATION

(2) diaglog box view

Program

name I

C: Y DATA%

c

SAMPLE

Close diaglog

Save program

Source program name saved, is displayed.

to be

box

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(b)

(3) Operation

(a) Pressing @

the [OK] button

When specifying The program

@I When specifying A dialog

a new program

is saved

an existing

box, shown

be overwritten

name

and the dialog

below,

appears,

program prompting

box closes.

name the operator

to specify

whether

the program

as follows:

[OK]

:

The program

is overwritten.

[CANCEL]

:

The program

is not overwritten.

Overwrite

The dialog

this program

Fig. 4.6.3.1

- 197-

(c)

?

box appears

again.

is to

4.

0

When

the contents

[UPDATE] The

of an edited

program

have not been

on the on-line edit function (See Section 4.6.4.1,

“File save”

operation

becomes

invalid.

preserved

OPERATION

by selecting

F7

“Ladder monitor.“)

A dialog box appears,

as shown below.

Press the < Enter > or -z Esc > key to close the dialog box.

IN.E‘-

3158

Ladder

diagram

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(b) Pressing the [CANCEL]

has

modified.

been

I

(d)

button

The specified file is not saved, and the dialog box closes.

Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function

4.6.3.2 The Off-Line

function can be selected

from the On-Line

function.

For details,

see “4.5 Off-Line

Function”.

(1) Menu

positlon

To use “Off-Line

Function”,

pull down [I.

File] menu,

menu.

4.6.3.3

Exit

This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

(1)

Menu

position

Pull down [ 1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

1.

File File

save

Off-Line

Function

Exit Fig. 4.6.3.3

- 198-

(a)

and select

[Off-Line

Function] on the

4. OPERATION

(2) Dialog

box view

Are

you

sure

you

want

Fig. 4.6.3.3

to

exit

?

(b)

(3) Operation (a) Push [OK] button. Online function ends lnitfal Menu appears. For details, see Section (4.6.4.1

When

modifications

made

“Ladder Monitor”)

with online editor have not yet saved

by executing

“File

save” operation, the following dialog box appears.

fl

Source program name to be I

I’

Save

changes

saved, is displayed.

? pq

Fig. 4.6.3.3

[Yes] [No]

:

“File save” is executed

:

The modifications

and On-Line Function ends.

by on-line editor is canceled

ends. [Cancel]

:

(c)

Cancel to [Exit]

- 199-

and On-Line

Function

4.

0

When

there

[UPDATE] following

are on

any

the

dialog

modifications

online

editor.

which

have

not

“File

save”

operation

this

Fig. 4.6.3.3

:

[No]

:

preserved is canceled.

The modifications

been

Cancel

menu contains

by on-line

editor

is canceled

and On-Line

to [Exit].

the menu

Items as shown

below.

I

Lddder

Monitor

1

And

the

(d)

Diagnose

12. Diagnose]

cF7>

modified

ends.

4.6.4

by

box appears.

Ladder diagram has Sure to quit ?

[Yes]

been

OPERATION

PMC Status Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

for for for for for for for

“Ladder Monitor”/“Online Editor’ window “PMC Status” window “Signal status” window sub-menu of “PMC Parameter” windows “PMC alarm message” dialog box “RUNSTOP the ladder” dialog box “System Information” dialog box

-2oo-

Function

4.

1.

OPERATION

File

[Level

Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder

NET

00001-00006

DO I

L

ROOOO.O

DO

-IL SUB END1

1

SUB

2

END2

'SUB END

64

F7

FB

F9

SpLisl Search Symbol

+ s + F8 S-Se1

Fig. 4.6.4.1

- 202 -

(a)

FlO

Setinc

4.

(b) Ladder

monitor

The table below

function lists the operations

Moving

the cursor

selecting

(c)

performed

by the ladder

monitor

function.

to the

a subprogram

Symbol

Displaying the symbol or comment defined at a specified address

F9 : [Symbol]

(e)

Setting

Switching between ladder monitor and on-line editing, switching between symbol display and comment display

FlO : [Setting]

(f)

Selecting A ladder

a subprogram program

list existing

OPERATION

(F7 [SpList])

is monitored

subprograms

and edited

and to select

in units of subprograms.

the subprogram

- 203 -

This function

to be displayed.

is used to

4.

@I Subprogram

list display

OPERATION

screen

Pressing

F7 (SpList]

program

to be displayed

causes

a window

to be displayed,

by pressing

a cursor

key

as shown or the

below.

>

Select

the

then

the

key

c Enter > key.

[Note]

The on-line

monitoring

The subprogram

function

of a step sequence

of a step sequence

program

program

is not supported.

is not selected.

,list-

Sub*program

rJimLZ LEVEL2 PO0001

(OPEN RIGHT DOOR

)

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl

PO0002

(OPEN LEFT DOOR

)

MOVE

(GRIP WORK PIECE

)

PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND

)

SPOOOlO PO0011

(PUT WORK PIECE

PO0021

(CLOSE RIGHT

PO0022

(CLOSE LEFT DOOR

LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll

PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2

DOOR)

MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

)

Fig. 4.6.4.1

@

Display

(b)

information

The following

information

appears

on the subprogram

screen

LEVEL1 LEVEL2 -

Ladder (No mark)

PO0001

(OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl

PO0002

(OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll

_IpPOOOIO1

Step

PICK UP ~A WORK ON THE STAND

(GRIP "OR; PIECE)

Sequence

I

(S mark)

I

Symbol Sub-program

Coil comment

No. Fig. 4.6.4.1

(d) Searching

ii>

for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering

Searching A search

(c)

the search

data (
+ )

>

for data (F8 [SEARCH]) for a net starts

when

the

< FB>

key is pressed

after

the search

data

has

been entered. If the

< F8>

key is pressed

the data set specified A search

can be made

without

in (.a below, for several

specifying

“Entering types

- 204

any search

search

data”

data,

of data, as described

-

a search

(see (b)). below:

is made

for

4. OPERATION

@Address/symbol Searching

for an address:

“address”

Searching

for a symbol:

“symbol”

lFunctional

instruction

+ < F8> +

Example)

“X0000.0”

Example)

“SYMBOLI”

for a number:

Searching

for a name:

“S” + “functional-instruction-number”

“functional-instruction-name”

lNet number: Entering

“net-number”

data (< Shift >

search

Data for which a search be registered. function

+ < F8 > “Sl ” + < F8 >

is to be made search

the following

the cursor

+ < F8 >

+ < F8 >

Example)

“ENDI”

+ < F8 >

Example)

” IO” + < F8 >

+ < F8 >)

To repeatedly

is active,

To position

+ < F8 >

number/name

Searching

Example)

0

+ < F8 >

dialog

to another

by means for identical

of operation data,

described

above,

can

use this function.

0,

While

this

box appears.

item,

press the

c Tab > key.

To change

the setting,

press the < 7 > or < 1 > key.

;earch Data

:

. Data

xoooo.o]

Kind

.

ADDR/SYMBOL

@

WRT-COIL

@

FUNCTION

0

NET-NO

J

Fig. 4.6.4.1

.SEARCH

DATA

Enter the search

data:

(d)

address,

symbol,

instruction number .DATA

TYPE

Select

the type of the search

- 205 -

name, (number

data.

net number, functional only, without

functional instruction S)

4. OPERATION

(e)

Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL]) This function eF9>

displays

the symbol or comment

defined

at a specified

address.

When

is pressed, the following dialog box appears.

Address Symbol

[

Relay

I

[

Comment

1 1

[

Fig. 4.6.4.1

:

ADDRESS

Enter

the

(e)

address

of

the

symbol

or

comment

to

be

displayed. SYMBOL

:

The symbol at the specified address is appears.

:

RELAY COMMENT

. COIL COMMENT (f)

:

The relay comment The coil comment

at the specified address appears.

.

at the specified address appears.

Setting a function (FlO [SET]) This function includes the following:

. LADDER

Switching

MODE:

between

ladder

monitor

and

on-line

editing For details of the on-line edit function, see (2)

“On-

line editing” in this section.

. SYMBOL

& COMMENT

DISPLAY:Selecting

the

address

display

mode

in ladder

monitoring or on-line editing Three

types

of data

can

be displayed:

address,

symbol, and relay comment. FUNCTION

Selecting

PARAMETER:

functional

whether

the

instructions

parameters are

to

of be

displayed When the < FlO > key is pressed,

the dialog box shown below appears:

To move the cursor to another item, press the the < t > or < 1 > key.

- 206 -

key.

To change the setting, press

4.

Dpisplay

OPERATION

satking

- Ladder Mode @Ladder

-Symbol

Monitor

OOnline

6 Comment

Editor

Display

7

l Symbol (1 Address 0

Relay Comment

(3 Symbol 0

& Address

Relay Comment

(7 Relay Comment

& Address & Symbol

Fig.4.6.4.1(f)

(2) On-line editing To select the "OnlineEditor"screen, down menu.

select

then press F10 : [Setting).

[Ladder

The

monitor]

‘Display

setting”

from the 12.

dialog box, select [OnlIne Editor].

-Ladder

Mode

(1 Ladder Monitor

-Symbol

& Comment

@Online

Display

l Symbol 0

Address

(3 Relay Comment 0

Symbol

6 Address

(3 Relay Comment

6 Address

0

6 Symbol

Relay Comment

Fig. 4.6.4.1

- 207 -

(g)

Editor

-

Diagnose]

dialog box appears.

puffIn the

4. OPERATION

(b) On-line editing On-line editing operations (1)

modification c Delete 7, again

_ine deletion

” -”

number

+ cF6>

+
deletion

\let, line, element

nsertion

- 209 -

7

4.

On-line

editing

operations

(2)

ursor movemen

e cursor

the cursor

Symbol

Setting

3thers

up or

<4->,

to the left

current

nothing

0

See (l),

F9 : (Symbol]

Switching between ladder monitor and on-line editing, switching between symbol drsplay and comment display, etc.

FlO : [Setting]

Updating

F7 : [UPDATE]

(i) 0

< Shrft > + < F7 >

(i) @I

the ladder

“Ladder monitor.”

See (I), “Ladder monitor.”

program

the input mode

To change The

<+>

Displaying the symbol or comment defined at a specified address

Restortng the ladder program to the state existing prior to editing

(c) Changrng

OPERATION

the input mode on the edit screen, Input

is displayed,

mode

is displayed

it indicates

at the

that overwrite

use the following bottom mode

right

keys.

corner

is selected

of the

screen.

When

(default).

Insert mode Key

:

-c Insert Z

Function

:

When inserted

Cancel

~‘8 Delete Key

a contact

or coil is entered

at the cursor

:

Press the
:

< Delete >

in this mode,

posrtion.

> key in insert

mode

-210-

mode.

the contact

or coil is

4. OPERATION

:

Function

When the line connect position

:

Cancel

function

is used in this mode,

data at the cursor

is deleted.

Press the < Delete > key in delete

mode.

or coil. register

in the key input

(d) Input Contact/Coil To input a contact
the input element

line, then

press

the

> key.

The registered

element

is added

to the ladder

diagram.

The following

keys

are used for

this operation:

[Keys used for registration] 0

Set +

t-

Key

:

>

Function

:

Set

+

4

k

An addressed pressing

0

Set

is input to the key input line by entering

Key

:

+ < Fl >

Function

:

Set

Set

Function

:


/ I--

an address

and

at the input line.


> and < Fl > keys.

Set e

at the input line.

u


the

an address

and

an address

and

key.

+

Key

:

Function

:

Set


> + e

at the input line.

e

the
is input to the key input line by entering > and CF2>

keys.

-(S)-

Key

:

-z Shift > + < F3 >

Function

:

Set


G3 Set

and

U

:

6) Set

/ +

+

--I

the
Key

Set

an address

i t-

---I

pressing

0

at the input line.

the < Fl > key.

An addressed

0

t_

-(S)-

-(S)-

at the input line. is input to the key input lrne by entering

an address

and

the < F3 > key.

-(R)-

Key

:

< Shift > + < F3 >

Functron

:

Set

An addressed is pressing

the

-(R)-

-(Ft)-

at the input line. is input to the key input line by entering

< Shilt 7 and < F37

-2ll-

keys.

an address

and

Select

:

,

Function

:

Select

Contact/Coil

at the input line.

>

Contact/Coil

Change

address

in the

< Shift > + -Z TAB > changes and coils are displayed

input

to

the

forward

reverse. in the order

indicated

below:

only

Key

:

‘address’

Function

:

Change

+ < Enter > address

The contact

on ladder

diagram

or coil at the cursor

without

position

changing

input line.

is modified.

Key]

@

Input ContactCoil

Key

c Enter >

Function

Write ContactCoil

(e) Connect/delete

0

is set at input line to ladder

diagram.

Input ‘-’ Key

Function

Input horizontal

(2) Entering

line.

If In the delete

mode,

delete

Contact/Coil

Key

Function

A vertical

line.

ltne

mode,

IS entered

a vertical

to the right

of the

cursor

position.

line is deleted.

a net, line, or element

Inserting

or

“I”

delete

Inserting

which

line

horizontal

(1)

line

+

changes

The contacts

(f)

OPERATION

Contact/Coil

Key

direction.

[Input

4.

a net

Key

:

Function

:

inserts

+ Fl [Netlns] a single blank net after the net at the cursor

-212-

position.

In

4. OPERATION

0

Inserting

a lrne

Key

:

< Ctrl > + F2 (Lilns]

Function

:

Inserts

a single

blank

line

under

the

line

to which

the cursor

is

positioned.

0

Inserting

an element

Key

:

< Ctrl>

Function

:

Inserts a single blank element

+ F3 [Elmlns] at the cursor

position.

(g) Cut and paste function

CO Specifyrng

a range

Key

:

< Ctrl>

Function

:

Specifies means

+ F4 [Select] the range

of the following

i)

Position

ii)

Press the bottom

iii)

to be cut or copied.

Position Cutting

the cursor

right corner

The range

is specified

by

procedure: to the first net in the desired and

< F4 > keys.

range.

(SEL is displayed

.at the

of the screen.)

the cursor to the last net in the desired and copying

of a specified

net range

range. is explained

in @I

or @I below.

0

Cancel

:

Cutting

a net

Key

:

Function

:

Press the < Ctrl > and < F4 > keys in range

+ F5 [Cut]

Cuts a net. is cut.

mode.

The

When

a net range

cut

portion

is specified,

is saved

in the

the specified buffer

for

net range subsequent

pasting.

0

Copying

a net

Key

:

Function

:

Copies

+ F6 [Copy] a net into the buffer

range is specified,

GO Pasting

for subsequent

the specified

range

pasting.

When

a net

is copied.

a net

Key

:

cCtrl>

Function

:

Writes

+ F7 [Paste] a net that was previously

buffer.

-213-

cut or copied

and saved

into the

4. OPERATION

(h) Cursor 0

Move cursor

Up/Down

Key

:

,

Function

:

Up/Down press

r3

Move cursor

cursor,

When

< 4 > at the bottom

:

0

of the screen,

the screen

or

scrolls.

Function

:

Move

, <+> cursor

to the left/light. the cursor

When

pressing

< -+>

moves

one line below

At the top.bottom

0

< 1 > at the top of the screen

to Left/Right

Key

of the screen,

@

press

When pressing moves

< +>

to one line above

at the right

at the left end and right

end of the screen,

end.

the cursor

and left end.

of the screen,

the screen

scrolls.

Move to thww top of ladder Key

:

-z Home >

Function

:

Move cursor

Move cursor

to the bottom

of ladder

Key

:

Function

:

Move cursor

Previous

to the top of ladder

to the bottom

of ladder.

page

Key

:

< Page Up >

Functron

:

Go to the previous

Key

:

-c Page down >

Function

:

Go to the next page

Key

:

Function

:

Update

page.

@iI Next page

(i)

Others

6)

Note)

Update

When the [UPDATE] Before

executing

function lhrs

the modrfication

is used, the ladder

function,

check

whether

permitted.

-214-

to the ladder

program

diagram

on PMC.

on the PMC is modified.

modification

of the

ladder

program

is

4. OPERATION

@I Undo

Note)

:

< Shift > + < F7 >

Function

:

Restore

Applying

4.6.4.2 “PMC

Key

function

causes

diaggram

just before

the effects

of editrng

the last update

< F7 >

since the last update

to be lost.

PMC Status window

Status”

(1) Menu

the [Undo]

ladder

window

displays

the status of program

on PMC.

position

To activate

“PMC

Status”

window,

pull down

[2. Diagnose]

menu,

and select

[PMC

Status]

the menu

2. Diagnose d

Ladder Monitor ‘.

PMC Statue-

Signal Status PMC Parameters PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

(2) Window

+

view

!iEkq ***/** l

-Series/Edition -Series/Edition

*a**/**

PMC TYPE PMC-•*'* SCAN1 CUR MAX NIN

-Connected

Oms 7

PMC type

Current

Oms -Maximum Oms-Minimum

Date/Time oo/oo/oo oo:oo:oo

of PMC of ladder

scan time scan time scan time

-Month/Date/Year 7Hour:Minute:Second

Fig. 4.6.4.2

-215-

(a)

Editing

Card

on

4. OPERATION

4.6.4.3 Signal Status window “Signal

Status”

window

displays

the status

signal status of any PMC address,

(1) Menu

01 stgnals

on PMC in real time.

and you can also change

You can examine

position

To activate

“Signal

Status”

window,

pull down

[2. Diagnose]

menu,

and select

[signal

on the menu.

\/ Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Statue PMC Parameters PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

(2) Window When

the

the signal status on this window.

--f

view [SIGNAL

(a) Window

STATUS]

view without

is selected,

symbols

the window

shown

below

appears.

: Signal

Status

,.

. ‘...’ ,.,,.;.,

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

: 01 : 80 : 00 :lC : 00 :oo

,, ,,..,;, ;, ..,,, ,,, ROOOOO ROOOOl R00002 R00003 R00004 R00005 R00006 R00007 R00008 R00009

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Fig. 4.6.4.3

(a)

-216-

:

AA

: 55 : 00 : 00

Status]

4.

(b) Window

view with symbols

OPERATION

:

Cursor

,-&WORK1 0

t 0

0

0

0

0

-OFF0

-ONf.

ROOOOl

f'

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

R00002 TOOL1 R00003

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

R00004

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

PMC Address

Hexadecimal

expression

Byte symbol Fig. 4.6.4.3 (c)

Function

(b)

keys:

F4

F8 Search

Symbol or

FlO Wrt On or

Fig. 4.6.4.3

(c)

(3) Operations

Basic operation

Function

Cursor keys

Move cursor.

c Page up >: < Page down >

Move address

Skip to next/previous

>!<

Shaft > +
c Enter >

kind of address.

Alternate signal status. key turns the signal status ON whrch was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. c Enter > key is effective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

[ Symbol]:[Adress) ‘address’

>

area on window.

< F4 >

+ [Search] < F8 >

[Wrt On];[WrtOff]

cFlO>

Display/Hide Search

symbols.

address

(‘address’

can be symbol).

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlock.

-217-

4. OPERATION

(Warning)

Signal

status

extreme

changes

care.

status

changes

results

on a control

serious

and unforeseen

applies,

if they are improperly

used with people

(Note)

and PMC parameter

Signal

used.

changes

should

PMC

parameter

and

system,

always

be made

changes

and on the process

It is recommended

that these

with

can

have

to which

functions

it

not be

near the equipment.

Attempts

to change

sequence

programs,

some

signal

the CNC,

statuses

MMC,

repeatedly,

the signal status cannot

addresses,

the MMC to M addresses,

may

fail.

l/O Link and other

be changed.

At an external

address

to

which

l/O devices

write

(The CNC repeatedly

and external

110 devices

writes

to F

to X addresses.)

(4) Message

Meaning

Message Sure to modify

You tried to change attempt is intended, cancel change.

?

and countermeasure

signal status although write-protected. If the answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter “PMC

Parameter”

sub-menu

0

Timer window

@

Counter

0

Keep relay window

6I

Data table control Data table window

Parameter]

of the menu items

for the windows

below.

window

6)

To display

consists

window

the “Parameter”

submenu,

display

the [2. Diagrose]

pull-down

menu,

then select

[PMC

from the menu.

The submenu

can be displayed

by pressing

the

< + > or < +>

key with the cursor

positioned

[ PMC Parameter]. !.

Diagnose

J

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC Parati&ei PMC alarm status

e

Tf@rl

.,

”

Counter

RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

-218-

Keep Data Data

relay table table

control

.“.‘...‘.

I

to

4. OPERATION

(Warning)

When

changing

the function the

machine

present

(Note)

a signal

status

for modifying may

or PMC parameter,

act unpredictably.

Avoid

For the detail,

“Timer”

care

using

the

is necessary.

is applied

function

If

incorrectly,

if personnel

are

near the machine.

If you can not write PMC parameter,

(1) Timer

extreme

the signal status or PMC parameter

please

it might

refer PMC programing

be protected. manual.

window window

displays

the contents

of PMC Timer

of PMC “Timer”

address,


address.

You can examine

the values

for TMR instruction.

the contents

(a) Menu posrtion To active

“Timer”

the menu.

Then

window,

pull down

sub-menu

appears

[2. Diagnose] which

contains

menu, item

and select [Timer]

[PMC

which

Parameter]

activates

window.

12.

d

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Sicinal Status ‘i*Timet: “. PM; Eiara,,tert' PMC alarm status Counter RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay System Information Data table control Data table

J

(b) Window 0

1

Diagnose

view

Window

view without

symbols:

Ti er 1.

TOO000

2. 3.

6000’00

:

.: . .. ,.: ,.:..,

11.

TO0020

0

TO0002

0 ~ 12.

TO0022

0

TO0004

0

13.

TO0024

0

4.

TO0006

0

14.

TO0026

0

5.

TO0008

0

15.

TO0028

0

6.

TOO010

0

16.

TO0030

0

7.

TO0012

0

17.

TO0032

0

8.

TO0014

0

18.

TO0034

0

9.

TO0016

1000

19.

TO0036

0

10.

TO0018

0 120.

TO0038

0

Fig. 4.6.4.4

-219-

(a)

,. I

on

“Timer”

4.

@

OPERATION

Window view with symbols:

ker

*1.

T%OOOO

600000

.

:

6.

TOO010

0

2.

TO0002

0

7.

TO0012

0

3.

TO0004

0

8.

TO0014

0

ONE SECOND TO0016 1000

4.

TO0006

0

9.

5.

TO0008

0

10.

TO0018

0

Byte symbol PMC Address Fig. 4.6.4.4 0

Function

(b)

keys:

F4 Symbol

F8 Search

ii

FlO Wrt On

or

or

F4

FlO WrtOff

Adress 1---T-

II Fig. 4.6.4.4

(c)

(c) Operations The following

table lists the operations

supported

Basic operation Cursor

keys

by the [TIMER]

window.

Function Move cursor.

c Page up >, -z Page down >

Move address

‘number’

>

Change timer value. Enter new timer value in milli-seconds. You can enter new value only when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid timer values are : O-3,145.680 ms for timer No. l-8 o-523.280 ms for timer No. 9-150

< F4 >

Display/Hide

+
[SymbolJ/[Adress]

area on window.

symbols.

- 220 -

4.

OPERATION

I

I

I

Basrc operation ‘address’

+ [Search] < F8 >

‘number’

+ [Search]

[Wrt On)/[WrtOff]

Function Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D. at the “Timer” window. When C, K or D address is specified to search, “Timer” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.

ISearch

< F8 >

timer address

by timer number.

I

Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor IS yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

< FlO >

(d) Message

Meaning


(2)

Counter “Counter” contents

and countermeasure

You tried to change timer value although If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. [No] to cancel change.

?

write-protected. Otherwise, answer

window window

displays

of PMC Counter

the

contents

of PMC

Counter

address,


window,

pull down

address.

You

the values

can

examine

the

for CTR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion To actrvate

‘Counter”

on the menu. “Counter”

Then

sub-menu

12. Diagnose]

appears

whrch

menu,

contains

and select

item

[Counter]

window.

!.

Diagnose

I

r/ Ladder Monitor PMC Status Sianal Status

3

P&K ‘Parameteif PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

-221-

Timer Cotinter Keep relay Data table Data table

control

[PMC Parameter] which

activates

4.

(b) Window When 0

view [COUNTER]

Window

is selected,

view without

the following

window

uppears.

:

symbols

+ati 141: .,., ;..,.,.:;.;.:’ .... :.::.; ....

., ....

‘.

No.

Address

1.

Preset/Current

cooooo coooo4 COO008 coo012 COO016 c00020 COO024 COO028 COO032 COO036

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10.

Window

.

..

,.,

@

OPERATION

,.: ..

No. Address

lOta/ 256/

347 129

O/ o/ O/ O/ O/ 36/ O/ o/

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Fig. 4.6.4.4

(d)

.

,.,.

.:’

:.

..

Preset/Current

o/ o/ o/ o/ o/ o/

c00040 coo044 COO048 COO052 COO056 COO060 COO064 COO068 c00070 COO076

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

o/

o/ o/ o/

view with symbols:

7

Cursor

n ;eic

”

No.

WORK COUNTER lOOO/

pzY_, cooooo

I

:;:

,:

:

Address

2.

:.:: :_.::,_;

,:.:,;

::

6.

c00020

O/

0

2.

coooo4

256/

129

7.

TO0024

O/

0

3.

COO008

O/

0

8.

COO028

36/

0

4.

coo012

O/

0

9.

COO032

O/

0

5.

COO016

10.

COO036

O/

0

J_

Symbol

l

Counter

number

and Address

Current counter Preset counter

..,

Preset/Current

347

Fig. 4.6.4.4

@I Functton

.Y:

value value

(e)

keys :

F4 Symbol

F8 Search

FIO Wrt On or

or

Fig. 4.6.4.4

-222-

(e)

4.

OPERATION

(c) Operations The table below

lists the operations

supported

by the [COUNTER]

Function

Basrc operatron Cursor

window.

Move cursor.

keys

< Page up > I c Page down >

Move address

‘number’

Change timer value. You can enter new value write-protection is unlocked. The valid counter values are : O-65,535 for binary counter O-9,999 for BCD counter

+ c Enter >

(Symbol]/(Adress]

Display/Hide

< F4 >

area on window. only when the

symbols.

‘address’

+ (Search]

< F8 >

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Counter” window. When T, K or D address is specified to search, “Counter” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the ’ address at top of window.

‘number’

+ [Search]

< F8 >

Search

[Wrt On][WrtOff]

counter

address

by timer number.

Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

< FlO >

(d) Message

Meaning

and countermeasure

You tried to change counter value although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window “Keep

relay”

window

displays

the status

signal status of PMC Keep relay address,

of PMC

Keep

relay

address.


You can examine

the

the status of Keep relays.

(4 Menu position To

activate

Parameter] activates

“Keep

relay”

on the menu.

window, Then

pull

sub-menu

down

(2.

appears

Diagnose] which

contains

menu,

item [Keep

“Keep relay” window. !.

Diagnose

/

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC Paramtrtojt PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

-+

- 223 -

Timer Counter Kaf3p relay Data table Data table

and

control

select relay]

(PMC which

4.

(b) Window

view

~Address

7

I.+c

,.

I

F

OPERATION

Cursor

_IL

.. ..

1

Keep .: 1 Y.

,.,

KOOOOO

‘0

0

0

0

0

@l&y

:...:: .:I..

KOOOlO

.,.

:

0

,,

0

0

0

..

0

::

.,

.:I,

0

..i.,..

:.. .,.

:

,.

0

.’ ,j

0

KOOOOl

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

KOOOll

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00002

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00012

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00003

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00013

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00004

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00014

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

KOO005

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00015

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00006

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00016

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00007

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00017

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00008

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00018

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00009

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

K00019

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (g)

Keys :

@I Function

F8 Search

Fig. 4.6.4.4

FlO Wrt On

(h)

(c) Operations

Basic operatron Cursor

keys

Functron Move cursor.

< Page up > i < Page down >

Move address

< Enter >

Alternate slgnal status. key turns the signal status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. key is effective only when the write-protection is unlocked.

‘address’

+ [Search]

[Wrt On]i[WrtOff]

< F8 >

< FlO>

area on window.

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the “Keep relay” window. When T, C or D address is specified to search, “Keep relay” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

- 224 -

4. OPERATION

(d) Message


Meaning You tried to change attempt is intended, cancel change.

7

(e) Data for PMC control

signal status although write-protected. If the answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

software

Some keep relay data are used by PMC control In this

manual,

and countermeasure

the

addresses

related

to

software.

the

operation

of

the

On-line

function

are

described. For the detail,

please

(The addresses PMC control

marked

I*’ do not effect

manual.

the operation

of the On-line

function

but used by

software.)

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

DTBLDSP

*

*

MEMINP

+

#7

DTBLDSP

1

: Can not display

#4

MEMINP

0

: Can not change

signal status.

#l

PRGRAM

0

: Can not activate

On-line

#O

LADMASK

1 : Can not display

data table control

Ladder

Editing

#2

#l

#O

l

PRGRAM

LADMASK

data in PMC parameter.

and the functions

in I/O menu.

monitor.

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#l

#O

*

*

*

*

*

l

*

FROM-WRT

1

FROM-WRT

#O (4)

refer PMC programming

: Displaying

F-ROM

write dialog

box when exiting

On-line

editing.

Data table control window “Data

table

address.

control”

window

You can examine

displays

the

the Data group

informations attributes.

of Data

groups

for PMC


Data

table

the attributes

on this window.

(a) Menu position To activate

“Data

Parameter]

on the

control]

table control” menu.

which activates

“Data

window,

Then

pull down

sub-menu

table control”

-225-

(2. Diagnose]

appears window.

which

menu, contains

and select item

(Data

(PMC table

4.

d

OPERATION

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status Timer Counter Keep relay Dhta table control"~. ::' Data table

PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

(b) Window view 0 Window view with symbols

: Cursor

tabLe control.

D&ta JO.

Start address

Number +

1. DATA-TABLE-TOP

8000

,‘. : ....... .:..: ‘.

5

Type

Format

Protection

byte

Hex

on

2. DO0050

10

word

Dee

off

3. TOOL-TABLE

20

word

Dee

off

100

byte

Dee

off

word

BCD

0

4. DO0200 5. BCD-CONV-TABLE

Data size

Start address: symbol of the group Number

number

I

Data format

Write-protection

of element

Fig. 4.6.4.4

(?,I Function

f:f

I

I

Data group

.

(i)

keys:

F4 Symbol

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On or FlO WrtOff

-226-

4. OPERATION

(c) Operations The table below

lists the operations

the data table control

Cursor

display

supported

keys

I Move cursor.

‘D-address’

‘number’

+ c Enter >

+ < Enter >

Move address

area on window

Change “Start address” with the cursor on the item. You can enter new address only when the write-protection is unlocked. You can omit the leading character ‘D’ of the address. Change “Number” with the cursor on the item. You can enter new number only when the write-protection is unlocked. “Format” and “Protection” with the cursor on Change “Type”, the item. When the cursor is on “Type” or “Format”, small dialog box is displayed to choose the item. You can change them only when the write-protection is unlocked.

< Enter >

Table of the data table control

display

(2).

Function

Basic operatron [New]

Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data group on the cursor. A hundred data groups can be created at most.

[Delete]

c F2 >

[G.Data]

< F3>

[ Symbol]‘[

Table

Function

I__

I

window.

(1).

Basic operation

< Page up > i < Page down >

by the Data table control

Adress]

Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot delete groups because one data group must exist at least. Switch to “Data table” was on is displayed. < F4 z=

Display/Hide

window.

The data group

all the data

which the cursor

symbols.

‘address’

+ [Search I< F8 >

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data table control” window. When T, C, K or D address is specified to search, “Data table control” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.

‘number”

+ [Search] < F8 >

Search

(Wrt On]/[WrtOtf]

< F10 >

data group

by data group

number.

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

-227-

of

4. OPERATION

(d) Messages


(5)

Data “Data

?

table

You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer (No] to cancel change.

window

defined

displays

the contents

by Data table control

you can also change

(a)

and countermeasure

window

table”

groups

Meaning

the values

data.

of PMC

Data

table

You can examine

address

the contents

according

to Data

of Data table,

and

of Data table on this window.

Menu position To

activate

“Data

Parameter] activates

table”

on the menu. “Data

table”

window,

pull

Then sub-menu

down

(2.

appears

Diagnose] which

menu,

contains

item

and [Data

select

[PMC

table]

which

window.

2. Diagnose d

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Siqnal Status Timer Counter

PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

(b) Window When @

Keep relay Data table control t)atii:tdbl(i:

view [Data table]

Window

is selected.

view without

the following

symbols

window

appears

: Data table

Group

1 : DO0000

DO0000 DO0001 DO0002 DO0003 DO0004 DO0005 DO0006 DO0007 DO0008 DO0009

- 007999, F6 FF EC FF D8 FF BO FF 60 FF

8000 bytes.

hexadecimal,

DO0010 DO0011 DO0012 DO0013 DO0014 DO001

co FE 80 FD 00

5

DO0016 DO0017 DO0018 DO0019 Frg. 4.6.4.4(k)

- 228 -

1

..

FB 00 F6 00 EC

protected

DO0020 DO0021 DO0022 DO0023 DO0024 DO0025 DO0026 DO0027 DO0028 DO0029

00 D8 00 BO 00 00 BO 00 00 00

4. OPERATION

Data group

information:

1 : DOOOO- D07999,

Group

8000 bytes,

Data

I

Window

format T

t

I Data group

view with symbols

Data group

Write-protection

Number of element and data size

number

rotected

t

t Area of Data group

@

hexadecimal,

:

rnformation -Data

~Groupl:DOOOOO

- D07999,

DATA-TABLE-TOP -DO0000 .:.. F6

table.

.,”

:’

8000 bytes, hexadecimal,

protected

DO0005

FF

DO0010

co

A

-

DO0001

FF

DO0006

BO

DO0011

FE

DO0002

EC

DO0007

FF

DO0012

80

DO0003

FF

DO0008

60

DO0013

FD

DO0004

D8

DO0009

FF

DO0014

00

I

Symbol

-

Cursor

Address Fig. 4.6.4.4 @

Function

(I)

keys:

F3 C.Data

F4

F8 Search

Symbol or

FlO Wrt On or

T-1 F4 Adress

Ftg. 4.6.4.4 (m)

- 229 -

4. OPERATION

(c) Operations The following Operations

table lists the operations supported

by [DATA

supported

TABLE]

by the [DATA

window

Function

Basic operation Cursor keys

Move cursor.

-z Page up > J< Page down >

Move address

Skip to next/previous

s/c

TABLE1 window.

Shift > + c TAB >

area on window. data group.

‘number’

+ < Enter >

Change data value. You can enter new value only when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid data values are : For details of the values that can be input, see the table of input data values below.

(CData]

< F3 >

Switch to “Data table control” window. The displayed data group is displayed at top of the window.

[Symbol)/[Adress)

Dtsplay/Hide

< F4 >

symbols.

‘address’

+ [Search]

< F8 >

Search address (‘address’ can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the “Data table” window. When T, C or K address is specified to search, “Data table” window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.

‘number’

+ [Search]

< F8 >

Search

[Wrt On]/(WrtOff]

data group

by data group number.

Unlock write-protectionGte-protect. When the protection is eflective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

< FlO >

Data table byte

I Decimal

I

-128 -127

BCD

word -32,768

-32,767

0 - 99

0 - 9,999

00 - FF

0000 - FFFF

double-word

(dword)

- 2,147,483,647

-2.147,483,648 0 00000000

-

-

99,999,999 FFFFFFFF

(d) Messages


?

Meaning

and countermeasure

You tned to change data table value although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer (No] to cancel change.

- 230 -

4.

4.6.4.5

PMC alarm status

The “PMC

ALARM

(1) Menu

position

To activate

MESSAGE”

“PMC

alarm status]

dialog

alarm message”

box displays

dialog

a PMC alarm message.

box, pull down

[2. Diagnose]

menu,

and select

on the menu.

d

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC Parameter

-_)

Information

System

(2) Window

OPERATION

view

When [PMC alarm status]

is selected,

the following

dialog

box appears.

ALARM NOTHING

Fig. 4.6.4.5

(a)

(3) Operation Press

c Enter >,

< space > or < . > key to close

“PMC

alarm message”

dialog

box.

(4) Messages The alarm messages See the manual For details “FANUC NB/NB2

same as PMC’s

are displayed

in this window.

of PMC for detail of the messages.

of messages, PMC

refer to the following

MODEL

manual:

PAliPAB/RAlIRA2’RA3/RBIRB2/RB3IRB4/RB5/RB6iRC/RC3/RC4~

Ladder Language

Programming

Manual”

(B-61 863E)

-231

-

[PMC

4. OPERATION

4.6.4.6 The

Executing or stopping a ladder program

ladder

execulron

status

can

be changed

from

“RUNNING”

to “STOP”

or from

“STOP”

to

“RUNNING”.

(1) Displaying To display then select

the dialog box the IRUNSTOP [RUNSTOP

the ladder]

the ladder]

dialog

box, display

the 12.

Diagnose]

from the menu.

2. Diagnose 4

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status -3 PMC Parameter PMC alarm status : ?.g?JNpJ*iiop..f& ::‘&$&&$f System

(2)

Displaying

the dialog box

When [RUN/STOP the ladder]

(a) Ladder

Information

running

While a ladder

is selected,

the dialog

box shown

below

appears.

state program

is being executed,

the following

Frg. 4.6.4.6

[YES]

: Stop the ladder program.

[NO]

: Closes the dialog box without

box appears.

(a)

stopping

- 232 -

dialog

the ladder

program.

pull-down

menu,

4. OPERATION

(b) Ladder stop state While a ladder program is in the stop state, the following dialog box appears.

RUN the ladder program

Fig. 4.6.4.6

?

(b)

[YES]

:

[NO]

: Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder program

(Warning)

Executes

When

the ladder program.

executing

or stopping a ladder program,

special

care

is necessary,

If a

program is applied incorrectly, the machine may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the machine.

4.6.4.7

Displaying System Information

The system software information such as specifications,

(1)

Menu

version, and etc can be referred

position

To display [System

“System

Information]

Information”

dialog

box, pull down

12.

Dragnose]

menu,

on the menu.

2. Diagnose Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Xnformation

(2)

Displaying

dialog

When [System

box

lnformatton] is selected,

Press -Z Enter >,

the following dialog box appears.

< Space > or <. > key to close “System Information” dialog box

System

Information

FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 Version 01.2 96.01.09 Copyright(C) 1995. FANUC LTD Frg. 4.6.4.7

- 233 -

(a)

and select

4. OPERATION

4.6.5

Input/Output

The 13. I/O] menu

provides

the following

options:

1. For the [LOAD FROM PMC] dialog box 2. For the [STORE IN PMC] dialog box 3. For the [WRITE F-ROM] dialog box

(Note 1)

In case

of operating

using input/output There

When

screens

of NC (Position,

etc.)

might

slow

when

(Load from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.).

in the operation

of NC.

It is recommended

to using

input/output

made

by C language

It is recommended

(Posrtion,

executor

to use

is displayed,

input/output

the communication

functions

after

moving

speed to other

etc.).

Loading from the PMC

4.651 A program

when,

display

while NC is not operating.

screen

decreases.

“LOAD

functions

is no problem

functions

(Note 2)

NC, the screen

held on the PMC can be transferred

FROM PMC” for example.

(1) Menu

IS used to transfer

using the program

to the personal

a ladder

program

with the on-line

computer.

from the PMC to the personal

computer

function.

position

To dtsplay select (Load

the “LOAD

FROM

PMC”

dialog

box,

from PMC] from the menu.

- 234 -

display

the

13.

l/O]

pull-down

menu,

then

4. OPERATION

(2)

Displaying

the dialog

Selecting

ILoad

box

from PMCI causes

the following

dialog

box to appear.

“‘..’ .:,l:‘.:j.. from’ pMc ,.,......./. .:....‘.&, .,.....( y,,::...:: ..::..: ... .::.. ,\....:,.

LOad

- Transfer .

data

type

LADDER

0

ALL 100% 1

0% I

.‘.

j

_r”^’

Programs izeindicator

Abort loading Execute

Close dialog

loading

Fig. 4.6.5.1

box

(a)

(3) Operation Select

a desired

Once the program

button

by pressing

has been loaded

Storing

A program

held by the personal

“Store

enable,

to PMC”

for example,

Menu

the dialog

box closes

automatically.

computer

to transfer

a ladder

the use of the program

is transferred program

to the PMC. from

with the on-line

the

personal

computer

to the

PMC

to

function.

position

To display [Store

normally,

to the PMC

4.6.5.2

Use

the key, then press the < Enter > key.

the “Store

to PMC”

dialog

box,

display

to PMC] from the menu.

-235-

the 13.

l/O]

pull-down

menu,

then

select

4. OPERATION

(2) Displaying Selecting

the dialog box

(Store

to PMCI causes

the following

stag*

tQ

dialog

p#fc ‘. ;.

.::: .,:.: :: :

,..I

: ,.

-Transfer

data

box to appear.

:.j.

..

.,

type

0 LADDER

0 ALL

0%

100% f---

I Execute

Aborl

Load program

size indicator

storing

I Close dialog

storing

Fig. 4.6.5.2

box

(a)

(3) Operation Select a desired button by pressing the key, then press the c Enter > key. Once the program

(Note)

has been stored

While

“Online

enable

storing

Edrtor”

program

is written

to F-ROM,

Writing to F-ROM

The results

of editrng

The results

by the on-ltne

of rnodificatron

tf the CNC is turned results

to “Ladder

the

to the CNC, therefore,

results

made

are written

using

the results

- 236 -

be stored

is stored

of editing

PMC.

To

to the PMC but before

the

will

to the

be lost.

(see Section

Editor”,

are written

“Store

When

storing

a

4.6.5.3).

to flash ROM (F-ROM)

“Online

to the CNC. write them to F-ROM.

cannot

automatically.

Monitor”.

program

write it to F-ROM

function

off before

box closes

a program

off after an edited

4.653

(Note)

the dialog

is in progress,

to the PMC, move

If the CNC is turned program

normally,

in the PMC.

to PMC”,

to F-ROM.

etc. will be lost

To store

the modified

4. OPERATION

(1) Menu

position

To display the “Write

to

select

from the menu.

[F-ROM

Write]

Flash

ROM”

dialog

box, display

the 13.

I/O] pull-down

menu,

then

rri

(2)

Displaying

the dialog

Selecting [F-ROM

box

Write1 causes

the following

dialog

box to appear.

Write.to Flaeh R&l. Are

you sure you want Flash ROM ?

to write

:

:

.. . .c. “..”

to

IExec/ICancel]

Close dialog t

I Execute Fig. 4.6.5.3

box

write

(a)

(3) Operation

(1) Push [Exec]

button.

Start to write this dialog @

Cg, Select

(Note)

program

to Flash

ROM and “Executing”

message

is displayed

on

box.

When writing dialog

sequence

to Flash ROM is completed,

“Normal

Complete”

message

is displayed

on this

box. [Cancel]

or Press

The CNC must be placed

< ESC > and this dialog

box is closed.

tn the state of emergency

-237-

stop when writing

to Flash ROM.

4. OPERATION

4.6.6

Communication

This function establishes PMC.

or disconnects

a communication

link between

The on-line function can be used only while a communication

the personal computer and PMC. the communication Selecting

a personal computer

and

link is established

between

Before attempting to use the on-line function, therefore,

establish

link.

[ON-LINE

FUNCTION]

causes the communication

or [ON-LINE

link to be established

(SELECTED

PROGRAM)]

automatically.

from the initial menu

(See Section 4.6.1.2,

“Starting the

on-line function.“)

(1)

Menu

position

To display the “Communication” then select [Communication]

(2) Displaying

the dialog

dialog box, display the 14.

pull-down

menu,

box

(a) Displaying the “Communication” Selecting

Communication]

from the menu.

[Communication]

dialog box

causes the following dialog box to appear:

Communication

communication

Fig. 4.6.6 (a)

(b)

Displaying the “PARAMETER” Selecting

[Param]

dialog box

from the “Communication”

dialog box causes

another

dialog box to

appear as shown below. Press the
key to select the desired parameter,

a cursor key.

-238-

then set that parameter

by pressing

4. OPERATION

c

-

Parity

l

None

-Stop

(3 Odd

l

bit

2 bit

m

t

Close dialog

Close dialog

box

-

Baud rate (Choose one of parameters)

-

Parity bit

-

Stop bit

I

T-_rl’

t

Serial port (Choose channel)

T

(.) Even

bit

01

-

box canceling

modifications

Fig. 4.6.6 (b)

(Note 1)

If the communication

link cannot

be established

successfully,

check

the following

points: 0

Is the

RS232C

cable

securely

connected

to both

the personal

compuler

and

CNC? e/i, RS-232C

cable:

. Is the cable an On-Line

cable?

(See Appendix

8.)

Is the cable free of damage? (3

Communication

parameters

Do FAPT LADDER

and PMC have identical

If the communication been corrected,

(Note 2)

Do

not

attempt

communrcatron

(baud rate, parity,

link cannot

set

communication

be established

turn off then restart to

slop bit) of the on-line

communication

even

the personal

function:

parameters?

after these

problems

have

disconnecting

the

computer.

parameters

until

after

link.

Do not termrnate

the on-line

function

untrl after

drsconnecting

the communication

until after disconnecting

the communication

link.

Do not drsconnect

the RS232C

cable

link.

-239-

4.

4.6.7

OPERATION

Examples of operation

This section

provides

the followrng

two examples

of using the on-line

0

Monitoring

a ladder program

held by the PMC

@

Monitoring

a ladder program

held by a personal

4.6.7.1

function:

computer

Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

(1) Connecting

the RS-232C

(a) Connect

one

end

cable

of the

RS232C

cable

to the

COMl

or

COM2

port

of the

personal

computer.

(b) Connect

the other

end of the RS-232C

cable

to the R232-1

or R232-2

port on the main

board of the CNC.

(2) Setting

the parameters

(a) Press

the

CNC’s

PARAMETERS

for the on-line

[PMC],

(c) Specify changes

(Note)

USE

and

MONITOR

parameters.

for the

RS232C

on the PMC

[ONLINE]

screen

keys

in

that

order.

The

appears.

(See Section

4.6.2.

Check

parameter.

soft

“Preparation.“)

that

the

RS232C

status

Indication

to STAND-BY.

If USE is specified

for the parameter,

the CNC is nexl turned

(3) Starting

[MONIT],

FOR ONLINE

(b) Set the communicatton

monitor

the on-line

status

In this case, this operation

II by executing

the following

command:

>fladder

(When FAPT-LADDER

II is installed

under

C: y FLADDER)

- 240 -

is automatically

is unnecessary.

function

(a) Start FAPT-LADDER C: +r FLADDER

on.

STAND-BY

selected

when

4.

(b) The

title

appears

screen

01 FAPT

as shown

LADDER

LADDER-II

below.

The

appears.

initial

menu

After

a few

contains

the

OPERATION

seconds,

series

and

the edition

initial

menu

of FAPT-

II.

RBI(STEP SEQ)

[ C:YDFITRYSWLE 1 Version 01.0

RO8B-9201-5503

Press [TFIBIkey to move the cursor and press [ENTER] or lSPRCE1 key to select Off-Line Function

I

I

On-Line Function

I

1

On-Line (selected program)

I

Utilltu

I

I

Exit

I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (c) Select

[ON-LINE

(d) The on-line

FUNCTION]

monitor

screen

(a)

from the initial menu

appears

as shown

below.

Communication

with the PMC starts

automatically.

Try to connect

with

PllC ___

08130 WOO

J/Cancel/I

I

F7 Spl ist

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (b)

-241

-

F8 Search

FY Synbol

FlO Seting

4.

(Note)

If

communication

cannot

“Communication” subsequently

be

dialog box.

Check

-

: :.i

;.,:

[Param]

the setting in the “Parameter”

button

in

the

dialog box which

-

w=mwter..

.::i..:.::.;

:..I..

,,, ,,,, .I.: . . .... .,. .. . . ,. .\..

. .

: :: ... . .:.::>

“,,

‘.

.

.

is:::..

.,., :.:: ....>:I::.:.::.::.: t.....

Channel 0

COMl

Stop 01

0

cot42

bit

l

bit

2 bit

Fig. 4.6.7.1

communication

automatically.

the

appears.

:..

(e) When

select

established,

OPERATION

starts

normally,

(c)

the

“Communication”

The “Load from PMC” dialog box appears,

dialog

box

closes

and a program is loaded from the

PMC

-

Transfer

data

type

.

LADDER

0

ALL

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(Note)

II the most recently

monitored

program can be omitted. time is reduced.)

program

(d)

is used,

(If an identical machine

the processing is monitored

required

continuously,

to load the the loading

4.

(4) Selecting

(a) After

a subprogram

a program

shown

IS loaded

from

the PMC,

the “Sub-program

subiprogram

L&v&{1

.:.

dialog

box appears

as

:

,ii,=t

,., .,., 2

.:...

<::.:

I::;.‘:

j

..). ,/,:,

the

< 7 >

or

:

‘2,.

.,..;

(d) The ladder

diagram

;,I:;: ;::;.

< 1 >

key,

(e)

position

the

cursor

dlsplayed.

Press the

:I; ,:.

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Rl MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Ll PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

Fig. 4.6.7.1

pressing

.. ;

.:

LEVEL 2 PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) PO0010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR )

(c)

list”

below:

. . / .,

(b) By

OPERATION

key.

for the specified

subprogram

- 243 -

is displayed.

to the

subprogram

to

be

4.

Monitoring

action

The “Ladder

Monitor”

(a) Displaying

1. File

of ladder

diagram

window

the “Ladder

OPERATION

is displayed

Monitor”

as following.

window

3. I/O

2.Diagnose

4. Communication

La&de*

. [LEVEL i]

Moni&i

.

:‘.’:

I 1 .:.. .... ,...... :I,;..;:::, ‘. “::“:.:;::I:i_:‘.:-.:-_::i.:il;:~,l: .: .. : ..

y::,’

NET

DO00

00001-00006 ROOOO.l r\

I DO00

I

ROOOO.O r\ v

I . SUB END1

1

F7 SpList

(b)

Monitoring

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(f)

to Indicate

their

contact

and coil status

Contacts

and coils

are displayed

displayed

with thick or thin line according

OFF (0)

Thick

Thin

Thin

Thick

F

Thick

Thin

)--

Thick

Thin

k

w --( q

F9 Symbol

ON (1) or OFF

FlO Seting

(0).

They

are

to their status as follows.

ON (1) -1

status:

F8 Search

-

(S)-

Thick

Thin

__

CR)_

Thick

Thin

(c) Moving In the ladder The

area

up >‘<

dlsplayed

Page

down >

on the

window

Function

can

key

be

< F8 >

destmation.

-

244 -

moved [Search]

by cursor-up/down is useful

to jump

key

and

directly

4.

(4

Searching

for a net

To move to a desired

(e)

OPERATION

functional

instruction

Openrng

the “Display

Pressing

function

position,

enter

the number

(Sxxx). Then, press function

number

setting”

dialog

key FlO [SET]

or

key F8 [SEARCH].

the “Display

settrng”

dialog

box to appear.

setting

Mode

(1) Ladder -Symbol .

its address,

box

causes

biepfay

- Ladder

of the net to be displayed,

Monitor.

Online

6 Comment

Display

Editor -

Symbol

0 Address 0 Relay Comment c> Symbol b Address @Relay Comment & Address cj Relay Comment 6 Symbol

- Function 0

1

Parameter

Display

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(f)

Displaying

functional

Position

the

cursor

key

parameters

to

I

TCTRL- 1 ---i t

parameters

“Function

to close

appear

-OFF+

instruction

the

as shown

(g)

Parameter”

“Display

and

setting”

check

dialog

“Display”.

box.

The

below:

RST

SUB 36 ADDB

0002

ACT

TCNT-1

I

121 0000000001

NXT-TCNT

I

131

u_ Conlents TCNT-1

1

of address

Contents of address NXT-TCNT

Fig. 4.6.7.1

- 245 -

(h)

Then, functional

press

the

instruction

4.

OPERATION

(b) Checkmg the alarm state When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm icon changes to yellow.

Should this occur, select

dialog box.

Then,

check

12.

Diagnose]

from gray

and open the “PMC alarm message”

the details of the alarm state.

(For details of icons,

see (4),

“Displaying the PMC status (icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.) v

.,

...

.. .

&

. . .\.

.::...iMrnt ... : .._., mawage

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(cl

(k)

Checking whether a program is running While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 ladder program is running, the icon indicated icons, see (4), “Displaying

in Fig. 4.6.7.1

(I) is visible.

(m) is visible.

When no

(For details of

the PMC status (icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.)

Program on PMC

is running.

Fig. 4.6.7.1

To change

the ladder

“RUNiSTOP

(d)

(I)

program

execution

status,

select

12.

(m)

Diagnose]

then

use the

the ladder” dialog box.

Displaying the communication While communication is visible.

Fig. 4.6.7.1

status

with the PMC is being performed,

When communication

in Fig. 4.6.7.1

(0) is visible.

the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1

with the PMC has not been established, (For details of icons, see (4). “Displaying

(n)

the icon indicated the PMC

status

(icon)” in Section 4.6.1.2.)

iiiiz!l

Communication is not active.

Communication

/

is active.

Fig. 4.6.7.1

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(n)

When changing the status of the communication Communrcation]

dialog box.

- 247 -

being performed

(0)

with the PMC,

use the 14.

4. OPERATION

(7) Monitoring

signals

(a) Opening “Signal Status” window Pull down the 12. Diagnose]

menu, select [Signal Status]

from the menu,

the “Signal

Status”

window is displayed,

GO0000

0,.

0

0

0

0

0

GO0001

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0 0

: :

GO0002 GO0003 GO0004 GO0005 GO0006 GO0007 GO0008 600009

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

00 00 : 00 : 00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

:oo

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

:

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

:oo

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 00

0

0

0

i

0

0

0

0

:

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

:

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(p)

00

00 00

and the functions of function keys change as following.

F4

F8 Search

Symbol

FlO Wrt On or

or F4 III

Adress Fig. 4.6.7.1

(b)

(q)

Searching Address Enter “RO.0” and press function key < F8 > (Search],

the address

ROOOOO is displayed

of the window, and the cursor moves onto signal of ROOOOO.O.

Signal

Status 42

ROOOOO ROOOOl R00002 R00003

0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

: : : :

R00009

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(r)

- 248 -

00 00 00

at top

4. OPERATION

(cl

Displaying

symbol

Function

key

corresponding addresses

[Symbol] signal.

on the window.

to [Adress]

displays

Symbols

symbols

defined

of addresses

for byte

When the symbols

address

on the window,

are also

are displayed,

just above

displayed

the function

just

key

above

the their

c F4 > changes

which hides the symbols.

bit symbols

byte symbol

.: y ,..:I., _)

:.. ,,. ‘.

signal

. . .

I

SPatus

I -ON1

-OFF0'

CONST ROOOOO

0

1

0

0

0

0

ROOOOl

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 00

IR00004

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

:oo

: 42

I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (s)

(d)

Unlocking

write-protection

Press function displayed key

(Warning)

key

< FlO>

on the window.

< FlO > changes

Signal

[Wrt On] to unlock The color

write changes

protection

of the contents

to red from

yellow.

of addresses

And the function

to [WrtOff].

status

changes

changes

can have

process

to which

these

of cursor

functions

should

serious it applies,

always

be made

and unforeseen if they

results

are improperly

not be used with people

- 249 -

with

extreme

on a control used.

near the equipment.

care. system,

Signal

status

and on the

It is recommended

that

4.

(e) Changing Move

status

the cursor

signal

OPERATION

you

want

in the window to change,

key turns

by the cursor

then

a signal

press

status

keys,

ON which

key

up>

and

the

signal

to make

was OFF, and turns a signal

down> status

status

to the change.

OFF which

was ON. r

Signa

L

0

0

0

0

ROOOOl

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

: 02

R00004

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

: 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(t)

Some

signals

may not change

writes

the signals

or the external M-address,

Enabling Press

key

key cFlO>

Hrdrng “Signal Pull down Status”

I10 devices

Status”

l/O devices

NC writes

signals

because

updated

the Ladder

by NC. MMC,

on F-address,

MMC

on

on X-address.

[WrtOff)

to re-protect

The color

of cursor

the returns

contents

of addresses

to yellow

from

red.

on the window And the function

wrndow menu,

select

[Ladder

Monitor]

from

the menu,

then

the “Signal

drsappears.

Non-volatrle window

such as l/O-Link:

them,

are frequently

to [Wrt On).

the 12. Diagnose]

window

if you change

or the signals

: 42

again

changes.

returns

their status even

frequently,

and the external

write-protection

function

from unforeseen

(Note)

-OFF0

0

diagram

(9)

-ONL

CONST ROOOOO

(Note)

(f)

Stat&s

PMC address

to display

T, C, K and D which

and modify

is called

them (see 4.4.5 for detail).

-250-

“PMC

parameter”

has special

4.

(8)

Storing

a program

A program is turned

edited

to flash

(a) Displaying Select

the program

the “Write

13.

memory

using the on-line

off before

function

dialog

(The “Executing”

to Flash ROM”

.,

the results

of the PMC. of editing

If the CNC

will be lost.

box

Select

as shown

[F-ROM below.

write]

Select

from the menu.

The

[OK] to store the edited

“Write

to

program.

appears.

wrjtc :-korraskl RCIH ..’

:. Are

to flash memory

to flash memory,

dialog

bar.

box appears message

is written

is written

I/O] from the menu

Flash ROM”

OPERATION

you

sure

you

want

to

write

to

Flash ROM ?

Fig. 4.6.7.1

After the program

(9) Storing

has been stored,

a program

A program program

edited

using

the on-line

can be decompiled

function

and edited

automatically.

can be named

using the off-line

and stored

to a file.

The stored

function.

to a file

11. FILE] from the menu

box appears

box closes

to a file

(a) Storing a program Select

the dialog

(u)

as shown

below.

bar. Select

Then,

[File save].

]OK] to store the edited

save

Program

select

The “Save

program”

dialog

program.

program

name

YFLADDERYSAMPLE piq

I

’

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (v) After the file has been stored.

(Note)

When named

a program PMC-RAM

the “Save

program”

held in the memory by default.

The data of PMC-RAM

dialog

box closes

of the PMC is monitored

To store

is automatically

the program, updated

edited.

-251

-

when

automatically

or edited,

the program

rename

the program

another

program

is

in advance.

is monrtored

or

4. OPERATION

(J) Ending the on-line function (a) Ending the on-line function Select [l. FILE] from the menu bar. A message

Then, select [Exit). Select [OK] to end the on-line function.

dialog box appears as shown below.

II

Are

you

sure

you

want

to

exit

?

I

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (W)

4.6.7.2

Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

To transfer a program created

using the off-line function to the PMC and subsequently

start the on-line function as described

(1) Selecting

execute

it,

below:

a program

Select [Program Selection]


Then, enter the name of the program to be

used.

RBd(STEP SEQI

[ C:YDFITRYSRlVLEI

ROBB-YZOl-J503

Werslon 01.0

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and press [ENTERI or [SPFICEIkey to select.

Off-Line Function

I

On-Line Function

I

On-Line (selected program)

I

ut I I Itu

I

Exit

Fig. 4.6.7.2

-252-

I I

(a)

4.

(2) Starting

the on-fine function

Select [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)]


If compilation

either

ISource

or decompilation

has

program

Memory

card

is necessary,

been

updated.

file

has

format

In this case, enter Y to compile

(3) Storing When

the program the on-fine

programs displayed

match.

Compile

been

or decompile

is started, program

the

as shown

is displayed.

(Y/N)

I

it?(Y/N)

with

selection

is automatically

a program

screen

connected

held on the If not,

is displayed.

PMC.

to the

If the two

a dialog

box

is

below:

Selected

program

71

Load

from

[Stole/

Store

to

-1

Select

IDisregard]

Disregard

select

[STORE]

dialog

?

Decompile

computer

box does

shown

above

either

by off-fine

editing

When

the on-fine

dialog

box

shown

above

memory.

memory.

difference.

function.

(b)

the selected

appears

is started

program

when

that on the PMC.

does

same.

program.

or with the internal

monitor

not

PMC program

On-Line

to transfer

not match

is

PMC program

Fig. 4.6.7.2

computer

messages

the program.

the personal

Quit

The

it

updated.

is compared

subprogram

N:E-3160

In this case,

of the following

to the PMC

monitor

PMC, and the selected

(Note)

OPERATION

with

the

program

This is because edit function,

the program

not appear.

to the PMC.

Instead,

selected either

on

program

the

personal

is modified

for example. stored

in the PMC

the subprogram

selected,

selection

the

screen

appears.

The

ladder

“Monitoring

monitor

and

signal

a ladder

program

monitor

can

be

on the PMC.”

- 253 -

operated

as described

in Section

4.6.7.2,

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST This chapter describes the general messages output by FAPT LADDER-II. and categorized as indicated below: function-name

Messages are output

: E-xxxx : error-message

L

Error number (four digits)

Category (error, warning, etc.) LL

Name of the processing which caused the error

(1) Function name The processing causing the error is represented by a single alphabetic character. Processing

Function name A 6 C D E F G H I J K L N

(2) Message

Initial menu and option setting Title editing I/O module editing System parameter editing Ladder diagram/step diagram editing Symbol and comment editing Message editing Printing Compilation Decompilation Mnemonic conversion Input/Output On-line monitor

category

Output messages are classified into the following categories. by single alphabetic characters.

The categories are represented

F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx. The system can be operated, but processing of the user program cannot be continued because of an error. E: Error. The error number is Sxxx. Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively,

the processing is stopped.

W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx. Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be guaranteed.

-254-


5.1 A : INITIAL MENU (program name selection, option setting, Oh-Line execution) 5.1 .l

Fatal error

Number A:F-2000 A:F-2001

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

1INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.

A:F-2004

THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LADDER.

A: F-2005

SOURCEPROGRAMHASWRONG FILE (S).

A:F-2006

I

The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain necessary files. Check the source program files.

1NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.

A:F-2007

NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM.

A:F-2008

CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

A:F-2009

1CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.

A:F-2010

5.1.2

Contents

Messsge

I

I

XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BROKEN. Error

Number

Message

Contents

A:E-3120

ENTER PROGRAM NAME.

A:E-3121

THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES NOT EXIST.

A:E-3122

PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND.

The specified source program is not compatible with the system. For details of which machine models are compatible, see Section 1.2.2. Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall the system.

A:E-3124

CANNOT CREATE NEW PROGRAM XXXX.

The specified source program cannot be created because a directory having the same name already exists. Input another source program name.

A:E-3125

ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PROGRAM NAME.

The specified path does not exist. Check the input source program name.

A:E-3126

SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIFFERENT.

A FORMAT-A/B program was specified when copying a source program. FORMAT-A/B cannot be used with FAPT LADDER-II. Convert the program via a memory card or mnemonic format file. For details, see Appendix 3.

A:E-3128

XXXX FILE READ ERROR

A:E-3132

File xxxx cannot be read. I

A: E-31 30 A:E-3131

The name of the source program has not been input. Input the source program name.

1

XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANL KEY.

File xxxx cannot be read.

XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR.

File xxxx cannot be opened.

T

XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR

File xxxx cannot be closed.

INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.

The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space on the disk. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files in the disk to create more free space.

A:E-3134

INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED. (XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.)

The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because Its data was destroyed.

A:E-3137

CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX.

File xxxx cannot be created.

A:E-3133

-25!3-


Message

Number A:E-3138

I

I

A:E-3139

Contents

ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM NAME. lLL;ANLXMyX

SOURCE PRO-

1 A:E-3140

1NOT FOUND FILE.

I

I

1 A:E-3143

1CANNOT OPEN FILE.

1File xxxx cannot be opened.

I

1 A:E-3144

1CANNOT CLOSE FILE.

I File xxxx cannot be closed.

A:E-3145

1FILE I/O ERROR.

( An error occurred during file access.

A:E-3146

t XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

I

A:E-3147

UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.

A:E-3148

XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY.

5.2 5.2.1 Number

I

Data cannot be written to file xxxx.

B : TITLE EDITING Error Message

Contemts

B:E-3020

FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read.

B:E-3021

FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

Datacannot be writtento the source programtitlefile (TITLE) or control file (CONTROL).

BE-3022

FILE l/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

An error occurred during file access.


5.3 C : l/O MODULE EDITING 5.3.1

Error Message

Contents

C:E-3021

FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read.

C: E-3022

FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY

Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL).

C: E-3023

INPUT DATA INVALID

Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure.

C: E-3024

APPOINTED

GROUP NOT EXIST

The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range.

C: E-3025

APPOINTED

BASE NOT EXIST

The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range.

C: E-3026

APPOINTED

SLOT NOT EXIST

The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirm the input value range.

C: E-3027

APPOINTED

ID CODE NOT EXIST

The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the module names that can be specified.

C: E-3026

INPUT KEY NOT USED

C: E-3030

ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL

The specified module cannot be used at this address. Check whether the output module is specified at address X and whether the input module is specified at address Y.

C: E-3032

THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned modules. Specify different group, base, and slot numbers.

C: E-3033

INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT

The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm which channels can be specified.

C: E-3034

INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ‘O’, IS SPECIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS l/O UNIT B.

For I/O Unit-B (xxx:power-on/off information), a slot other than slot 0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.

5.3.2 Number

Warning Message

Contents

C:W4020

THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned modules. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for the group, base, and slot.

C:W4021

INVALID DATA, EXCEPT ‘O’, IS SPECIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT B.

For the I/O Unit-B module, a base other than base 0 cannot be specified. Specify base 0.

C:W4022

BOTH I/O UNIT-A AND UNIT-B ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME GROUP.

I/O Unit-A and I/O Unit-B cannot be assigned to the same group. Specify different groups.

-257-

-8SZ-

ss3tmv 39vw1 ma a31 (01 ssmaav 35ww1 lla A~U (6 ssmaav a31 (8 ss3k4aav ~3n (L :sseJppe t%y~o(lol eql Aweds ‘(800~ JO pesn s! (wed JO)eMdO swwds W!W) 13NVd kiOlVU3dO (9

03 W

JW~W’

u! E’s S! (S3A) 1 uWM

ss3Haav

HOW3 13NVd kl3lVkl3dO allvANI

wa

3niv~ ‘(lOHlN03) aI!4l”JW’~ JO (VuVklVdSAS) al!l JW -weJed ureisk uJeJ6oJd03Jnose~ioiue~yM eq iouum eiea (VuvtrvdsAs) w JwmJ~

.peeJ eq louue~ uwsAs UeJEbJd a3Jnos wi

~3y ANV 11~ ‘~Olj~3 A~W ANV IIH wow3

klow3

UldNl al1vANl

31l~M av3ti

3114 3114

ebsse~

muwJo3

9Nllla3

1sn39vss3vu

tzoc-3:a czoc-3:a zzoc-3:a izoc-3:a ozoc-310 JequnN

InHlSAS

td313WWWd

:

a

p’s

3


5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING 5.51

Fatal error

Number

Message

Contents

E:F-2100

CANNOT READ * FILE.

E:F-2101

CANNOT WRITE * FILE.

E:F-2102

CANNOT SEEK * FILE.

5.5.2

Error (at editing ladder diagram)

Number

Message

E:E-3100

Contents

INPUT INVALID

E:E-3101

1ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

I

E:E3102

1RELAY OR COIL NOTHING

I

E:E-3103

1HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL

I

E:E-3104

1VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL

I

E:E-3105

1ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO.

I

E:E-3106

FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

E:E-3107

PARAMETER NOTHING

E:E-3108

LADDER ILLEGAL

E:E-3109

ERROR NET FOUND

E:E-3110

RELAY OR COIL FORBIT

E:E-3111

1PLEASE COMPLETE NET

E:E3112

ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED

E:E-3113

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

E:E-3114

FUNCTION NOT FOUND

I

E:E-3115

1LADDER BROKEN

I

E:E-3116

1ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING

I

E:E-3117

STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT) ERR

E:E-3118

PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. I

E:E-3119 E:E-3120 E:E-3121

I

1PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO. SYMBOUCOMMENT LARGE

DATA TOO

1SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST

I

E:E-3122

SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT FILE FORMAT

A Format-B program was found to exist when renaming a Format-A program.

E:E-3123

ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME

An invalid subprogram name was input.

E:E-3124

TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUBPROGRAM

E:E-3125

SAME SUB-PROGRAM EXISTS

E:E-3126

THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO ZOOM I********‘.

E:E-3127

SOURCE PROGRAM OF ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS

NAME

A Format-B program, having the same name as that specified for the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist during Format-A program editing.


Number

Messacle

1

E:E-3128

ILLEGAL SYMBOL

E:E-3129

PROGRAM OPEN ERROR

E:E-3130

PROGRAM NOT EXIST

E:E-3131

NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE

E:E-3132

I

1PROGRAM NOT WRITE

E:E-3134-7

DIRECTORY NOT EXIST

E:E-3135

1 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST

E:E-3136

1PROGRAM IS OPENED

E:E-3137

PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER

E:E-3138

CAN NOT RENAME LATMP

E:E-3139

5.53

A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbol editing.

PROGRAM NOT READ I

E:E-3133

Contents

I

I An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing LATMP with the File function.

1 PROGRAM NOT EXIST

Error (at editing step sequence) Message

Number

Contents A read error occurred when reading the specified intermediate code file.

E:E3200

ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE.

E:E-3201

BUFFER SIZE OVER.

An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size.

E: E-3202

NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO

The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been exceeded.

BIG. E:E3203

NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG.

The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded.

E:E-3204

SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG.

The maximum allowable numberof element tables has been exceeded.

E:E-3205

UNCONNECTED STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM.

The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous.

E:E-3206

SELECTED BRANCH ERROR.

The start sideof the select branch does not agree with its end side.

E:E-3207

PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR.

The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side.

E:E-3208

SYNTAX ERROR.

The sequence In the select branch is other than “transition to step to transition.” Or, the sequence in the parallel branch is other than “step to transition to step.”

E:E-3209

STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR.

The step line contains an element other than initial step, step, block step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (vertical line).

E:E-3210

TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX ERROR.

The transition line contains an element other than initial step, step, block step, and jump (dummy step).

E:E-3211

CANNOT INSERT.

Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if inserted, the maximum coordinate value is exceeded.

E:E-3212

CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM.

A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing an element.

E:E-3213

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL.

A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of the branch.

E:E-3214

JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR.

The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist.

E:E-3215

CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR.

The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not been completely checked.

-260-


Number E:E-3216 1 E:E-3217

Contents

Message CHART SEQUENCE ERROR.

1CHART START CODE ERROR.

The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.

1The chart start code does not exist (step).

I

CHART END CODE ERROR.

The chart end code does not exist.

JUMP CLOSE ERROR.

JUMP has not been closed correctly.

E:E-3220

HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE ERROR.

A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data exists before and after the branch code.)

E:E-3221

BRANCH UNCONNECTED

The branch connection is invalid.

E: E-3222

BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR.

There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and end codes.

E:E-3223

CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS.

The copy destination is invalid.

1CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS.

1The move destination is invalid.

I

1 E:E-3225

1ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION.

1The specified coordinate value does not exist.

1 E:E3226

/ STRINGS NOT FOUND.

I The specified character string does not exist.

I I

E:E-3218

t---E:E-3219

FEE3224

I I

ERROR.

E:E-3227

STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR.

The specified step number is already in use. Check which step numbers are already in use. I

E:E-3228

LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR.

The specified label is already defined.

CANNOT IE:E_3229

DELETE TEMPORARY

I The temporary file cannot be deleted.

FILE.

I

;;E;zWPROGRAM

E:E-3231

INPUT INVALID.

Data outside the address range is set.

E:E-3232

EXPECTED ADDRESS.

No subprogram number is specified.

E:E-3233

TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUE PROGRAM.

An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers. I

E:E-3234

ILLEGAL FILE NAME.

E:E-3235

SUB-PROGRAM

NAME

The same file already exists, but with a different extension.

E:E-3230

ALREADY

t---

, ENTRIED.

1 E:E-3236

1CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM.

E:E-3237

1CANNOT CHANGE DATA.

The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited.

1The intermediate code file cannot be deleted. Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.

-261-

I


55.4

Warning (at editing ladder diagram)

WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE. E:W4109

THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLEDJF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND.

E:W4110

THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE.

E:W4111

MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOT CONSISTENCY !

.

-262-


5.6

F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING

5.6.1 Error Number

1

Message

F:E-3100

INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

F:E-3101

SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE

F:E-3102

SAME SYMBO LDATA EXIST

F:E-3103

NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED

F:E-3104

NOT FOUND DATA ERROR

F:E-3105

FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY

Contents

F:E-3106

1FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY 1

F:E-3107

1DATA SAVE ERROR

I

F:E-3108

1SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS.

1

F:E-3109

t INPUT ADDRESS DATA.

I

F:E-3110

1ILLEGAL SYMBOL.

I

5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING 5.7.1

Error

Number

Message

G:E3100

ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT *.

G:E3101

MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

G:E-3102

THE FOLLOWING DATA OF * WERE DELETED.

Contents

-263-


5.8 H : PRINTOUT 58.1

Fatal error Contents

Message

Number H:F-2005

SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG

FILE(S). ($) H:F-2066

CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

5.8.2 Number

I

Error Contents

Message

1

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.

I

An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was insuffffient free space.

H:E-3101

1CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

File xxxx cannot be opened.

H:E-3102

1CANNOT READ XXXX FILE.

File xxxx cannot be read.

H:E-3100

File xxxx cannot be found. File xxxx does not exist. The format of file xxxx is invalid. H:E-3106

1CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE.

Data cannot be written to the file xxxx.

H:E3107

1OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED.

An error occurred upon opening the output file.

H:E-3166

WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE.

An error occurred upon writing to the output file.

H:E-3109

INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE FREE

There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.

1

H:E-3110

INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE 1FREE

H:E-3111

There is insufficient free space on the disk to pertom crossreference. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space.

STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.

The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram has been exceeded. The maximum number of steps that can be printed is 32767.

SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ

An error occurred upon reading symbol data.

NET COMMENT FILE READ

An error occurred upon reading a net comment.

SYMBOL 8. COMMENT DATA BROKEN.

The symbol data is invalid.

I

H:E-3114

5.8.3 Number

Warning Message

Contents

H:W-tlOO

CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT.

The key was pressed before the completion of printing.

H:WAlOl

CANCEL FILE OUTPUT.

The
H:W-4102

SEL SWITCH OFF

The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL button such that the indicator lights.

-264-

key was pressed during file output.


5.9 5.9.1

I : COMPILE Fatal error

Number

1

I:F-2100

1NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE

I:F-2101

1OUT OF MEMORY

5.9.2 Number

Message

Contents

I

Error Message

Contents

I:E-3100

XXXX READ ERROR

The source program cannot be read. (This error normally does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3101

XXXX WRITE ERROR

The compilation results cannot be written.

I:E-3102

XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME ILLEGAL.

An invalid source program name is specified. normally does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3103

XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT FOUND.

Source program xxxx does not exist. does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3105

XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FORMAT IS DIFFERENT.

The source program format is FORMAT-A. mally does not occur during compilation.)

I:E-3107

SYSTEM PARAMETER READ ERROR.

The source file for the system parameter data does not exist.

I:E-3108

TITLE READ ERROR.

The source file for the title data does not exist.

I:E-3109

I/O MODULE READ ERROR.

The source file for the I/O module data does not exist.

I:E-3110

VERIFICATION ERROR

The input password differs from the registered password.

I:E-3111

THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHER WORD

Input the password correctly.

I:E-3112

ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE ALLOWED

The input password contains a non-alphanumeric ter.

I:E-3200

THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION.

An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists.

I:E-3201

THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH NEEDS THE COIL.

A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.

I: E-3220

SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAMETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUCTION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE.

An out-of-range tion xxxx.

l:E-3221

PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.

The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name.

I:E-3222

AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

An out-of-range program number or an address other than a program number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.

I: E-3223

AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

An out-of-range label number or an address other than a label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx.

I: E-3250

THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM.

The ladder program is empty. instruction.

l:E-3251

THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE.

The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specified for the selected program type.

l:E-3252

LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN.

An unrecognizable

l:E-3253

LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.

Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.

-265-

(This error

(This error normally (This error nor-

charac-

value is specified in a parameter of instruc-

Specify the END1 or END2

instruction exists.


Number

Message

Contents

I:E-3254

THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF LADDER EXCEEDS 99.

Because the number of second level divisions in the main program exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the second level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.

l:E-3270

SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the main program.

I:E-3271

SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the main program.

l:E-3272

JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.

The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. It cannot be used in the main program.

l:E-3273

CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.

The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program.

I:E-3274

CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM.

The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program.

l:E-3290

THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTtON AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.

A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram.

l:E-3291

THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM.

A subprogram must end with the SPE instructiontojndicate the end of the subprogram.

l:E-3292

LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.

l:E-3293

SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM.

The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram.

I:E-3310

THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION.

The END1 instructionis not found at the end of the first level.

I:E-3311

THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTlON.

The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level.

l:E-3312

THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION.

The END3 instructionis not found at the end of the third level.

I:E-3313

LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because the END1 instruction indicates the end of the first level.

I:E-3314


No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction because the END2 instruction indicates the end of the second level.

I:E-3315


No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction because the END3 instruction indicates the end of the third level.

I:E-3316

LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION.

No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because the END instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program.

I:E-3317

END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED.

END1 is specified for other than the first level.

l:E-3318

END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED.

END2 is specified for other than the second level.

I:E-3319

END3 INSTRUCTION USED.

END3 is specified for other than the third level.

I:E-3320

END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED.

The END instruction is specified for the first level.

l:E-3330

THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION.

The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified.

CAN NOT BE


Number

Message

Contents

l:E-3331

CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION.

The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range.

l:E-3332

CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION.

The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range.

l:E-3333

ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION.

The COM instruction. that indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified twice within the range.

l:E-3334

COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH COM.

The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruction control range, is specified when the COM instruction, used to indicate the start of the range, is not specified.

I:E-3335

COME INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION.

The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruction control range when the end of the range has already been defined as a number of coils.

l:E-3340

THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION.

The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block, but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end of the block, is not specified.

l:E-3341

ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION.

Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jump block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of the first block.

I:E-3342

JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH JMP.

A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specified when no JMP instruction,that indicates the start of a block, is specified.

l:E-3343

JMPE INSTRUCTtON IS DEIECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION.

A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump block when the end of the block has already been defined as a number of coils.

l:E-3350

THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX.

The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the jump destination.

l:E-3351

THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE.

Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jump destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify unique label numbers.

I:E-3352

TOO MANY LABELS.

The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instruction exceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for the selected program type. Decrease the number of defined jump destinations.

l:E-3353

THE DESTINATION OF JMPB INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ COME INSTRUCTION.

The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside to a point outside the COM instruction control range, or vice versa. JUMP operations can be performed only entirely within the range or entirely outside the range.

I:E-3400


The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or an instructionthat cannot be used with the selected program type.

I:E-3420

PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME.

The parameter of the program stat-linstruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name.

l:E-3421

AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range step number or an address other than a step number.

l:E-3422

AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range program number or an address other than a program number.

l:E-3423

AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range label number or an address other than a label number.

-267-


Number

Message

Contents

LE-3440

THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM.

A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram.

l:E-3441


A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end of the subprogram.

l:E-3442

STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION.

No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram.

l:E-3443

SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM.

The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instructionindkates the startof a subprogram.

l:E-3460

THE LABEL OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS.

Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump destination.

l:E-3461

TOO MANY LABELS.

The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the number allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number of jump destination definitions.

l:E-3462

DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT DLBL.

There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction.

l:E-3480

THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS.

Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a unique step number for each step.

l:E-3570

THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum numIS TOO LARGE. ber of characters that can be specified for the selected program type. Reduce the total number of characters.

I:E-3600

DATA TOO LARGE. (LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE)

The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence program exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected program type. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence program.

I:E-3601

DATA TOO LARGE. (MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COMMENT + LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE)

The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and step sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selectecl program type. Reduce the size of any of these data types.

l:E-3620

THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM xxxx.

The selected program does not contain any subprogram fife numbered xxxx. Create a subprogramfile having this number.

l:E-3640

LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION.

The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when it is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction is placed at the end of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram having a higher program number.

l:E-3650

THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX.

There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction.

l:E-3651

THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE.

In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump destinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump destination.

l:E-3652

TOO MANY LABELS.

The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in the main program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified for the selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in the main program.

l:E-3653

THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL.

Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed in other than the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Define label xxxx in the second level.

l:E-3654

THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN THE RANGE OF THE COM INSTRUCTION.

Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction, is within the COM instruction control range. Place label xxxx outside the range.

-268-


5.9.3 Number

Warning Message

Contents

kW-4100

THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE CODE.

The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These characters are replaced by spaces.

I:W4101

ILLEGAL OPPANEL (PARAMETER). PROCEED TO COMPILE USING ‘NO’

Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are not set when YES is specified for the system parameter indieating whether the FO operator panel is to be used. The value of this parameter is changed to NO during compilation.

I:W4102

EDITING SUEPROGRAM NOT COMPLETED.

There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed. Complete the editing of this subprogram.

I:W4103

MULTIPLE SUB-PROGRAMS SAME NUMBER EXIST.

WITH

Twosubprograms haveidenticalnumbers(e.g., Pl.#lAand Pl.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled (Pl.#tA in the above example).

I:W4104

THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FORMAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT

Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT-B.

I:W4105

THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FORMAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED: NET COMMENT

The FORMAT-B data does not include a net comment. Specifying this item has no effect.

I:W4200

THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM.

The ladderprogram isempty. Thisladderprogramisnotoutput to a memory card file.

I:W4201

LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.

The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.

l:W4202

THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED.

The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end of the range being identified by the COME instruction.

l:W4203

THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED.

The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end location being identified by the JMPE instruction.

I:W4204

UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND.

The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment character string. This pointer is not ouiqut to a memory card file.

I:W4400

THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM.

The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence program is not output to a memory card file.

I:W4500

THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE.

The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W4501

THE COMMENT DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE.

The comment data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

l:W4502

COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS 64KB. SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.

More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment data. None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file.

I:W4570

THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE.

The message data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W4600

UNREFERENCED xxxx.

Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. gram is, however, output to a memory card file.

HAS

SUBPROGRAM

-269-

This pro-


5.10 J : DECOMPILATION 5.10.1

Fatal error

J:F-2100

Contents

Message

Number

FUNCTION CODE ERROR. DATA:-, SYSTEMx

The function code specified in the memory card file does not match that defined in the system. The file’s function code appears immediately after DATA; the system’s function code after SYSTEM. Install valid system data.

J:F-2101

PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM ‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE.

The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match the selected program type. Select a valid program.

J:F-2102

‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE NOT FOUND.

Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the file.

J:F-2103

MISMATCHED PASSWORD.

The entered password is invalid. Enter the password correctly.

J:F-2104

‘XxXx’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE READ ERROR.

Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid.

J:F-2105

‘XXXX’ SOURCE PROGRAM WRITE ERROR.

Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.

5.10.2 Number

Error Contents

Message

J:E-3100


There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type.

J:E-3101


There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end with the SPE instruction.

J:E-3200

THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS THE LIMIT.

The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the systemdefined limitbefore the program was executed. The program thus cannot be executed; reduce the symbol data size.

J:E-3300

ID CODE (l/O MODULE) ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX)

An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the l/O module data. The program cannot be executed; prepare a valid memory card file.

-270-


510.3

Warning

Number

Message

Contents

J:W4100

THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE.

The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder program exceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selected program type. The subprogram is output to the source program. Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram.

J:W4101

XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND.

xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net comment character string. These net comment pointers are not output to the source program. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.

J:W4102

XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT STRINGS FOUND.

xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any net comment pointer. These net comment character strings are deleted. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary.

J:W4103

XXXX DUPLICATED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND.

xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Character strings are copied so that the same net comment character strings have the same net comment pointers.

J:W4104

THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE.

Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. Edit the step sequence as necessary.

J:W4200

THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. (ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

The total number of data items exceeded the system-defined limit when the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx). Data subsequent to this symbol data is not output to the source program.

J:W4201

XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLICATED ADDRESS FOUND.

xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address. Either the source data or the memory card data becomes valid, depending on the setting of the symbol merge option.

J:W4202

SAME SYMBOL EXISTS. (ADDRESS XXXX. SYMBOL XXXX)

The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address. This symbol data is not output to the source program.

J:W4203

ILLEGAL SYMBOL. (ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

The indicated symbol data (address: &symbol: xxxx) was found to be invalid as a result of the IEC-cornpliant symbol character string check. This symbol data is not output to the source program. To output it to the source file, change the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF file.

J:W4204

SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL (SYMBOL XXXX)

The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address. This symbol data is not output to the source program.

J:W4300

ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYSTEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO DECOMPILE USING ‘NO’.

The operator panel specification in the system parameter data is invalid. Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel specification.

J:W4301

THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D ADDRESS.

The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC version of PMC-RC is earlierthan 3. Change the PMC version in the system parameter.

J:W4800

‘XXXX’ MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE ILLEGAL.

The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. However, processing continues.

J:W4900

‘OPTION’ READ FAILED. SE-I-I-ING HAS CHANGED INTO DEFAULT.

The file settings have returned to the defaults. The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The option reset function key may be used.

J:W4901

‘%%%FLSET.CNF’ READ FAILED. SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT CHECKED.

Symbol character check is not performed. The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. When this check is not made, processing may be continued even withoui making the changes.

-271-


5.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION 5.11 .l Fatal error Number

Message

K:F-2006

INSUFFICIENT

MEMORY.

K:F-2001

INSUFFICIENT

DISK SPACE.

K:F-2006

NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ FILE.

K:F-2097

NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ SOURCE PROGRAM.

K:F-2100

FILE I/O ERROR.

Contents

KF-2101

1SET-UP FILE BROKEN.

I

K:F-2102

1ILLEGAL OPTION(S).

I

K:F-2103

INSUFFICIENT

K:F-2104

TOO MANY PARAMETERS.

K:F-2105 K:F-2106

PARAMETER(S).

EXPECTED TERMINATOR.

K:F-2108

PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM SOURCE-PROGRAM.

K:F-2109

EXPECTED IDCODE.

K:F-2110

ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S).

K:F-2111

CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN CURRENT DIRECTORY.

K:F-2112

NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL VARIABLE ‘TMP’.

1NOT FOUND SET-UP FILE.

K:F-2115

1EXPECTED ‘/PC’ OPTION.

K:F-2117

I

ILLEGAL NAME OF SET-UP FILE.

K:F-2114

K:F-2116

The functional instruction contains more parameters than are required.

ILLEGAL OPTlON-SPECIFIED FILE.

1ILLEGAL IDCODE.

K:F-2107

K:F-2113

Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified.

‘XxXx’ EXECUTABLE FILE NOT FOUND.

1INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

I I I

-272-


5.11.2

Error Message

Number

Contente

K:E-3100

‘XXXX’ FILE CANNOT EXECUTE.

K:E-3101

‘XXXX’ SYMBOL 8 COMMENT DATA BROKEN.

K:E-3102

CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE ‘%@2-C.

K:E-3103

CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYSTEM.

K:E-3104

;;Z;OT

K:E-3105

CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS OF PARAMETER.

A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the functional instruction.

K:E-3106

CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS ON BASIC INSTRUCTION.

A byte address is specified for the basic instruction.

K:E-3107

CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MODULE AT INPUT ADDRESS.

An output module is specified as the input addressof the I/O module data.

K:E-3108

CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MODULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS.

An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O module data.

K:E-3109

CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS PROHIBITED USING AS PARAMETER.

A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parameter of the functional instruction.

K:E-3110

CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT ADDRESS.

K:E3111

CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE ADDRESS.

K:E-3112

CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS.

An output prohibited address is specified as the output address parameter of the functional instruction.

K:E-3113

CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS WITH COIL.

An output prohibited address is specified for the coil,

K:E-3114

CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD ADDRESS.

An odd-number prohibited address is specified as an oddnumber address.

K:E-3117

EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2.

The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 2.

K:E-3118

EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5.

The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 5.

K:E-3119

EXPECTED ADDRESS.

The basic instruction has no address.

The mnemonic of extended symbol ‘%@2-C’ is converted when %%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT-A/B file.

OVERWRITE EXISTING

K:E-3120

EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E-3121

EXPECTED PARAMETER(S).

K:E-3122

IDCODE NOT FOUND IN ‘XxXx’.

K:E-3123

ILLEGAL ADDRESS.

An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specitied in the symbol and comment data, or message data.

K:E-3124

ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA TABLE.

An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table.

K:E-3125

ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAMETER.

An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction address parameter.

K:E-3126

ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S).

The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, or message data contains invalid character data.

K:E-3127

ILLEGAL SOURCE-PROGRAM NAME.

The functional instruction has no parameter.

-273-


Contents

Number

Message

K:E-3128

ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E-3129

ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER.

The system parameter contains an invalid data number.

K:E-3130

ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER.

The data number of the data identifier is invalid.

K:E-3131

ILLEGAL VALUE.

The system parameter contains an invalid value.

K:E-3132

ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA.

An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data.

K:E-3133

ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA.

An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data.

K:E-3134

ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA.

An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data.

K:E-3135

ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER.

An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruction.

K:E-3136

INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S).

K:E-3137

INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME.

K:E-3138

1uNA’Mu: SOURCE-PROGRAM

K:E3139

INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT DATA.

K:E3140

INVALID FUNCTIONS

K:E-3141

INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER.

K:E-3142

INVALID MODULE NAME.

K:E-3143

RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS E2BIG(=7).

K:E-3144

INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECIFIED SOURSE-PROGRAM.

K:E-3145

INVALID QUALIFIER.

K:E3146

LACK OF XXXX FILE.

K:E-3147

MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE.

K:E-3148

MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND.

K:E-3149

NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S).

Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified.

K:E-3150

NOT FOUND BASE DATA.

The base data of the I/O module is not found.

NAME.

An unsupported functional instruction is specified.

The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.

The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder, or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character.

K:E-3151

NOT FOUND GROUP DATA.

The group data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E-3152

NOT FOUND MODULE NAME.

The module name of the l/O module is not found.

K:E-3153

NOT FOUND SLOT DATA.

The slot data of the I/O module is not found.

K:E-3154

NOT FOUND ‘XxXx’ PROCESS INTERFACE FILE.

K:E-3155

NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ SOURCEPROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE.

K:E-3156

NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ SUB PROGRAM FILE.

K:E-3157

OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS.

K:E-3158

OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out-of-range address is specified in the functional TABLE. instruction data table.

The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specified.

-274-


Number K:E-3159

Contents

bmge

An out-of-range address is specified as a message setting address.

OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF ADDRESS. OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF PARAMETER.

An out-of-range

OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE. 1 K:E3162

address is specified in the functional

I instruction parameter.

I

An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruction parameter. I

1An out-of-range value is specified in the system parameter. 1

/ OUT OF VALUE.

K:E-3163

OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA.

An out-of-range value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data.

K:E-3164

OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE.

An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruction data table.

K:E-3165

OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA.

An out-of-range value is specified in the group data of the l/O module data. I

K:E-3166

OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA.

An out-of-range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data

1 K:E-3167

PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME.

1 K:E-3168

PROCESS ERROR.

1 K:E3172

SOURCE-PROGRAM

I

K:E3173

NOT FOUND. I

SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT FOUND.(XXXX)

1

SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B ‘XxXx’. SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER. SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. K:E-3178 ITNOT

SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA FOUND.

Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data. Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.

I

I

K:E-3179

THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED.

The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the same number.

K:E-3181

TOO LONG STRINGS.

The length of the system parameter, message data, or title data exceeds the maximum.

K:E-3187

TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 LINE.

The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter, message data, title data, symbol and comment mnemonic data, mnemonic data, or I/O module data exceeds the limit.

(-3188

(TOO MANY PARAMETERS.

functional instruction contains more parameters than 1The are required.

I K:E-3189

TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT IS OVER.

The sum of the base data and slot data values of the l/O module data exceeds the maximum.

K:E-3190

UNDEFINED

The data contains an undefined instruction.

K:E-3191

UNEXPECTED ADDRESS.

An address is specified in a location where it is not required.

K:E-3192

UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S).

A parameter is specified !or an instruction that requires no parameters.

I---I

INSTRUCTION.

K:E-3193

UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER.

A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parameter or data identifier.

K:E-3194

DATA ENTRY ERROR.

An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed.

K:E-3195

INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA.

The

symbol data contains a double-byte character. characters cannot be used in symbol data. I

I Doubkbyte

-275-


5.11.3 Warning Number

Message

Contents

K:W4100

COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND.

Only symbol data was convened to the address.

K:W4101

DATA NOT FOUND.

The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, message data, or I/O module data does not exist.

K:W4102

DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS.

K: W-4 103

F)PECTED CONTROL CONDlTlON

Nocontrol condition is specifiedforthefunctional

K:W4104

ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT ‘XxXx’.

Invalid character data exists in ‘xxxx.’

K:W4105

ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER). PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE USING ‘NO’.

System parameter ‘OP.PANEC contains an invalid value; the value is converted to “NO.”

K:W4108

ILLEGAL SYMBOL.

The symbol data is nonstandard (check levet-1). MAT-C only)

K:W4!07

INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S).

The message data contain a doubltiyte

K:W4108

INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA.

Comment data containing a double-byte character was converted without the doubltiyte character cooversion option (J option).

K:W4109

LOGICAL OPERATED WITH UNUSED REGISTER(S).

An operation was performed using a register that is not registered in the ladder data.

K:W4110

LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN REGISTER(S).

A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data.

K:W4111

MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT ‘XXXX’.

Message data xxxx contains a double-byte katakana character.

K:W4112

NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDITION (S).

Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not specified.

K:W4113

NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX ADDRESS.

No message is defined for address xxxx.

K:W4114

NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUMBERED XXXX.

K:W4115

NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED xxxx.

K:W4116

NOT FOUND ‘XXXX’ PMGCS

K:W4117

NOT USED NET COMMENT POINTER EXIST. XXXX

K:W4118

OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S).

instruction.

(For FOR-

character.

or single-byte

--

FILE.

K:W4119

OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA.

K:W4120

INVALID QUALIFIER.

K:W4121

REGISTERS OVERFLOW.

K:W4122

SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE FOUND AT END OF LADDER DATA.

During conversion to Format-B, data that does not belong to level 1 to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates that there is data subsequent to the last SPE.

K:W4123

SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE, AND SLOT.

The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data al have the same number.

K:W4124

SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP) AT I/O UNIT-B AS I/O UNIT-A.

An invalid character follows the end code “%” of the system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder data, message data, or I/O module data.

-276-


Number

Contents

Mesaage

K:W4125

SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B.

K:W4126

THE FOLLOWING DATA OF ‘XXXX WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF EXCEEDING THE LIMIT.

K:W4127

TOO MANY CONTROL CONDITIONS.

The functional conditions.

K:W4128

UNEXPECTED COIL(S).

A coil was specified when not required by the functional instruction,

K:W4129

UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION(S).

A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for which no control conditions are required.

K:W4130

REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS DATA.

Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. When the start code of thesymbol data is”%O2,” the symbol definition must not be specified more than once. The second and subsequent definitions are ignored. For information relating to the start code, see Section 4.5.8.3.

K:W4131

REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA.

The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses. Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces.

K:W4132

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYMBOL DATA.

The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum (six characters for FORMAT-A and FORMAT-B; 16 characters for FORMAT-C). The symbol data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4133

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT DATA.

The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The comment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4134

SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST

Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical symbol may be specified in more than one location.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W4135

RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY EXIST.

Two or more diierent character strings are specified for the same relay comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Relay comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W4136

COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY EXIST.

Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coil comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Coil comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces.

K:W4137

COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY EXIST.

Two or more different character strings are specified for the same comment title at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Comment titles other than that specified first are deleted.

K:W4138

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY COMMENT DATA.

The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4139

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL COMMENT DATA.

The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4140

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT TITLE DATA.

The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces.

-277-

instruction

is subject to too many control


5.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT 5.12.1 Number

Error Contents

Message

L:E-3106

NOT EXIST ‘XxXx’ FILE.

File xxxx does not exist.

L:E-3101

ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR

The currently set cassette or module does not match the currently selected machine model.

L:E-3102

FILE OPEN ERROR

The specified file cannot be opened.

L:E-3103

FILE READ ERROR

The specified file cannot be read.

L:E-3104

FILE WRITE ERROR

Data cannot be written to the specified file.

L:E-3105

FILE CLOSE ERROR

The specified file cannot be closed.

L:E-3106

INVALID RECEIVE DATA

Data other than an IS0 code has been received.

L:E-3107

TIME OUT ERROR

No response was received within a specified period after the PC issued an instruction. Check the destination’s power source, settings, cable connections and parameters (baud rateand stop bit), and whetherthe contents of CONFIGSYS are valid.

L:E-3108

ACCESS CANCELED

Access has been interrupted.

L:E-3109

FILE-ROM UNMATCH ERROR

The tile contents do not match the ROM data.

L:E-3110

CONTROL CODE ERROR

The control code is invalid.

L:E-3120

FIRST RECORD INFORMATION ERROR

The contents of the first record are invalid.

L:E-3121

ROM DATA CAN’T CONDENSE ERROR

The ROM data cannot be comoressed.

L:E-3122

PART OF ROM DATA INVALID

The ROM file data is invalid.

,

L:E-3123

ROM FILE > ROM ERROR

The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself.

L:E-3124

ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR

The ROM file format is invalid.

L:E-3125

ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT FILE

The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid.

L:E-3126

ROM COUNT ERROR

The ROM count is invalid.

L:E-3150

ROM FILE OPEN ERROR

The ROM file cannot be opened.

L:E-3151

WORK FILE OPEN ERROR

The work file cannot be opened.

L:E-3152

WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR

The work file cannot be initialized.

L:E-3153

WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR

The work file cannot be closed.

L:E-3154

S RECORD FORMAT ERROR

The S record format is invalid.

L:E-3155

WORK FILE SEEK ERROR

A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file.

L:E-3156

WORK FILE WRITE ERROR

Data cannot be written to the work file.

L:E-3157

ROM FILE WRITE ERROR

Data cannot be written to the ROM file.

L:E-3158

WORK FILE READ ERROR

The work file cannot be read.

L:E-3159

ROM FILE READ ERROR

The ROM file cannot be read.

L:E-3160

ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR


L:E-3180

ROM SET ERROR

The EROM is mounted improperly.

L:E-3181

DIAGNOSIS ERROR

An error was detected during EROM diagnosis.

L:E-3182

EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR

The EROM is faulty.

L:E-3183

COMPARE ERROR

The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents.

L:E-3184

DATA FILE WRITE ERROR

Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted.

L:E-3185

BLANK CHECK ERROR

The EROM is not yet deleted.

L:E-3186

DATA SEND ERROR

The number of data items is invalid.

-278-


Number

1

Mewage

Contents

I

PARITY ERROR

L:E-3188

ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED

The writer is in use.

L:E-3189

ROM TYPE ERROR

The ROM type is invalid.

L:E-3190

COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = , INPUT DATA = . FILE DATA =

L:E-3191

‘FL10 _ATDAT’ FILE FORMAT ERROR. HIT ANY KEY.

The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.

I

L:E-3192

MEMORY CARD ERROR

An error occurred during memory card format conversion.

L:E-3193

NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER


L:E-3194

NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR

The third parameter specified for memory card format con-

I version is invalid. MEMORY

INSUFFICIENT

L:E-3196


The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid.

L:E-3197

INVALID PMC TYPE

The activated machine is other than a model that can perform memory card format conversion.

L:E-3198

INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF CASSEl-TE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3199

INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF FILE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3200

PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR

The machine model setting tile cannot be read.

L:E-3201

INITIALIZE ERROR

Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

L:E-3202

NOT EXIST FILE

The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

L:E-3203

FILE READ ERROR

The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

L:E-3204

INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE

There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion.

L:E-3205

OUT OF MEMORY

There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion.

L:E-3206

NOT MAKE FILE

The memory card format conversion file cannot be created.

L:E-3207

NOT OPEN WORK FILE

The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.

L:E-3208

CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR

1PMC TYPE I/O ERROR

I


L:E-3195

L:E-3209

I

A parity error occurred during data transmission.

L:E-3187

An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for

I memory card format conversion. 1An I/O error occurred for the machine model settina file.

I 1

L:E-3210

BREAK PMC TYPE FILE

The machine model setting file was destroyed during an l/O operation. I

L:E-3211

IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR

The child process cannot be executed.

L:E-3212

ROM FILE TYPE ERROR


L:E-3213

FILE SEEK ERROR

A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.

L:E-3214

FILE READ ERROR

The specified file cannot be read. -I

L:E-3215

FILE OPEN ERROR


L:E-3216

NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE

The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does not exist.

L:E-3217

INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF ROM SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). I

L:E-3218

FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR

The file size cannot be obtained.

L:E-3219

1FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR

L:E-3220

1DATA SEEK ERROR

The file size cannot be changed.

-279-


(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED

(COULD NOT FILD COMMAND INTERPRETER

interpreter is not found).

-280-


Number L:E-3336

Contents

MeJ=s((e INVALID ‘X PARAMETER’ IN TEXT FILE

‘X Parameter’ in the text file is invalid.

L:E-3339

ERROR OF MODE COMMAND

The MODE command cannot be executed.

L:E-3340

I==;T INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE

The port has been successfully initialized.

L:E-3341

;;;;;RARY

The temporary file format is invalid.

L:E-3342

COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME)

The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid).

L:E-3343

COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE)

The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found).

L:E-3344

UNKNOWN PMC TYPE

The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model.

LIE-3345

PORT INITIALIZE ERROR

Port initialization failed.

L:E-3350

PORT ERROR(OVER RUN)

A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check).

L:E-3351

PORT ERROR(PARTY)

A parity error occurred (detected check).

L:E-3352

PORT ERROR(FRAMING)

A framing error occurred (detected by the l/O portstatus check).

L:E-3353

PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT)

A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check).

L:E-3354

PORT ERROR (TIME OUT)

A time out error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check).

L:E-3355

PORT ERROR (DATA OUTPUT)

A data transmission error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check).

L:E-3356

TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR

The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file (FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section of FLIO_AT.DAT.

L:E-3400

ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME.

- Unpermitted character is used in specified program name. - The program name is over 8 characters.

L:E-3401

SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS DIFFERENT.

Forrnat-AIB source program is specified. Specify F0mat-C source program.

L:E-3402

XXXX FILE I/O ERROR.

L:E-3403

UNKNOWN PMC SERIES.

Specified source program’s PMC type is unknown.

L:E-3404

XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT EXIST.

Specified directory for backup does not exist.

L:E-3500

NOT EXIST ‘XxXx’


L:E-3501

pLRf’;ARAMETER

L:E-3502

INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR

The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid.

L:E-3503

DATA FILE OPEN ERROR

The data file cannot be opened.

L:E-3504

DATA FILE READ ERROR

The data file cannot be read.

L:E-3505

CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN ERROR

The source file for which format conversion formed cannot be opened.

L:E-3506

;;;;RT

The destination opened.

L:E-3507

PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE

The numberof parameters specified in the data file is invalid.

L:E-3508

PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE

The data file contains an invalid parameter.

L:E-3509

INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION

The contents of the data file are invalid.

FILE FORMAT

FILE. COUNT

OBJECT FILE OPEN

by the I/O port status

The number of input parameters is invalid.

-281-

is to be per-

file for source file conversion

cannot be


1 Number

I I

Contents

Mesaage

1

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ

The source file cannot be read.

L:E-3511

MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR

There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E-3512

E;;;kRT


L:E-3513

CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE ERROR

SOURCE FILE FORMAT

Data cannot be written to the destination file. I

L:E3514

DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST

The data file does not exist.

L:E-3515

COCNVERT CANCEL

Conversion has been canceled.

L:E-3516

INSUFFICIENT

There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.

L:E-3600

NOT EXIST ‘XXXX’ FILE.


L:E-3601

INPUT PARAMETER COUNT ERROR

The number of input parameters is invalid.

L:E-3602

INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR

The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.

DISK SPACE

1The data file cannot be opened.

1 L:E-3603

( DATA FILE OPEN ERROR

L:E-3604

DATA FILE READ ERROR

The data file cannot be read.

L:E-3605

EE;;pT

The source file cannot be opened.

L:E-3696

CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN ERROR

The destination file cannot be opened.

L:E-3607

PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE

The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid.

L:E-3608 1 L:E-3609

I I

SOURCE FILE OPEN

PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE

1INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION

The data file contains an invalid parameter.

1The contents of the data file are invalid.

L:E-3610

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ ERROR

The source file cannot be read.

L:E-3611

MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR

There is insufficient memory to continue processing.

L:E-3612

CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT ERROR


L:E-3613

EE;;p

Data cannot be written to the destination file.

L:E-3614

DATA FILE DOSN’T EXIST

L:E-3615

COCNVERT CANCEL

Conversion has been canceled.

L:E-3516


There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing.

L:E-3617

SUM CHECK ERROR OF S RECORD

The S record check sum is erroneous.

OBJECT FILE WRITE

The data file does not exist.

L:E-3618

rFORMAT ERROR OF SO RECORD

1The SO record format is invalid.

L:E-3619

1PMC TYPE CODE ERROR

( The machine model code for the SO record is invalid.

L:E-3620

DATA CONVERT ERROR

A data conversion error occurred.

) The S record format is invalid.

L:E-3621

FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD

L:E-3622

PMC ADDRESS ERROR

The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range.

L:E-3700

NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER


L:E-3701


The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid.

L:E-3702

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY

There is insufficient memory to activate memory card fonat conversion.

-282-


Number

Messaurge

Contents

L:E-3703


The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid.

L:E-3704

INVALID PMC TYPE

The activated machine is other than a model that supports memory card format conversion.

L:E-3705

INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3766

INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF FILE SIZE)

The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3707

PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR

The machine model setting file cannot be read.

L:E-3708

INITIALIZE ERROR

Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized.

L:E-3709

NOT EXIST FILE

The memory card format conversion file does not exist.

L:E-3710

FILE READ ERROR

The memory card format conversion file cannot be read.

L:E-3711


There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion.

L:Ei3712

OUT OF MEMORY


L:E-3713

NOT MAKE FILE

The memory card fom?at conversion file cannot be created.

L:E-3714

NOT OPEN WORK FILE

The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened.

L:E-3715

CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR

An error occurred upon creating a conversion memory card format conversion.

L:E-3716

PMC TYPE l/O ERROR

An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file.

L:E-3717

BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE

The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation.

table for

L:E-3718

IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR

The child process cannot be executed.

L:E-3719

ROM FILE TYPE ERROR


L:E-3720

FILE SEEK ERROR

A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file.

L:E-3721

FILE READ ERROR

The specified file cannot be read.

L:E-3722

FILE OPEN ERROR


L:E-3723

NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE

The source file for which format conversion formed does not exist.

L:E-3724

INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF ROM SIZE)

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range).

L:E-3725

FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR

The file size cannot be determined.

L:E-3726

FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR

The file size cannot be changed.

L:E-3727

DATA SEEK ERROR

A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section

L:E-3728

ROM INFORMATION ERROR

Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section.

is to be per-

L:E-3729

FILE WRITE ERROR

Data cannot be written to the specified file.

L:E-3730

OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR

An I/O error occurred in the object file.

L:E-3731

DATA MAX OVER

The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum.

L:E-3732

$-TEA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM

Execution cannot be continued because the data size i: smaller than that of the count.

L:E-3733

INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY CARD

The size of the memory card data section is invalid.

L:E-3734

INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE

The memory card file is invalid (the identification invalid).

L:E-3735

INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE

The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E-3736

ROM PARITY ERROR

The parity value in the ROM file is invalid.

L:E-3737

PARAMETER ERROR (MEMORY CARD TYPE)

There is an invalid parameter (memory card format).

-283-

data i:


5.12.2 Warning Number

Message

Content8

L:W4100

ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TO TRANSFER? (Y/N)

L:W4101

ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE

L:W4102

XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT PMC TYPE.

Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is I same.

L:W4200

* NORMAL END

Processing ended normally.

L:W4201

* D _PROGOPT -DRAM UNMATCH

The DRAM does not match.

L:W4202

* PARITY UNMATCH

The parity does not match.

L:W4203

* CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX

Cassette size = xxxx

L:W4204

* ROM COUNT = XXXX

ROM count = xxxx

~~~~I~~;~~IE~~~YT&THE

I

j The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.

L:W4206

* ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO ROM COUNT SIZE

The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size.

L:W4207

* ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE (XXXX BYTE)

The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.

-284-


5.13 N : ON-LINE MONITOR 5.13.1 Error Contents

Message

Number N:E-3001

FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR

N:E-3003

FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR

The F-ROM is faulty. Replace the F-ROM. Contact FANUC Service.

N:E-3006

FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR

The size of the sequence program is greater than that of F-ROM. Increase the size of F-ROM. Try using the off-fine CONDENSE function.

N:E-3007

FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP

The CNC is not in emergency stop status. Set the CNC to emergency stop status.

N:E-3008

;fz%RROM

The PMC sequence program has failed. Input the sequence program again.

N:E-3030

LADDER SIZE ERROR

The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC. Check the size of the sequence program.

N:E-3031

PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RAl).

When the PMC control module type is RAl , on-line editing cannot be performed.

N:E-3036

PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION).

The size of the sequence program exceeds the option-specified size. Reduce the size of the sequence program.

N:E-3037

PMC TYPE UNMATCH.

The PMC type is invalid. Convert the machine model using the off-line function.

N:E-3038

NO OPTION (LADDER STEP).

The ladder step number option does not exist.

N:E-3041

THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS NOT READY.

Communication with the PMC has not been established. Start communication with the PMC.

N:E-3042

AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC.

Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm. Clear the cause of the PMC alarm.

N:E-3045

LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn

The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC. Reduce the size of the ladder program.

N:E-3046

THE PROGRAM IS NOT CORRESPONDING (PMC). STATUS=NN

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program.

N:E-3947

AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC ERROR STATUS = nn

Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued. Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid.

N:E-3048

LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn

The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program.

N:E-3050

INPUT INVALID

An invalid value has been entered. Enter a valid value.

N:E-3051

OBJECT BUFFER OVER

The sequence program is full. Reduce the size of the ladder program.

N:E-3054

COM FUNCTION MISSING

The usage of the COM (SUBS) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid.

N:E-3055

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING

The usage of the JMP (SUBlO) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUBBO) is valid.

PROGRAM DATA

-285-


Number

Message

Contents

N:E-3056

END FUNCTION MISSING

The usage of the ENDl, END2, END3. and END functional instructions is invalid. Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correct order.

N:E-3056

LADDER BROKEN

Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed. Input the ladder program again.

N:E-3660

CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING

The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid. Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a subprogram.

N:E-3061

COM FUNCTION MISSING (CALLSP)

TheCALLorCALLUfun&malinsbu&nissper%edbetween the COM (SUB9) and COME functionalinstructions. Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME.

N:E-3062

JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP)

Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB1 0) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid.

N:E-3063

SUB PROGRAM MISSING

The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid.

N:E-3064

SP NO. DUPLICATE

The specified subprogram number already exists. . Specify another subprogram number.

N:E-3065

SUB PROGRAM NOTHING

No subprogram exists. Create a subprogram.

N:E-3066

END FUNCTION NOTHING

The END functional instruction does not exist. Enter the END functional instruction.

N:E-3066

LBL COUNT OVER

The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum. Reduce the number of labels.

N:E-3069

LBL NO. DUPLICATE

The specified label number is already in use. Specify another label number.

N:E-3070

LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB)

The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does noi exist. Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E-3071

COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB)

The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM and COME functional instructions. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and COME. Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enterthe LBL functional instruction, together with JMPB, betweenI COM and COME.

N:E-3072

JMPB FUNCTION MISSING

The JMPB inskuctioncannotjump to other than a subprogram. Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram.

N:E-3073

LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC)

The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does noiI exist. Enter the LBL functional instruction.

N:E-3074

COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL)

The specified LBL functional instruction is specifiec between COM and COME. This instruction cannot be usec to perform a jump from between COM and COME. Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the JMPC functional instruction, together with LBL. behveer COM and COME.

N:E-3075

JMPC FUNCTION MISSING

The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than 2 subprogram. Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram.

N:E-3076

LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC)

The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists ir1 a level other than the second ladder level. Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladde r level. -

-286


Number

1

Message

Contents

N:E-3077

SYMBOL UNDEFINE

The entered symbol is not yet defined. Enter a valid symbol name.

N:E-3080

LADDER ILLEGAL

The ladder program is invalid. Input the ladder program again.

N:E-3082

ILLEGAL OPERATION

An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was made to create a relay or coil in a functional instruction). Be careful to specify operations correctly.

N:E-3084

DATA TABLE COUNT OVER

The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum. Reduce the number of data tables.

N:E-3085

EDIT BUFFER OVER

There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed. Reduce the size of the net being edited.

N:E-3090

RELAY OR COIL FORBIT

An unnecessary relay or coil exists. Delete the unnecessary relay or coil.

N:E-3691

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

The specified address is not found. Check the specified address.

N:E-3092

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL

The horizontal lines of the net are not connected. Connect the horizontal lines.

N:E3093

FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

Them is an invalii connectionbetween funckonalinstmcticns. Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are specified correctly.

N:E-3094

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING

No relay or coil exists. Add a relay or coil.

N:E-3095

VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL

The vertical lines of the net are not connected. Connect the vertical lines.

N:E-3096

PARAMETER NOTHING

No parameters are specified for a functional instruction. Specify the required parameters.

N:E-3097

ADDRESS NOT DETECTED

No address is specified. Specify an address.

N:E-3100

NET TOO LARGE

The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer. Reduce the size of the net being edited.

N:E-3102

LARGE NET APPEARED

The net is too large to be displayed. Reduce the size of the net.

N:E-3111

ERROR NET FOUND

An invalid net exists. Correct the invalid net.

N:E-3113

FUNCTION NOT FOUND

The specified functional instruction is not found. Check the number of the functional instruction.

N:E-3114

ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO

Search for a functional instruction has been performed using the wrong number. Check the number specified for the functional instruction.

N:E-3123

ROM FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

The MCARD file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the MCARD file may have been destroyed.

N:E-3124

SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

The symbol file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

N:E-3125

ROM FILE READ ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

The MCARD file cannot be read. The MCARD file may have been destroyed.

N:E-3126

ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) ERROR STATUS = nn

An error occurred when reading data from extended memory. Memory management may have been disabled. Reboot the personal computer.

-287-


1 Number

Message

1

Contents

IU:E-3130

ROM FILE WRITE ERROR NOT ENOUGH MEMORY

There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file. Memory management may have been disabled. Reboot the personal computer.

IU:E-3131

ROM FILE WRITE ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

Data cannot be written to the MCARD file. Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the name of the program to be saved.

IU:E-3132

NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

The net comment file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed.

IV:E-3140

FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in conventional

V:E-3141

FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC.

Y:E-3142

FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC.

N:E-3143

THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS WRITE-PROTECTED.

An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group, but that data table group is writ+protected. First, checkwhetherthe correct data table group is specified, then set that data table group to write-enabled status.

N:E-3144

ADDRESS NOT FOUND.

The specified address is not found. Check whether the address is specified correctly.

N:E-3150

LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT BEEN MODIFIED.

An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram when it had not been modified.

N:E-3151

AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM.

An error occurred in the ladder diagram. The system cannot switch to update or monitor. Correct the error in the diagram.

N:E-3153

TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR. NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM MEMORY

There is insuft icient memory. Reserve an area in conventional

memory or on disk.

PROGRAM READ ERROR. NOTENOUGHPROGRAM MEMORY

There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in conventional

memory.

N:E-3158

LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN MODIFIED.

The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder diagram has been modified. Update the ladder diagram.

N:E-3160

;;K;TF!JHI

The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory. Specify the correct program, or load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program.

N:E-3161

TRANSFER WAS ABORTED.

The user has canceled the transfer. If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC memory may be destroyed. Store the program again to load it into the PMC. If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is. If the program does not match that in PMC memory, load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program.

N:E-3162

NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM.

Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. Set up communication with the PMC.

N:E-3163

MISMATCH PASSWORD

The entered password is invalid. Enter a valid password.

I L

N:E-3155

PROGRAM IS

-288-

memory.


Number

Contents

Message

N:E-3164

TOO LARGE PROGRAM. NOT ENOUGH PMC’S PROGRAM MEMORY

The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program memory. Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC program memory.

N:E-3167

INVALID PROGRAM NAME.

The program name is invalid. Check the program name.

N:E-3170

CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER.

The specified range is too great. Specify a narrower range.

N:E-3171

CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION ERROR.

There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, or on disk.

N:E-3172

NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn).

When nn = 1: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-tine function.

N:E-3173

NET COMMENT COPY ERROR (nn).

Whennn=l: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3174

NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR (nn).

Whennn=l: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3175

NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR.

The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3176

NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR.

The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-tine function.

N:E-3177

NET COMMENT DATA WRITE ERROR.

The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3178

NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA.

The net comment file contains no net comment within the specified range. Check the net comments using the off-line function.

N:E-3183

THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED.

- On-line editing function and l/O menu functions are protected. Confirm keep relay. - Data table control data screen is protected. Confinn keep relay.

N:E-3184

WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE NOR EMERGENCY STOP.)

PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the sequence program.

N:E-3185

WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.)

PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or stop the sequence program.

N:E-3186

WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE AND KEY4.)

PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or set KEY4=1, or stop the sequence program.

N:E-3187

WRITE PROTECT.

Signal status is write protected. Confirm keep relay.

-289-

memory, conventional

e n

a

APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION

APPENDIX

1

(1)

for starting

Conditions When

AUTOMATIC COMPILATION DECOMPILATION

[ON-LINE

compilation

automatic

(SELECTED

or decompilation

compilation

PROGRAM)]

AND

or decompilation

has been selected

is performed

AND DECOMPILATION

according


to the following

automatic

conditions:

[Conditions/results] The

start

conditions

CONTOL

are updated

[File updating 0

from

files for the source

and the results

of updating

the results program.

of companng

the time

The conditions

are described

under

stamps

which

of the

these

files

below.

conditions]

CONTOL

file

The CONTOL line editing

@

are determined

and MCARD

MCARD

file is updated

once the source

program

has been

modified

by using the off-

program

has been

input by using

function.

file

The MCARD input/output

file is updated function

a memory-card modifying

once

(for example,

or Handy-File

the ladder

program

the source

after being transferred

format

file),

or once

by using the on-line

the off-line

from the PMC or converted

processing

has been

terminated

from after

function.

[Results] 0

When the CONTOL + Automatic

[Applicable When

file has the most recent

compilation

time stamp

is performed.

cases] no compilation

is performed

after

the

program

is edited

by using

the

off-line

function etc

Q)

When the MCARD + Automatic

[Applicable

file has the most recent

decompilation

cases]

When no decompilation using the off-line When

time stamp

is performed.

processing

is performed

input;output is terminated

after the program

after the ladder

etc

When both files have the same time stamp *

Automatic

start processing

from the PMC by

function

function

in)

is transferred

is not performed.

Al-l

program

is edited

by using

the on-line

APPENDIX

1 AUTOMATIC

COMPILATION

AND DECOMPILATION

[Applicable cases]

(Note)

.

When comprlation is performed

.

etc

after the program is edited by using the off-line function

The options applied to automatic compilation conditions, function.

are those

specified

Before attempting

or decompilation,

with [PROGRAM

to select [ON-LINE

OPTION FUNCTION],

For details of how to set options, see Section 4.5.7.

Al

-2

started under the above SETTING]

of the off-line

confirm the set options.

APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

APPENDIX

2

CHANGE

OF EACH SETTING

2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION “%%%FLSET.CNF” of FAPT LADDER

The file exits in the directory And the parameters

(Note)

are described

can be changed

%%%FLSET.CNF

performed

correctly.

described

below.

setting

parameters,

by which

the behavior

there.

in which the system

of FAPT LADDER

is installed.

by a text editor on the market.

contains

in this file is not modified

(1) Sample

FILE “Oh%% FLSET. CNF”.

is a file of the text form and some is decided,

FILE

the set values correctly,

used to determine

the functions

Do not, therefore,

attempt

described to modify

system

operation.

in this manual

any data other

If data

may not be

than the items

of “%%%FLSET.CNF”

;=======================I==============================================

FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File ( 'key word =' <= 9characters ; ,.============r==============IPI-PIIPrPII============================= ;

I

lv; .

========

System

======E=

information

ierl=AOBB-9201-J503 Version 01.0; rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991-1995 FANUC LTD.: ======== System Setup ======E lS: :

editor =*, , ladkey = 1; ;

Text Editor Ladder editing key buffer ( 1 <= ladkey <= 16 )

size

1:Check symbol (level-l) for IEC standard 2:No check I

lU:

========

Utility

Information

4 = UTILITY; , Fl = DOS / command.com; F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr-pf103400b.tbl; F5 =* F6 =I F7 =; F8 =; F9 =* FlO=; : [EOF]

======= Utility

Guidance

[Fl] Soft Key Guidance [FZ] Soft Key Guidance [F3] Soft Key Guidance [F4] Soft Key Guidance [F5] Soft Key Guidance [F6] Soft Key Guidance [F7] Soft Key Guidance [FE] Soft Key Guidance [F9] Soft Key Guidance [FlO] Soft Key Guidance

A2 - 1

61 EXE 6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE

)

APPENDIX

(2) Registering

2 CHANGE

OF EACH SETTING

FILE

a command in the utility

(a) Function A tool which is executed initial or off-line menu.=

(b)

under

DOS can be registered

in the

[UTILITY]

function

on the

Key word 11 Utility Information Items “F5 = ” to “FlO = ” are displayed under “IJ; For these items, describe the tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify is modified, the currently displayed characters, such as V and F5 =. If such a character system does not recognize the assignment.

(c) Format Tool name displayed

on the utility screen to the right of : are assumed to be a comment. w [Fl ] Soft key Guidance & EXE

Characters

Delimiter Function

belween

displayed

name

and command

key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters registered tool are as follows: . Tool name : 70 characters . Registered tool : 40 characters

which

can

be used

(or 35 double-byte

AZ-2

to specify

characters)

the

tool

name

and

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

APPENDIX 3.1

CONVERSION

3

Differences

(1)

Source

while

types

supports

FAPT LADDER-II

three

source

supports

program

I

source

program

and FORMAT-C,

type

FORMAT-A

FORMAT-B

FORMAT-C

(I(Note1)

O(Note1)

O(Note1)

X

The supported

source

to the relevant

FAPT LADDER

MANAGEMENT

FORMAT-B,

type.

Supported

FAPT LADDER-II

0

FORMAT-A,

model

FAPT LADDER

SAMPLE

types:

only the FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER

(Note 1)

PROGRAM

from FAPT LADDER

program

FAPT LADDER

OF SEQUENCE

program

types

0

X

also vary with the PMC model.

For details,

manual.

OF FORMAT-C

FORMAT-C This source

program

The FORMAT-C

type is used on FAPT LADDER-II.

source

program

is organized

by below

“C: y DATA-Y PRG - C” as source

c A case of specifying

files.

program

>

c: tc data y PRG

-CONTROL SYSPARAM . TITLE XSYMBOL.xxx MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVEL1 .#LA LEVEL2.#LA LEVEL3.#LA Pyyy.#LA Pzzz.#SS NETCMT.xxx OPTION -. MCARD

h

(Notel) (Note2) (Note3)

Cy

‘xxx’is

number

of multr file managrng.

Only for use LEVEL3 ‘yyy’,

Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file l/O Module data file First level ladder data file Second level ladder data file Third level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Setting of option Memory card format file

ladder

at PMC-RC4RC4(STEP).

‘IZZ’ is number of sub-program.

A3 - 1

(Note

1)

(Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 1)

refer


0

FORMAT-A This source

program

type is only used on FAPT LADDER.

The source

program

is managed

two or more

source

names.

A single directory

can contain

programs.

- xxxxxxxx.#CN

: Ftle managtng

- xxxxxxxx.#PA

: File storing

- xxxxxxxx.#TA

: File storing the title data

- xxxxxxxx.#SY

: File storing

symbols

-xxxxxxxx.#c1

: File storing

comments

user programs

system

parameters

- xxxxxxxx.#C2

: File storing comments

- xxxxxxxx.#ME

: File storing messages

- xxxxxxxx.#l0

: File storing the I10 module

- xxxxxxxx.#LA

: File storing

(xxxxxxxx

0

using the following

is the specified

(reserve)

data

ladder

source

program

name.)

FORMAT-B This source

program

A directory

is created

program

type is only used on FAPT LADDER.

is managed

more source

- CONTROL

with

the

under

specified

the following

source names.

programs.

: Ftle managing

the source

- SYSPARAM

File storing

system

- TITLE

File storing

the title data

- SYMBOL

File storing

symbols

- COMMENT1

File storing

comments

- COMMENT2

File stonng

comments

- MESSAGE

File storing

messages

program

parameters

(reserve)

- IOMODULE

File storing

the I10 module

- LEVEL1 .#LA

File storing

ladder

of the first level

data

LEVEL2.#LA

File storing

ladder

of the second

- LEVELX#LA

File storing

ladder

of the third level

- PYYYYY.#LA

File storing

ladder

subprograms

- PYYYYY.#SS

File storing

step sequence

(yyyyy

program A single

IS a subprogram

level

subprograms

number.)

143-2

name. directory

In the cannot

directory, contain

the two or

APPENDIX

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

(2) Elimination of ROM format files FAPT LADDER ROM

format

supports

files

because

added

to the source

Some

FAPT

LADDER-II.

ROM format an object

program.

LADDER however,

object

files.

file called

FAPT

an MCARD

The data flow is outlined

operating

procedures

does not require

LADDER-II,

require

however,

file (memory-card

does

not use

format

file) is

files.

FAPT

support

ROM

below. the

input

the input of ROM format

of ROM

format

files.

(a) FAPT LADDER

External

devices

CNC Memory-card Handy-File

0 Compile @ Output (in ROM format)

format format

file

file

@ Decompile @I Input (in ROM format)

(b) FAPT LADDER-II

External

devices

CNC Memory-card Handy-File

m Compile (3 Output (In object

Conversion

3.2

Because format

FAPT

LADDER-II

Programs

supports

only

file

format)

before

source

files

and

does

not

they can be used with FAPT LADDER-II.

type

file

developed

for use with FAPT LADDER

any of the following

(1) Conversion

FORMAT-C

files must be converted

file of other than the FORMAT-C

ROM format

by applying

@I Decompile @I Input (in object

format

file

from FAPT LADDER

files, the following

Source

format)

format

can be converted

for use with FAPT LADDER-II,

methods:

to a mnemonic file

A FAPT LADDER It to a mnemonic

program

can be converted

to a FAPT LADDER-II

file.

A3-3

program

by first converting


Convert

a program

to a mnemonic

file, using

the FAPT

LADDER

mnemonic

editing

function,

then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(2) Conversion A FAPT

to a memory-card LADDER

converting Convert

a program

LADDER

converting

program

FORMAT-C,

(4) Conversion

format

be converted

models

to a FAPT

LADDER-If

program

by

first

file. format

fde,

using

[MEMORY

CARD]

of

the

FAPT


source file can

it to a FORMAT-C

FAPT LADDER

also

a memory-card

function

to a FORMAT-C

(3) Conversion A FAPT

to

input/output

file

format can

it to a memory-card

LADDER.

Some

program

also

source

be converted

to a FAPT

LADDER-II

program

by

first

file.

support

FORMAT-C

source

files.

Convert

the source

file type to


of a ROM format file

FAPT LADDER-II

can convert

a ROM format

file to a memory-card

format

file, as follows:

(a) Operation

0

Select

[OFF-LINE

FUNCTION]

from

the initial

menu,

then

select

F6 (I/O].

The [l/O]

screen appears. @

(Note)

Press the c F9>

key on the (I.‘01 screen.

No item corresponding key is, however,

(@I Selecttng

to the < F9>

The II/O (ROM FILE)] screen

key is displayed

appears.

on the [l/O screen.)

The

effective.

F2 [READ]

ROM file and rnemory

displays

the

II0

card file names,

A3-4

(ROM

FILE

then convert

> MCARDI the file.

screen.

Enter

the

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Fl

KEY

WRITE ( Menory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1

F2

KEY

RERO

! Uemory Card c- ROM FORMfllFILE 1

Fig. 6.3.2 (a)

3.3 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence By changing

the mnemonic

file, it is possible

to convert

another

type of it.

3.3.1

Converting by system parameter

On the following parameter However,

PMC type,

of the mnemonrc format

it IS possible

Program some

PMC

type

sequence

program

to

editing

to edit the different

PMC type

data

by changing

system

data.

of the system

parameter.

usable

functional

instructions

and range

of address

are

different.

CNC TYPE

Power

Mate-MODEL

FS IS-MODEL

[Example:

PMC-RB

PMC TYPE

PMC-PA1 IPA3

D

PMC-NB/NB2

B

+ PMCRC3]

(1) Set the PMC type to PMC-RB

and convert

(2) Change

of the mnemonic

(3) Set

the

the system PMC

type

frle( -+(2)) to source

parameter to

PMC-RC3

on

the original

FAPT

source

program

file to PMC-RC3 LADDER

program.

A3 - 5

system

to mnemonic

with a standard and

convert

file.

text editor. the

mnemonic


Original

file (PMC-RB)

Converted

%@A

%@A

%@O

%@O

2 BCD

Change system

3 NO

2 BCD parameter

1

4 PMC-RB

file (PMCRC3)

3 NO

4 PMC-RC3

7 100

5 000000

9 YES

6 50

%

7 100

%@l

%

01 ABC-KIKAI

%@l

02 S-DRILL

01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL

% %

%@5 x000 1

0

1 ID16C

YO08 1

0

4 OD32A

%@5 x000 1

0

1 IDlCC

%

YO08 1

0

4 OD32A

%@E

% %@E

3.3.2

Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER FILE NAME FSOT

-

CNV.SYM

APPLICABLE

PMCCNC

TYPE

-+ PMCRAlIRA2IRAYRB

PMC-LjMIM(MMC) (FSO-T)

lRB2/RB3’RB4’RB5’ RBG/RC/RC3/RC4 (FS16118/20-T)

REFERENCE FANUC

MATERIALS

PMC

PROGRAMMING (LADDER

MANUAL

LANGUAGE) B-61 863E

FSnM

-

CNV.SYM

PMC-L’MIM(MMC)

+

PMCRAl’RA2IRA3IRB lRB2/RB3/RB4/RB51

(FSO-M)

RBG/RC’RC3/RC4 (FS16/18/20-M) PM-C - CNV.SYM

PMC-P (Power

+ Mate -MODEL

(Note)

The converter

file is stored

PAliPA3 (Power

C)

Mate

-MODEL

in the drrectory

5).

A3-6

D’F’H)

APPENDIX

of module

system

floppy

disk (Vol.


[Example:

PMC-P -+ PMC-PA

1

(1) Set PMC type to PMC-P. and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.) (2) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit mode without editing the ladder program.

(3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (-+B.) (4) Quit FAPT

LADDER.

and actrvate any standard text editor.

(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.) (5) Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) (PM-CCNV). (6) Replace

to the converter file

(-C.)

the ladder data of mnemonic

mnemonic file (PMC-P).

file (PMC-PAl)

to the ladder data of the original

(+D.)

(7) Complete the text editor, and activate FAPT (8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl.

LADDER.

and convert the mnemonic file(5) to source program.

(9) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data. Convert file PM-C - CNV.SYM %@2 A. Original file (PMC-P)

G0004.3

G68.3

G0005.0

G95.0

%@A

60005.2

G95.2

%@O

60005.3

G95.3

1 2048

60005.6

683.7

%

G0006.2

G75.2

%@l

G0006.4

G74.4

%@A

%

G0007.2

668.2

%@O

%@2

60007.5

684.5

B. Converted file (PMC-PAl)

2 BINARY

%

3 NO

%@3

4 PMC-PA1

RD X21.4

X1027.4

X23.4

%

WRT 6121.4

X1027.5

X23.5

%@l

RD.NOT X22.3

X1027.6

X23.6

%

WRT.NOT 6122.3

X1027.7

X23.7

%@2

SUB 1

%

% D. insertron

SUB 2

,

%@3 c

WRT G121.4

%

RD.NOT

%@4

WRT.NOT

X22.3

%

6122.3

%@5

SUB 1

%

SUB 2

b@E

b b@E

A3-7


3.3.3 Data

program for another program

Using data in a sequence (such

program

as title,

symbol

8 comment,

can be used for another

The range

of addresses

manual

: Using the symbols

[Example

sequence

used varies

Refer to the programming

ladder,

message,

program,

& comment

in a sequence

may have

to be modified.

method.

They

data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 9 YES % %@l

%@l

x000.1

to another.

data)

models.

%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES %

%@2 x000.0

by the following

from one model

of the respective

110 module

and

2PX.M 2PY.M

Insert

%@2 x000.0 x000.1

;I--

%

ZPX.M ZPY.M

% %@E

Converting

Usually,

a step sequence

mnemonics

program

according

are used to convert

to the model

a ladder

program

However,

a ROM ftle is used only when a step sequence

converted

for the PMCRC4(STEP

The operation, program

by which

according program

to the model. for the PMC-RB4(STEP

SEQ) is

SEC).

the source

C: Y DATA ‘f SAMPLERC.

program

C: ‘f DATA Y SAMPLER6

is described

is converted

to the source

as follows.

[Procedure] Compile

the step sequence

and create

Create

a object

file.

the new source

The name of object

program

(Create

program

C: ‘f DATAY

C: Y DATAY

C: Y DATA?

file, which is creattng

C: y > RENAME

SAMPLERB

SAMPLERB.

(STEP

SEQ)

SAMPLERC.

by (1.1, is change

C: -Y DATA Y SAMPLERB

A3-8

for PMC-RB4

MEM)

as follows

from command

C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

line.


(;ii

Select

C: 7 DATA SLSAMPLERC

@

Select

F4 (DECOMPILE)

The program

is converted.

the PMCRC4(STEP

3.3.4

from the offline

The step sequence

sequence

source

program

screen.

menu.

program

read into FAPT LADDER

a ladder

program:

This is the example

program,

‘PMC-RB4

program from/to another PMC type

a mnimonic

file is genelally

(STEP SEQ) +

of converting

PMCRC4

used.

(STEP

But for converting

SEQ)‘,

an object

source

program

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERB

: PMC-RB4

(STEP

to

source

program

C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

: PMCRC4

(STEP SEQ).

0

the step sequence

program

Make new source

program,

Change

the object

Select

@J Select

And the step

C: Y DATAY

C: Y DATAY

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERB

and generate

the object

file.

SAMPLERC.

(STEP SEQ)‘.)

file name @ as DOS prompt

1C: v > RENAME

@

SEQ)

MEM is generated.)

(Set PMC type to ‘PMC-RC4

01

file is suitable.

]

Compile

(C: Y DATA y SAMPLERB.

0

a step

operation,

from

[Operation

can be used for

SEQ).

Convert step sequence

For converting

from the select

C: M DATAY

SAMPLERC

as below.

SAMPLERB

at ‘Program

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLE%

1

selection’.

F4 key (Decompile).

sequence

program

C:Y DATAY

SAMPLERC

is now

available

for PMC-RC4

(STEP

SEQ.

3.4 3.4.1

Transfer From P-G Function for Transferring

This function

is used

to transfer

data

Data between the P-G and PC in ASCII

Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232

cable.

(mnemonic) [FLOADAT]

A3-9

format

between

a P-G (including

is for IBM PC/AT.

the


3.4.1.1

Command input during startup

(1) Uploading Loads the FAPT LADDER

FLOADAT

When

directory.

File is exist.

data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

of file for storing

a file with the same

current

(2)

[name

_

mnemonic

name

the following

Over write?

uploaded

data]

as the file specified

message

_

-u (for IBM PC/AT)

for receiving

data

already

exists

in the

is displayed.

Downloading Loads the FAPT LADDER

mnemonic

data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232

port.

I FLOADAT

As shown

[name

_

above,

-u: Uploads

of file for storing

the load commands

downloaded

data]

have the following

_

’

-d (for IBM PC/AT)

two parameters:

data from the P-G to the PC.

-d: Downloads

data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note)

The above

3.4.1.2

Communications

parameters

can be specified

with either

lowercase

or uppercase

characters.

settings

PC side IBM PC’AT

senes

(PC DOS MODE

command)

MODE

COMl:

4800,E.7,2

MODE

COMl:

9600,E,7.2

(for 9600 baud)

P-G side IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG,BRlO

(Note 1)

The baud

(for 9600 baud)

rate can be set to either

baud rate is set to 9600.

4800

the parameter

or 9600. BRlO

However,

must be added

note

that when

the PC

to the baud rate setting

for the P-G.

(Note 2)

It is necessary using

this

(Chapter The CN number CNl

to CN4.

specified

please

restore

the

setting

only for doing this operation.

communications

settings

as the

After

section

2.1

1).

is not fixed.

For the P-G or P-G Mark

For the P-G Mate,

note that the CN number cables

to set these communications

function,

selected

in Appendix

the CN number

II, the CN number

can be any setting

here must match

8.

A3-10

the CN number

can be any setting

from CNl

to CN3.

of the IO command.

from

However, Use the


Operation example During uploading OperalIon

Example

procedure

of input and screen

contents

-z PC > < PG z= Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command

settings.

;

IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG(,BRlO)

< PC > IBM PC/AT Series:

Enter MODE

i

(See Section

command

i

Settings)

:

Press the [F2] key to select

:

no.2.

;

FLOADAT

< PG > Store transmission

< PC > Execute

FLOADAT.

< PG > Set [F6] ON.

settings.

data in P-G memory.

Enters waiting

Select

slate.

no.4 on the menu.

: < PC >

2 of Communications

FILENAME

“LOADER

menu

item

-u

START”

is displayed.

!

< PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu.

; < PG >

Beglns transmission. Zompletes

is displayed.

transmission.

-z PG > Returns

i < PC > “Operation

to the menu.

< PC > The message displayed,

“Operation

followed

ANY KEY”.

During

“EXECUTING”

Complete”

by the prompt

is “HIT

Hit any key to end operation.

j

Complete”

is displayed.

“HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

j :

downloading

Operation

Example

procedure

of input and screen

contents

c PC > < PG > Turn on power. c PG > Enter IO command -z PC > IBM PC/AT series command

key.

Enters

c PC > Execute

: Enter MODE

;

IO NC,CNl

i

(See Section

Select

waiting

is displayed.

state.

FLOADAT. FLOADAT

FILENAME

: -c PC > “Output

transmission.

Zompletes

,F6

2 of Communications

i c PG > “EXECUTING”

no.2 on the

; 3egins

,(BRlO,)Fl

_ Settings)

setting

Turn on [Fl] menu.

settings.

Start”

-d is displayed.

transmission.

< PG > Returns

to the menu.

-z PC > The message displayed, ANY KEY”.

“Operation

followed

Complete”

by the prompt

IS “HIT

Hit any key to end operation.

A3-11

’ -ZPC > “Operation j

Complete”

“HIT ANY KEY”

is displayed.

is displayed.

APPENDIX

3.4.1.3 Durinq

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

Protocol uploadinq

When

the

FLOADAT

issued

for the P-G and reception

transmission

command

is executed begins.

on the

a communications

After all data has been

received,

request

is

DC 3 is sent and

is completed.

0

DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmlssion

0

Data is received.

(Z$J Completion @

PC side,

code is received

and reception

request).

is completed.

DC 3 code is sent.

Transmisston

and reception

both

use the

l-byte

machlne-dependent

BIOS

call for input

and

output.

Durinq

downloading

After

the P-G issues

activated

a transmission

request,

in the PC, then transmission

transmission

begins.

the waiting

After all data has been

state.

sent,

FLOADAT

is

DC 4 is sent and

is completed.

0

The P-G issues DC 1.

8

DC 2 code is sent to the P-G

0

Data is sent.

@I DC 4 code

Transmlsslon

the P-G enters

is sent.

and reception

both

use the

l-byte

than

reception

machine-dependent

BIOS

call for input

and

is performed

by

output.

3.4.1.4 When

BUSY control the transmtsslon

issuing effectively

the DC 1 and

speed

is faster

DC 3 codes.

In the

processing,

IBM PC/AT

has the same resull.

A3-12

series,

BUSY there

control

is no X parameter,

which


3.4.1.5

Data start and end codes

The system

WIII automatrcally

is used.

When

none

determine

of these

codes

which are

of the following

used,

an error

seven

pairs of start and end codes

message

is displayed

and

operation

terminates.

(Note) shown

The end codes here must appear

the beginning other

words,

of a line. strictly

at In

speaking,

a data reception

end code is

actually

by the

denoted

sequence code.

CR + LF + an end

End codes

appearing

(% etc.)

within comments

are ignored.

3.4.1.6

Data conversion (return codes)

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, (ODH) followed

(2) When a CR code

(ODH) IS recerved,

(3) When an end code (DE) IS received,

3.4.1.7

Transmission

Discarded

After the end code downloading,

into two characters,

the first of which

is CR

it is discarded.

CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended

to it in that order.

and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received,

-

it is converted

by LF (OAH).

I

(DE) has been

data is discarded.

Valid data -

sent or received,

then the file is closed.

A3-13

DC 3 is sent for uploading

or DC 4 is sent for


3.4.1.8

Error detection and messages

This software

(1)

detects

the following

When there is an error in the command Error in the file name,

(2)

four types

Parameter

Error FILENAME

When the specified file cannot

Cannot

line

-u. or -d.

FLOADAT

Output

of errors.

-u/-d set parameter.

file cannot be found

open output

(FILNAME,

upload

or download.)

be found

or file for receiving

cannot

be opened.

file

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER

format

is sent or received

Wrong data received

I

(4) When there is a definite

problem

.

with the start code,

Start Code error detected or there is a definite

problem

with the end code

I

End code error detected

This software

only detects

This software

does not support

I

errors

in the command detection

of errors

line and in the FAPT LADDER in the contents

format.

of FAPT LADDER

data.

Messaqes

When

the file name

the following

message

File is exist.

specified

as the file for receivrng

is displayed. Over write?

A3 - 14

data already

exists

in the current

directory,

APPENDIX

3.4.1.9

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

Error detection and handling

1.

Incorrect

entry

found

2.

Specified

file cannot

3.

Data

in the command

be opened.

not in the FAPT

The followrng

line.

causes

LADDER

format

was sent

can be considered

for the above

l

The end code has been omitted

l

The start code has been omitted

l

Garbage

data exists

at the beginning

l

Garbage

data exists

between

l

The file format

When any of the above

During screen. menu

downloadrng,

At the same time,

(% or %@E was omitted). (%@‘,

where

l

is A or 0 to 5. was omitted)

of the file.

different

is detected,

if an error

errors:

each unit of data.

is completely

errors

or received.

from the FAPT LADDER

the current

is detected

a %, %@E

operation

on the

or other

is canceled.

PC, the

end code

format.

system

will return

to the

is sent to the P-G to return

DOS

rt to the

screen.

4. Others

l

When,

for some reason,

(When the power

When

data

data transfer When transfer

data

transfer

during

(To interrupt

is Interrupted

must be started

is interrupted

to the PC or P-G is interrupted

is interrupted

is restarted. transfer

data transfer

uploadrng,

the waiting

during

the system state,

downloading,

over from the beginning.

A3-15

during operation,

press the

etc.)

will enter -z CTRL >

data

a waiting

state

until

and

data

+ ).

becomes

corrupt

APPENDIX

APPENDIX When a mnemonic standard

symbol

STANDARD

4

file and the standard name provided

SYMBOL symbol

The standard

DATA

DATA

data are combined,

it is possible

to use the

DATA FILE NAME

FS16/18-T

F16&F18-T.SYM

FS16/18-M

FiG&F18-M.SYM

Power

Mate-MODEL

D

PM-D.SYM

Power

Mate-MODEL

H

PM-H.SYM

data is stored

in the directory

symbol

SYMBOL

by FANUC.

CNC TYPE

(Note)

4 STANDARD

A4-1

APPENDIX

of system

floppy

(Vol. 5).

APPENDIX

APPENDIX This

FOR CHANGING

5 TOOL FOR CHANGING

function

program

5 TOOL

is a tool(CHGMES)

of FANUC

This tool extracts The message

for easy

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

changing

the

DATA (CHGMES)

DATA (CHGMES)

message

data

incorporating

sequence

.

PMCs

only message

data from Handy

data in CNC(PMC)

file format

can be replaced

file.

with this extracted

data,

if both

message

data

size are the same. This tool is usefull when it is necessary example:

Supporting

< Method

(1)

of Message

Memory

check

(‘1

the message

the same check

program.(For

program

of the original

data

of the message

execute

is compiled.

changing

with the

ladder

“compare

and the ladder

file”,

for

then

this tool

to the NC by using the.memory

card or

data size.

PMCs > PMC-MODEL

PROCEDURE

RA3RB3’RB4!RB5/RB6’RC3/RC4INB/NB2

OF THE MESSAGE

Load the basic message

ladder

file of handy

disk on the PMC input/output

(2) Input the “CHGMES” file(handy

file format

operation

command

with

DATA CHANGING

([l/O]

the

screen).

message

data

for

changing

and

dummy

ladder

file format).

(3) The message input/output

data on the NC is changed operation

OPERATING

It IS necessary

(1)

when the source

top address

for changrng

floppy

2.

symbol

This tool

FANUC

1.

each

IS output

to be the same value.

data files in one ladder

size Check >

changing

execute

to use some message

message.)

map information

Please

(2)

multi-lingual

by loadtng

the output

file of this tool on the PMC

(I l/O] screen).

ENVIRONMENT

to use following

operating

environment

for this tool.

Memory 235Kbytes

or more

main memory

is required

when

activating

this function

without

FAPT

LADDER.

(2)

Temporary

files

This function

generates

is set by environmental This

function

environmental It is necessary

generate variable

variable

temporary “TMP”

temporary “IMP”

temporary

files for work area on the drive/directory

$TMPW.T* files are deleted

which

of PC-DOS.

files

on

the

route

directory

of current

is not set.

to free max.65KBytes

$TMPD.T*, (These

following

disk space

for these

temporary

(n=oo-99) by this functron

A5 - 1

automatically.)

files.

drive

when

APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

(3) Hard disk It is necessary

to use following

l

For installation

l

To generate

68KBytes temporary

65KBytes

files

(In case of environmental of PC-DOS

disk space.

variable

“TMP”

set on hard disk)

TOTAL

3.

133KBytes

INSTALLATION

Please

copy

EXE-FILE

(_CHGMES.EXE)

to any

directory

from

FAPT

LADDER

system

floppy

disk(Vol.3). Key in ‘*

CHGMES”

on the Installed

CHGMESEXE RB3DtJMMY.SFM. Example

directory,

. ASC2lMG.EXE RB3BASIC.SFM

files(.SFM)

are used

to confirm

then following

files are generated.

. IMG2ASC.EXE

:

Execute

files (. EXE)

. RB3MES.SFM

:

example

files(.SFM)

the

installation

of this function

by activating

example

command.

4.

ACTIVATION

Key in following

command

at the DOS prompt

activated

in the utility.(No.9

of FAPT LADDER

main

menu). Or,Please

change

the directory

(It is not necessary

to change

Then key in followrng

CHGMES

[INPUT

in whrch this tool is installed. the directory

the “PATH”

is set.)

FILE j

[OUTPUT

FILE]

( [COMPARE

[PMC TYPE]

: : A handy file format file that consists

INPUT FILE

to replace

OUTPUT

when

command.

FILE

the message

this file by compiling

the source

format

file using FAPT LADDER.

: : A handy file format message By loading

of a dummy

ladder

data in the basic message

Create

This file contains

FILE] )

and message

ladder

data

file.

file and converting

file created

only message

to a handy

file

by this tool.

data.

this file to the CNC, message

data in the CNC memory

can be

substituted. PMC TYPE

: : PMC TYPE (RAl Please

or RAZ or RA3...etc.)

key in PMC TYPE that is defined

Error will occur at key in other COMPARE (Optional)

FILE : :

Basic message Please This

ladder

than applied

file (Handy

refer to the Fig.“Operation tool

compares

“COMPARE guarantee crashing

FILE” that

only

message to

determine the

c Applied

message

PMCs.

file format) outline”. size

of

the

if there will

be

“INPUT

is a match. correctry

other data when you load the ‘OUTPUT

A5-2

PMCs > item.

FILE”

and

the

Then,

you

can

replaced

FILE’ to CNC.

without


< Outline

of Operation

Basic message

> Message

ladder

VI

t

Generation,

Editing

for changing

+

Check the SYMBOL address by memory display.

COMPILATION

INPUT/OUTPUT

(F4:FLOPPY

ladder

VI

-+

+

I

+ Dummy

CASSETTE

Handy

File)

top map

I

FLOPPY

lb

shanging

to message

1 CHGMES %l

(Note)

[In. file]

x2

El:

(Note)

[Out. file] 1x2

J

at [l/O)screen

It is possible

Please

operation

CARD

to load

data for changing

of ROM file

of PMC.

by memory

card

only

for FSlG-B,

FS18-B,

FS-20,

FS21-B,

and

(PMC-NB). refer to the following

card or handy FANUC

MEMORY

FLOPPY

(Note) Only message

FS15-B

this function) 1 (pmc type] ([Camp. file]) %3

I

CNC Loading

ROM data(Using

PMC MODEL

PROGRAMMING

manual

file. It is not possible

about

detailed

operation

of loading

to load on boot screen.

PAl/PAYRAl!RA2.!RA3/RBiRB2/RB4iRCiRC3/RC4/NB

MANUAL

(LADDER

LANGUAGE)

A5-3

(B-61863E/06)

by the memory

APPENDIX

5 TOOL

FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

USING EXAMPLE

5. Check

the installation

There are some

of this function

sample

by using the following

files in FAPT LADDER

RB3DUMMY.SFM

: :

Message

RB3BASIC.SFM

: :

Basic message

RB3MES.SFM

: :

system

ladder

FILE”

ladder

file (Handy

the result

file is a normal data.

file format)

file format)

data + Symbol&Comment

(Message

data(5OKB))

file,

this

output

It is possible

this function.

(END1 + ENDZ))

file (Handy

data (50KB) + Ladder

Data for checking

sample

disk for checking

data (50KB) + Ladder

(Message

(This

floppy

data and dummy

(Message

example.

when

to check

result

tool

data)

execute

for above

by comparing

“OUTPUT

and this file.)

Execute

as the following

(In this case the system

is installed

in marn

body.)

(‘1

Please

key in the following

A: Iy > CHGMES You can specify

(2) Following

any name

file is generated

USERTEST.SFM

(3) Check

6.

USERTEST.SFM

for “OUTPUT

on current (Message

FILE”.ln

RB3BASIC.SFM

< return >

this example,“USERTEST.SFM”

is used.

data (50KB))

USERTEST.SFM

DIFFERENCES

RB3

drive.

the result by using “FC/A”(PC-DOS

A: M > FC/A If “NO

command.

RB3DUMMYSFM

COMMAND).

RB3MES.SFM

ENCOUNTERED”

IS drsplayed.

the result is correct.

ERROR MESSAGES Meaning

Message chgmes

: PMC type unmstch

and countermeasure

PMC type does not match

(pmc type)

between

applied

PMCs. chgmes

: PMC type unmatch

PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do

(input file)

not match. chgmes

: PMC type unmatch

(compare

PMC type of compare

file)

file and key in PMC

type do not match. chgmes (compare

: Message

Message

sizes of (input file) and

ftle) are mismatched

size of input file and compare

not agree. adding

Please

some dummy

file. Please compile chgmes

: Cannot

confirm

function

ASC2lMG.EXE

start ASC2lMG

directory

A5-4

adjust

the message

message

file do size by

to the input

the MAP display

on the

of FAPT LADDER. does not exist in the same

of CHGMES.EXE.


Meaning

Message chgmes

: Cannol

IMG2ASC.EXE

start IMG2ASC

directory chgmes

: Cannot

make temporary

file

: Cannot

make temporary

. It is impossible

file

$tmp’.tOO

: Cannot

close file $tmpd

(w).t”

Temporary Please

asc2img

to make temporary

: Cannot

allocate

memory

: Conversion

area in Input is

conflicted asc2img

: Unknown

the dtsk space.

is insufficient.

Ladder

header

Please

re-make

Illegal format

file type

the format, asc2img

: (input file) : Record

No.*

There

has

Please

because

exist.

file can not be closed.

check

Memory

(“bytes)

to set the file name,

-$tmp’.t99

or more memory, asc2img

file.

Disk is insufficient.

$tmwd.t” chgmes

does not exist in the same

of CHGMES.EXE.

It is impossible

$tmpd.t” chgmes

and countermeasure

Please

free up 235KB

and re-activate.

of the input file is crushed. the input file, and re-activate.

of the Input file.

Please

change

and re-activate.

is an invalid correct

data of input file.

as error message,

and

reactivate. asc2lmg

: Cannot

open file

There

asc2img

: Cannot

close file

It is impossible Please

asc2img

: Cannot

: Cannot

allocate

check

to close the file. the disk space.

It is impossible

wnte

Please Img2asc

is no input file.

memory

(“bytes)

Memory

check

to write the temporary

is insufficient.

or more memory, img2asc

: Cannot

wrote

It IS impossible Please

A5-5

check

file.

the disk space. Please

free up 235KB

and re-activate. to write the output

the disk space.

file.

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

APPENDIX

6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

If a CNC or off-line program

programmer

to a memory

programmer

operating

Series

operating

card, the sequence on an earlier

4080. edition

on an upgraded program

edition

edition

is used

to output

a sequence

may not be able to be Input to a CNC or off-line

(see below).

06 A08B-XXXX-J503.

editions

01.1 and later

f

/’ /’ I I , I

/

.&’

, I’

,’ :

.,

,.

-

-,

II ., ”

4080, editron 04 4047, edition 01 4054, edition 01

Series Series Series

CNC

: Operating

: Operating

Cases

l

ii) and (5) where

on an upgraded

on an earlier

input.‘output

edrtion -f-

-

: Unconditionally

possible

+ -- -

- - - -)

: Possible

some

is possible

under some

condition,

Cases 0’) and (?! operatton

under

condition

edition

output

:

No special

Input

:

Use the BOOT SYSTEM

IS required. to enter a sequence

A6-1

program

are explained

below.

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

7 CAUTIONS

7 CAUTIONS

FOR USING THE O/S

FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.1 0

SMARTDRV.EXE When SMARTDRV.EXE Enable

Be

is used with write caching

especially

pay attention

to the following:

SMARTDRV.EXE

write caching

careful

enabled,

when

the

AUTOEXEC.BAT

contains

a

command

line

of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

Wwtoml When SMARTDRV.EXE The following

l

is used with write caching alarm occurs

enabled,

the following

symptom

during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC

writer,

occurs. disabling

entry. Alarm message

:

“Received

data Invalid”

(for the PC-9801)

“OVERRUN”

(for the IBM/PC

and compatible)

[Measure] When SMARTDRV.EXE

is used, disable

a.

Drive where

the FAPT LADDER

b.

Drive where

ROM format

Example)

Refer

disk drives:

exists

system

is on drive

A, and a ROM format

disable

write caching

file is to be

on drive B

SMARTDRV

to the Microsoft

descriptions

system

for the following

files are created

When the FAPT LADDER created

write caching

a b

Windows

+

3.1 Function

about how to use SMARTDRV.EXE.

A7 - 1

Guide,

for drives

supplied

from

A and B

Microsoft,

for detailed

APPENDIX

APPENDIX Use the cables

8 DATA TRANSFER below

to transfer

8

DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

CABLES

data from a PC to a CNC,

ROM writer

(FA writer

or PMC writer),

or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1.

For IBM PC/AT IBM PC/AT

25-pin female connector IBM PC/AT cable CNC, ROM writer,

2.

or P-G

For IBM PSI2 IBM PS!2

CNC, ROM wnter,

A8 - 1

or P-G

APPENDIX

l

On-line

cable

8

(AO8B-0031-K8OllK802)

2

2 SD

SD

RD

RD 4

4

RS 25-pin male connector

1

I

5

cs

RS 5 cs

25-pin male connector

20

20 ER

ER

DR

DR CD

CD 7

7

SG

SG 1

1

FG

FG

l

DATA TRANSFER

IBM PC/AT cable

1

8

CD

CD 2

3

3

2

4

20

RD

RD

SD g-pin female connector

SD

ER

25-pin female ER

7

5

SG

SG 6

6

7

4

8

5

OR

DR

RS

RS

cs

cs 22

9

Cl

Cl

A8-2

connector

CABLES

APPENDIX

APPENDIX Companv Person

9

9

INQUIRY

FORM

INQUIRY FORM

name

Section

-

Phone

in charqe

No.

Fax No.

Address

(

1

(

)

FANUC sales person

No.

Product

name

Ordering

Version No.

code

Date of purchase

1 2 3 4

[Usage

environment]

Machine DOS

MS-DOS

EMS board: Other equipment Please IDetails

Please

(Manufacturer:

1

Version

(Manufacturer:

1

Yes

(Manufacturer:

1

type used (PC)

(printer,

I No etc.)

print out the CONFIG.SYS

(Manufacturer: and AUTOEXEC.BAT

files on a sheet

of inquiry]

use this form when you have any questlons

A9-1

about

this product.

and attach

J it to this form.

Revision FAPT LADDER-II

. 456.6

f 4.5.10 02

Apri.

‘96

4.6.3.2 4.6.4.7

01

Jan. ‘96

Edition

Date

Record

OPERATOR’S

MANUAL

(Eb66184EN)

Backup of user pro ram IS added Selecttng On-Line ? unction from Off-Line Functton IS added Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function IS added Displaylng System InformatIon is added

Contents

Edition

Date

Contents

EUROPEAN

HEADQUARTERS

- GRAND-DUCHk

DE LUXEMBOURG

GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. Zone Industrielle L6469 Echternach 4 (+352) 727979- 1 I (+352) 727979-214 BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NL.4800 GE Breda Minervum 1603A - NL.4817 ZL Breda 4 (+31) 765783 201 (CNC) = (+31) 765783 212 (PLC) I (+31) 765870 181

CZECH REPUBLIC GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. c/o GETSCO Inc. Husova 5 CZ-110 00 Praha 1

FRANCE GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. 45, rue du Bois Chaland Lisses F-91 029 Evry Cedex = (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC) 4 (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC) I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Bernhauser StraBe 45

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Elberfelder Str. 45 D-40724 Hilden 4 (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC) = (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC) I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC) I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC)

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20 D-091 17 Chemnitz

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland Bensheimer Str. 61 D-65428 Russelsheim 4 (+49) 6142 357600 I (+49) 6142 357611

GmbH

= (+420) 22440 1284 I (+420) 22440 1284

D-73765 Neuhausen = (+49) 7158 187 I (+49) 7158 187 455 I (+49) 7158 187 466

a.d.F 400 (CNC) (PLC)

= (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC) = (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC) I (+49) 371 8448 115 SWEDEN GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB Hammarbacken 4 S-l 9149 Sollentuna 4 (+46) 8 444 5520 I (+46) 8 444 552 1

ITALY GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1. Piazza Tirana 24/4B I-201 44 Milan0 4 (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC) I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC)

ITALY GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a Via Tortona 27 I-201 44 Milan0 = (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC) I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC)

SPAIN GE Fanuc Automation Espana S.A. Poligono Industrial Olaso Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-20870 Elgoibar = (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC) I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC)

SPAIN GE Power Controls Iberica S.A. Calle Mifio, S/N E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona) = (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC) I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC)

Filiale

4 = I I

SWITZERLAND GE Fanuc Automation Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz MullerstraBe 3 CH-2562 Port (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC) (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC) (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC) (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)

UNITED KINGDOM GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd. Unit 1 - Mill Square Featherstone Road Wolverton Mill South Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ = (+44) 1908 84 4000 I (+44) 1908 84 4001 01/98

TECHNICAL REPORT

No.TMN98/136E Date Nov.16,1998 General Manager of Software Laboratory

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATOR’S MANUAL 1. Communicate this report to: ○

　Your information

○

　GE Fanuc-N,

GE Fanuc-E

　FANUC Robotics 　CINCINNATI MILACRON ○

　Machine tool builder 　Sales agency 　End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE 4. Attached Document Drawing 　B-62884EN/01-4（01/67 to 67/67） No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data No. FLS1-98/B087 November.16.1998

Original section of issue

IDE V.G.M.

Manager

Person in charge

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents Name Spec.No./Ed.

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62884EN/01

Summary of Change

Group

Name/Outline

New, Add, Correct, Delete

Basic Function

Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0 Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Only for PMC-SB5/SB6 for Power Mate i-D/H) Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

Add

Applicable Date

July.1998 or later

Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.

B-62884EN/01-4 SHEET

DESCRIPTION

1/67


Contents

1. 2. 3.

Outline.......................................................................................................................................3 Applied Software .......................................................................................................................3 Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0...................................................4 3.1 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................4 3.2 Installation ..........................................................................................................................5 4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2.....................................................................................5 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ......................................................................................................6 5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................6 5.2 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................6 5.3 The Contents of Package ...................................................................................................7 5.4 Installation and Uninstallation .............................................................................................8 5.5 Operation .........................................................................................................................14

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

2/67

1.

Outline

The following function of Ladder Editing Package has been added. ・Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0 ・Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Power Mate i–D/H) ・Ladder Printer Tool for PMC This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FANUC OPEN CNC B-62884EN Operation for LADDER EDITING PACKAGE Ladder Editing Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL

2.

Applied Software

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. ・Ladder Editing Package Name Specification Version Ladder Editing Package A08B-9201-J510 3.0 or later ・PMC Control Software(Power Mate i–D/H ) Software Series PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 407B LADDER EDITING CARD 407D

Version 02(B) or later 01(A) or later

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

3/67

3.

Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0

3.1 Operating Environment (Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”) [present] ～ OS ・Microsoft Windows95 (Note1) ・DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/ English system) ・DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system) ～ [correction] ～ OS ・Microsoft Windows95 (Note1) ・Microsoft Windows NT4.0 (Note7) ・DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/ English system) ・DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system) ～ (Add “7.” in “Notes” of “2.1 Operating environment”) 7. When using this software under Windows NT4.0, please note the following items. a) Please install the software after referring to “2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows [Programs] menu. b)Please install “Service Pack 3” software. Please get this “Service Pack3” from Microsoft Corporation. c)Please define “ANSI.SYS” in the CONFIG file (config.nt) for WindowsNT4.0.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

4/67

3.2 Installation (Correct a part of the “3.2 Installation”) [present] 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95 [Programs] menu. ・・・ [correction] 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu. ・・・

4.

Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2 It is possible to program the following functional instructions in PMC-SB5/SB6 of Power Mate i-D/H a) PSGNL functional instruction (Position signal output) b) PSGN2 functional instruction (Position signal output 2)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

5/67

5.

Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

5.1 Outline (Add after “4. Error message list”) 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC 5.1 Outline Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is a print software of a sequence program which works under Windows95/NT4.0. This software is able to print a source program (FORMAT-C type) by various forms according to the print setting. This software also has preview function. 5.2 Operating Environment (Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”) [present] ～ Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6) ～ [correction] ～ Printer [Print (Off-line function)] EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] Printer which can be added by [Printers] of Windows (Note8) ～ (Add “8.” in “Notes” of “2.1 Operating environment”) 8. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is an application software for Windows95/NT4.0. For details, refer “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

6/67

5.3 The Contents of Package (Replace the “2.2 The Contents of Package”) 2.2 The Contents of Package The Ladder Editing Package is stored in 9 floppy disks listed below. The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contents. (1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-1 (2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-2 (3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-3 (4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.4) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-4 (5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-5 (6) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.6) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-6 (Note1) (7) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.7) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-7 (Note1) (8) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.8) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-8 (Note1) (9) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.9) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-9 (Note1) (Note1) Vol.6～Vol.9 are disks for Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. Details on each disk are as follows. Vol.6 Setup disk for Japanese version Vol.7 Setup disk for English version Vol.8 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (1) Vol.9 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (2)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

7/67

5.4 Installation and Uninstallation (Replace (12) in the “2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu”) (12) Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is registered in the [Programs] menu and the following screen is displayed. If you want to install continuously the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click [OK] button. If you don’t want to install this tool, click [Cancel] button. When [Cancel] button is clicked, the installation terminates.

[Note] 1. The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder Editing Package has been installed cannot be modified. 2. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for Administrator is needed. (Add (13), (14) in the “2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu”) (13) When you install the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the following dialog is displayed. Set a specified disk and click [OK] button.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

8/67

(14) The installer of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts. Please input the following items according to the instruction dialog and install this software. (a) Registration Information (Name, Company ) (b) Installation Directory (c) Program Folder Please refer to “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC” for details.

(Add after “5.1 Outline” in “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”) 5.2 Installation and Uninstallation Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is able to be installed from the setup disk for this software. (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English) [Note] 1. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for Administrator is needed. 5.2.1 Starting installer (1) Set the setup disk (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English) in a floppy disk drive. (this example is a case to set it in drive A.) (2) Execute “Setup.exe”. The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

9/67

5.2.2 Operating installation The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is basically advanced according to following procedures. 1) Installer start 2) License contract confirmation 3) User registration 4) User registration confirmation 5) Installation directory selection 6) Program folder selection 7) Installation information confirmation 8) Program copy 9) Installation completion A main operation of installation is described as follows. (1) User registration Specify your name and the company name. The number of maximum characters of the name and company name is 40 characters. If you don’t input either the name or the company name, [Next] button becomes invalid. Please input both items. After input operation ends, click [Next] button. In default, the name and the company name of the user registration of Windows are displayed.

Fig. 5.2.2.1 User registration screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

10/67

(2) Installation directory selection Specify the installation directory. When you want to install in another directory, click [Browse] button. The directory selection screen is displayed and the installation directory can be input or can be chosen. After you specify the installation directory, click [Next] button. Default directory is “(SystemDirectory)\Program Files\Ladder Printer Tool”.

Fig. 5.2.2.2 Installation directory selection screen

Fig. 5.2.2.3 Directory selection screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

11/67

(3) Program folder selection Specify the program folder. If the specified folder does not exist, new folder is created. After you specified the folder, click [Next] button. Default folder is “FAPT LADDER-II”.

Fig. 5.2.2.4 Program folder selection screen Please perform other operations of the installation according to the questions instructed by the installer. 5.2.3 Configuration after installation (1) Directory configuration The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC automatically makes the following sub-directories under the specified directory(For example “C:\PRTTOOL”). C:\PRTOOL – ENG (or JPN) There are files of the help and the resource, etc. in this sub-directory. [Note] Don’t delete the above-mentioned directory except uninstallation of this tool.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

12/67

(2) Dynamic Link Library (DLL) files Most of system files of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC are installed in the specified directory. But the following DLL files are installed in the system directory of Windows (For example : C:\Winnt40\system32). a) Mfc40.dll b) Msvcrt40.dll [Note] Don’t delete the above-mentioned files except uninstallation of this tool. (3) Program Folder and Shortcut When installing this tool, the following program folder and shortcut are made. The program folder name is specified by the installation of this tool. (Default name : “FAPT LADDER-II”) Two shortcuts are made as follows. a) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] This is a shortcut for starting Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. b) [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] (Note1) This is a shortcut for uninstallation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. [Note] 1. This shortcut is made only when installing at WindowsNT4.0. (4) Registry When installing Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the information of this tool is written in the registry of Windows. 5.2.4 Uninstallation This tool has the function of uninstallation. When you execute the uninstaller, the files, the folder, the registry, and the program folder, etc. made by the installer are deleted. Uninstaller is started according to the following procedures. (1) Common operations of WindowsNT4.0 and Windows95 1)Select [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on “Add/Remove Program Properties” of the control panel. And click [Add/Remove] button. 2)After a confirmation dialog box is displayed, click [Yes] button. The uninstaller starts. (2) Only operations of WindowsNT4.0 Another operation to start the uninstaller is to select [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on the program folder.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

13/67

5.5 Operation (Add after “5.2 Installation and uninstallation” in “5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC”) 5.3 Operation 5.3.1 Start Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting “PMCLDPRT.exe” in the directory at which the this tool is installed with the Explorer etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool. And an initial menu is displayed. 5.3.2 Termination To terminate Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click the close button of the application window, or select the [Close] of the control menu, or select the [Exit] of the “File” menu on the initial menu or the program opening menu. 5.3.3 Menu configuration The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows. (1) Initial menu Open Program

File

Exit Initial menu

View

Tool Bar

Status Bar Help

Topic

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.1 chart

Menu

configuration

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

14/67

(2) Program opening menu File Program opening menu

View

(1) Refer to Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Tool Bar

Status Bar Help

Help

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration chart

Open Program Close Program File

Print Preview Printer Exit

Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

15/67

5.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing The following example shows a basic operation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC from the beginning to print “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram” of program name “RB4_SFC”. [Operation] (1) Start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting “PMCLDPRT.exe” in the directory at which the this tool is installed with the Explorer and etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool. And an initial menu is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.1 Initial menu screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

16/67

(2) Open the file (Selecting the program) 1) Select [Open Program] of the [File] menu.

Fig. 5.3.4.2 [File] menu screen 2) Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the program name which you want to open (a program name which you want to print) or selecting the folder of the program which you want to open (a program which you want to print) on the following screen, click [Open] button. If you select a folder (directory) of a sequence program, the program is automatically opened. In this case, the folder of "RB4_SFC” is selected.

Fig. 5.3.4.3 Program selection screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

17/67

3) When the program is selected, the program-opening screen is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.4 Program-opening screen (3) Print 1) Click [Print] button of the print preview toolbar displayed in the upper part of the program-opening screen.

[Print] button

Fig. 5.3.4.5 Print preview toolbar

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

18/67

2) When clicking [Print] button, the print dialog is displayed. Click [Option] button when you want to set print options. Click [Printer] button when you want to set printer items. Refer to “5.3.8 Print screen” or “5.3.9 Printer set screen” for details.

Fig

. 5.3.4.6 Print dialog screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

19/67

3) Choose items which you want to print. In this case, click [Select] button of “Print Data” group, first, then choose “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram” which are to be printed.

Fig. 5.3.4.7 Selection item screen (1)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

20/67

4) Erase the check marks other than “Title Data” and “Ladder Diagram”.

Fig. 5.3.4.8 Selection item screen (2)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

21/67

5) When clicking [OK] button, the print starts. When you want to discontinue while printing, click [Cancel] button of the printing screen.

Fig. 5.3.4.9 Printing screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

22/67

5.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program. Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar. Select [Help] to refer to help and version information. Before specifying any program in the initial menu, [Print] button of toolbar becomes invalid and cannot be clicked. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.5 Initial menu screen 5.3.5.1 File The [File] menu has menus for specifying print program and for terminating Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

Fig. 5.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

23/67

(1) Open Program Open a printing program. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the program name is selected.

Fig. 5.3.5.1 Program selection screen Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting a program name which you want to print, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue opening the program. (2) Exit Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

24/67

5.3.5.2 View [View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and status bar. Select [Tool Bar] to switch to show and hide toolbar. Select [Status Bar] to switch to show and hide status bar.

Fig. 5.3.5.2 [View] menu screen (1) Tool Bar Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most common commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar. (2) Status Bar Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to “5.3.11 Status Bar” for details of status bar.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

25/67

5.3.5.3 Help [Help] menu is a menu related to help and version information. Select [Topic] to refer to help and to retrieve the topic. Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(a) [Help] menu screen (1) Topic Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. An index to topics, on which you can get help, is offered to you. From the opening screen, you can jump to step-bystep instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and to various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to return to the opening screen.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

26/67

Fig. 5.3.5.3(b) Help Topics screen (2) Version The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to the menu screen, click [OK] button.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(c) Version information screen 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu Program Opening Menu is a menu in the state that the program is selected. There are

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

27/67

three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in Program Opening Menu. Select [File] to operate functions related to files and printing. Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar. Select [Help] to refer to the help and version information. When specifying the program, [Print] button from the toolbar can be clicked. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu screen

5.3.6.1 File [File] menu is a menu to operate functions related to files and printing. Select [Open Program] to open an existing program. Select [Close Program] to close the program which is opened now. Select [Print] to print and to set the print option data. Select [Preview] to display the document on the screen as it would appear on the printed document. Select [Printer] to select a printer and printer connection setting.

Fig. 5.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) (1) Open Program TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

28/67

Close a program which is opened now and open a new program. File dialog is displayed as a screen where the program name is specified. Refer to “(1) Open Program in 5.3.5.1 File” for details. (2) Close Program Close a program, which is opened now. After closing the program, the menu becomes an initial menu. (3) Print The sequence program is printed, and the option of the print item is set, and the printer is set. Print dialog screen is opened. Refer to “5.3.8 Print screen” for details. (4) Preview Displays the document on the screen as it would appear on printed document. The main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages will be displayed in their printed format. Refer to “5.3.7 Preview screen” for details of preview. (5) Printer Selects a printer and set various items. Print setting dialog is displayed. Refer to “5.3.9 Printer set screen” for details. (6) Exit Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

29/67

5.3.6.2 View [View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and the display of status bar. Select “Tool Bar” to switch display and hide of toolbar. Select “Status Bar” to switch display and hide of status bar. (1) Tool Bar Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most common commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to “5.3.10 Toolbar” for details of toolbar. (2) Status Bar Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to “5.3.11 Status Bar” for details of status bar. 5.3.6.3 Help [Help] menu is a menu related to the help and version information. Select [Help] to refer to the help. Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(a) [Help] menu screen (Program opening)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

30/67

(1) Help Offers you a help of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. From the opening screen, you can jump to step-by-step instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to return to the opening screen.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(b) Help screen (2) Version The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to the menu screen, click [OK] button.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

31/67

5.3.7 Preview Screen (Program opening screen) When selecting [Preview], the preview screen is displayed. When opening the program specified with [Program Open], [Title] preview of the program is displayed. The preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time; to move back and forth through the document; to zoom in and out of pages; and to initiate a print job. When selecting [Title] and [Ladder] and etc. button of the print item on toolbar, the Preview screen corresponding to the button is displayed. The print item not selected by print dialog cannot preview, and the print item which dose not correspond by PMC model cannot be previewed.

Fig. 5.3.7 Preview screen (Program opening screen)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

32/67

Details of each button are as follows. Tool

Operation Bring up the print dialog box, to start a print job. Preview the previous printed page. Preview the next printed page. Preview one or two printed pages at a time. Zoom in the printed page. Zoom out the printed page. Return from print preview to the editing window. Display Preview of “Title Data”. Display Preview of “System Parameter”. Display Preview of “Symbol Comment”. Display Preview of “Ladder Diagram”. Display Preview of “Step Sequence Diagram”. Display Preview of “I/O Module Data”. Display Preview of “Message Data”. Display Preview of “Cross Reference”. Display Preview of “Bit Address Map”.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

33/67

5.3.8 Print Screen The sequence program is printed. Moreover, the print option and the printer is set. 5.3.8.1 Print setting Select and print the item that you want to print in this dialog. Moreover, the print option setting dialog and the printer setting dialog can be called.

Fig. 5.3.8.1 Print dialog Details of each item are as follows. [Program Name] Group Display the program name, which is opened now. [Print Data] Group

Choose the item, which you want to print. In default, [ALL] is checked. Specify to print all data. Specify the print data. The print item can be selected by checking [Select]. The checked print item is printed. The print item do not correspond by the PMC model is not displayed.

[ALL] [Select]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

34/67

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Option] Button [Printer] Button

Begins the print. Discontinue printing. Set the option concerning the print data. When this button is selected, the print option set dialog is displayed. Do the printer setting and the print setting. When this button is selected, the printer set dialog is displayed.

5.3.8.2 Title Data print Set the option of the Title Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.2 Title Data print option screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

35/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Title Data print. The integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Title Data print. In default, “Title Data” is set. Specify the title of the Title Data print. The character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title] [Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the Title Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Title Data print option.

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

36/67

5.3.8.3 System Parameter print Set the option of the System Parameter print.

Fig. 5.3.8.3 System Parameter print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the System Parameter print. The integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the System Parameter print. In default, “System Parameter” is set. Specify the title of the System Parameter print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

37/67

[Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the System Parameter print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the System Parameter print option.


5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print Set the option of the Symbol & Comment print.

Fig. 5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print option screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

38/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Symbol & Comment print. The integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. In default, “Symbol & Comment” is set. Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title] [Page Range] Group [All] [Line No.]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the line number, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page number, which you want to print.

[Page No.] [Comment] Group

Select the kind of comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. [Relay Comment] Specify to print only the relay comment. [Coil Comment] Specify to print only the coil comment. [Relay Comment/Coil Comment] Specify to print both the relay comment and the coil comment.

[Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the Symbol & Comment print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Symbol & Comment print option.


TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

39/67

5.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print Set the option of the Ladder Diagram print. (1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to be printed. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In default, “Ladder Diagram” is set. Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the net, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

[Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Net No.] [Page No.]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

40/67

[Print Program] Group [All] [Unit]

Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram name which you want to print, or select the subprogram name from combo box.

[Relay/Coil] Group

Specify the data printed for each contact. In default, [Symbol] is checked. Print the symbol data of contact. Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Symbol] [Relay Comment] [Page Feed(Sub Program)]

Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram. Default is no form feed.

[Cross Reference]

Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no cross reference.

[Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print. The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “2 Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

41/67

(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is checked. [Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is checked. [Line] Group

Specify the space between lines in the net. In default, [Narrow] is checked. Print the lines of the net with narrow space. Print the lines of the net with wide space.

[Narrow] [Wide]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

42/67

5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print Set the option of the Step Sequence Diagram print. As for the PMC model which doesn’t correspond to the step sequence, this page is not displayed. Moreover, the PMC model that corresponds to the step sequence is not displayed if there is no step sequence file either.

Fig. 5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Step Sequence Diagram print. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

43/67

[Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. In default, “Step Sequence Diagram” is set. Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title] [Print Program] Group

Select Step Sequence Program to be printed. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print selected subprogram. Input the subprogram name, which you want to print or select the subprogram name from combo box. Specify the presence of the print of the sub program number. Default is checked.

[All] [Unit] [Sub Program No.] [Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the Step Sequence Diagram print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Step Sequence Diagram print option.


TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

44/67

5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print Set the option of the I/O Module Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the I/O Module Data. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. In default, “I/O Module” is set. Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

45/67

[Print Channel] Group

Specify the print channel. Only when the PMC model is PMC-QC, it is possible to set this item. This group is not displayed for another model. Print the first channel. Default is checked. Print the second channel. Default is checked.

[1 Channel] [2 Channel] [Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the I/O Module Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the I/O Module Data print option.


TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

46/67

5.3.8.8 Message Data print Set the option of the Message Data print. When the PMC model is PMC-QC, this page is not displayed because there is no message file.

Fig. 5.3.8.8(a) Message Data print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Message Data. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Message Data. In default, “Message” is set. Specify the title of the Message Data. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

47/67

[Print Range] Group [All] [Address]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.8(b)” for the specification of range. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

[Page No.] [Preview] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the Message Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Message Data print option.


Table 5.3.8.8(b) Specification of address of Message Data Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address A5.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address A4 Specified Byte Address and Bit Address in a range of 0-7. Address range A2.3-A5.7 All addresses within the specified Specification Range

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

48/67

5.3.8.9 Cross Reference print Set the option of the Cross Reference print. (1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

49/67

[Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In default, “Cross Reference” is set. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Address]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.9(b)” for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified.

[Address Kind] [Comment] Group

Specify the printed comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. Print the relay comment. Print the coil comment.

[Relay Comment] [Coil Comment] [Double Check]

Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doubly and the double use of the function instruction is executed. Default is not checked.

[Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Cross Reference. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.


Table 5.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address)

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

50/67

Address range specification

F10.0-F12.7 F10.5-F10

All addresses within the specified range To the specified byte address from the specified bit address

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

51/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19 characters. [Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default, “STEP NO./NET NO.” is set. [Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character string is not set in default. [Print Information] Group [Step No.]

Set the printed step/net number. Print the step number. Specify it the step number is printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is “S”. Print the net number. Specify it the net number is printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is “N”. Set the number print form. In default, “Step No./Net No.” is set.

[Net No.] [Print No. Type] [Coil Guidance] Group

Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram Graphics] is checked. [Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram. [User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined. The following four can be defined, when [User Define String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13 characters. [Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Read contact. In default, “Read” is set. [Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Write contact. In default, “Write” is set. [Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Set contact. In default, “Set” is set. [Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Reset contact. In default, “Reset” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

52/67

[Line Feed Count]

Specify the number of line feed inserted between the addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified. In default, “1” is set.

[Page Feed]

Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of address. Default is checked.

5.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print Set the option of the Bit Address Map. (1) Bit Address Map print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

53/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map print. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In default, “Bit Address Map” is set. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any character string is not set in default.


Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to “Table 5.3.8.10(b)” for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Address Kind] [Using Address] [Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “2 Bit Address Map print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Bit Address Map print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.

[Preview] Button


TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

54/67

Table 5.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within Range specification the specified range F10-F20 All addresses within the specified range (2) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Fig, 5.3.8.10(c) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of the addresses. Default is checked. [Use Address Mark]

An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark. Specify one character. In default, “@” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

55/67

5.3.8.11 Common Item Set the option of a Common Item.

Fig. 5.3.8.11 Common Item option set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Guidance Message Language] Group

Specify the guide message language when the title and the system parameter are printed. [First Language] is checked in default and [First Language](combo box) is “English”. [First Language] Print in the language selected in the first language. [First/Second Language] Print in the languages selected in the First language and the Second language. [First Language] (combo box) Specify the first language. In default, "English” is set. [Second Language] (combo box) Specify the second language. When [First/Second Language] is selected, it is possible to specify. In default, "English” is set. [Print] Group Specify the cover page print. In default, [Cover] is not checked. [Cover] Specify the presence of the cover page. A file can be specified when this item is checked. The file can be selected with the “File” button. The format of the cover TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

56/67

page file which can be selected is a metafile. [OK] Button

Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Common Item.

[Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

57/67

5.3.9 Printer set screen 5.3.9.1 Printer setting Set the printer.

Fig. 5.3.9.1 Printer set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Printer] Group The printer setting and display information. [Name] Set the printer used. Choose the Default Printer; or choose the Specific Printer option and select one of the current installed printers shown in the box. You install printers and configure ports using the Windows Control Panel. [Cond] Display the state of the selected printer. [Kind] Display the kind of the selected printer. [Spot] Display the place of the selected printer. [Cmnt] Display additional information on the selected printer. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Page] Button

Save the printer setting and end printer dialog. Discontinue the printer setting and end printer dialog. Display print setting Dialog to set the number of lines per one form the margin, etc.. Refer to 5.3.9.2 - 5.3.9.6 for details.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

58/67

5.3.9.2 Line Count Set the line count, and point of character/line, and font which can be printed on one page, when printing other than the Ladder Diagram and Step Sequence Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.9.2 Line Count set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Count. In default, “72” is set. [Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Char Point. In default, “10” is set. [Line Point] Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Point. In default, “10” is set. [Font] Group [Font Face] [Font Size]

Specify font. Set the font face. In default, “System” is set. Set the font size. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size. In default, “10” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

59/67

[Reset] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button

Reset all the items of “Line Count” page to the default. Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Line Count.

[Help] Button

5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) Set the line count printed on one page, and point of character/line, and font etc., when the Ladder Diagram and the Step Sequence Diagram is printed.

Fig. 5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Count. In default, “78” is set. [Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Char Point. In default, “9” is set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

60/67

[Line Point]

Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Point. In default, “9” is set.

[Font] Group [Ladder Data] [Font Face]

Specify font. Select Ladder Data for which the Font is set. Set the font face with which selected [Ladder Data] is printed. The all default is “System”. Set the font size with which selected [Ladder Data] is printed. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size. The all default is “9”.

[Font Size]

[Reset] Button

Reset all the items of “Line Count(Ladder)” page to the default. Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Line Count(Ladder).


TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

61/67

5.3.9.4 Margin Set margin at the top, bottom, right and left in the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.4 Margin set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Upper] Set an upper margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, “20” is set. [Under] Set an under margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, “10” is set. [Right] Set a right margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, “10” is set. [Left] Set a left margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, “10” is set. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button

Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Margin.

[Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

62/67

5.3.9.5 Paper Size Set the size of the printed form.

Fig. 5.3.9.5 Paper Size set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Size] Set the size of the form. In default, “A4” is set. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button

Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Paper Size.

[Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

63/67

5.3.9.6 Print Type Set various items concerning the frame added to the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.6 Print Type set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Frame Print] Group Set the presence of the frame and the character string printed. If [Frame Print] is not checked, the following setting cannot be done. [File] Specify the metafile name used when the frame is printed. The file name can be selected with the “File” button. [Data] Specify the data for which the character string, coordinates, and font are set.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

64/67

[String]

Specify the printed character string set with [Data]. The data specification by the following forms is also possible. %[T]: Print the title data. %[S]: Print the sub title data. %[P]: Print the program name. %[N]: Print page number. Default is as follows. String Data 1: %[P] String Data 2: %[T] String Data 3: %[N] String Data 4: %[S] String Data 5 is not set. Specify the print beginning position (X coordinates) of the character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter (mm). Default is as follows. String Data 1: 10 String Data 2: 75 String Data 3: 180 String Data 4: 75 String Data 5: 0 Specify the print beginning position (Y coordinates) of the character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter (mm). Default is as follows. String Data 1: 10 String Data 2: 10 String Data 3: 10 String Data 4: 15 String Data 5: 0 Specify the font set with [Data]. Specify the font face set with [Data]. The all default is “System”. Specify the font size set with [Data]. The all default is “12”.

[X Pos]

[Y Pos]

[Font] Group [Font Face] [Font Size] [OK] Button [Cancel] Button

Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Print type.

[Help] Button

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

65/67

5.3.10 Toolbar The toolbar is displayed below the menu bar at the top of the application window. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the “View” menu.

Fig. 5.3.10 Toolbar Details of each button are as follows. Tool

Operation Open an existing document. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC displays the open dialog box, in which you can locate and open the desired file. It is a shortcut to “5.3.5.1 (1)Program Open” and “5.3.6.1 (1)Program Open”. Open the print dialog. It is a shortcut to “5.3.6.1 (3)Print”. However, this button is invalid and cannot be selected by an initial menu because the program is not selected. Display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. It is a shortcut to “5.3.5.3 (2)Version” and “5.3.6.3 (2)Version”. Use the Context Help command to obtain help on some portion of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. When you choose the Toolbar's Context Help button, the mouse pointer will change to an arrow and question mark. Then click somewhere in the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window, such as another Toolbar button. The Help topic will be shown for the item you clicked.

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

66/67

5.3.11 Status Bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window. To display or hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the “View” menu. The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys to navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you depress them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. The center area of the status bar displayed the program name and the PMC model name. The right area of the status bar displayed the state of ON/OFF of a special key. Pane1 Simple help Pane2 Program name Pane3 PMC model Pane4 State of key : Latched down is displayed [Scroll Lock] Key, [NUM Lock] Key, and [Caps Lock] Key from the right Simple help

Program name PMC model

State of key

Fig. 5.3.11 Status Bar

TITLE


01

98.11.13

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

67/67

TECHNICAL REPORT

No. TMN99/30E

Date,4 March 1999 General Manager of Application Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL 1. Communicate this report to: O Your information O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawin B-66184EN/02-6 (01/25 to 25/25) g No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data


IDE General Manager

Section Manager

Person in Charge

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S MANUAL

01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

1/26


Type of applied technical documents Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

Group

Name/Outline


Applicable Date

Add

Feb. 1999 or later

Programming PMC-NB6 Saving and restoring the print options Changing the print option set screens

Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenanc e Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

2/26


Contents

1. 2. 3.

Outline.......................................................................................................................................4 Applied Software .......................................................................................................................4 Programming PMC-NB6 ............................................................................................................5 3.1 Supported PMC models .....................................................................................................5 3.2 System parameters ............................................................................................................6 4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC........................................8 4.1 Changing Menu configuration.............................................................................................8 4.2 Initial menu.......................................................................................................................10 4.3 Program opening menu ....................................................................................................12 5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ...............................................13 5.1 Ladder Diagram print........................................................................................................13 5.2 Cross Reference print.......................................................................................................16 5.3 Bit Address Map print .......................................................................................................20 6. Operating environment ............................................................................................................22 7. Available characters in symbol ................................................................................................24 8. Config file ................................................................................................................................25

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

3/26

1.

Outline

The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. - Programming PMC-NB6 - Saving and restoring the print options - Changing the print option set screens This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER-II BOperation for OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

2.

Applied Software

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER-II Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 3.2 or later PMC Control Software (for Series 15i ) Software PMC-NB6 control software

Series 404A

Version 01 or later

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

4/26

3.

Programming PMC-NB6

3.1 Supported PMC models (Correct a part of the “For PMC models” table of “1.1 Overview”) [present] Abbreviations PMC Models PMC-SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1 PMC-SA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3 .... .... PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2 [correction] Abbreviations PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3

PMC Models FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3

PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6

FANUC PMC-MODEL NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB6

.... ....

(Correct a part of the “1.2.2 PMC models to be supported”) [present] PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 (Note1) .... .... PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC (Note1) [correction] PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 .... .... PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC (Note1)

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

5/26

3.2 System parameters (Add after the “(ii) PMC-SC3/SC4/QC/NB/NB2” of “4.5.2.6 (4)System parameter editing screen and input item for each PMC model“) (iv) PMC-NB6

Fig. 4.5.2.6(c)

Refer to the “PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL”(B-61863E) about setting value of Each System parameters.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

6/26

(Add after the “④PMC-QC/NB/NB2” of “4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (Single-Format) (a)Parameter“) ⑤ PMC-NB6

%@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-NB6 7 100 % [EOB]

2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used) 4. PMC model (PMC-NB6) 7. Ladder execution time (1% to 150%)

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

3. YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

7/26

4.

Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

4.1 Changing Menu configuration (Replace the “6.3.3 Menu configuration”) 6.3.3 Menu configuration The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows. (1) Initial menu

Initial menu

File

Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.1(b)

View

Tool Bar

Status Bar Help

Topic

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.1(a) Menu configuration chart Open Program Save Option File File Restore Option File Exit


TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

8/26

(2) Program opening menu File Program opening menu

Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.2(b)

View

Tool Bar

Status Bar Help

Help

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration h Open Program Close Program File

Save Option File Restore Option File Print Preview Printer Exit


TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

9/26

(Replace the “Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen” of “6.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing”)

Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

4.2 Initial menu (Correct a part of the “6.3.5 Initial menu”) [present] 6.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program. … … [correction] 6.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program or to save a option file or restore a option file. … …

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

10/26

(Replace the “Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen” of “6.3.5.1 File”)

Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen (Insert after the “(1) Open Program” of “6.3.5.1 File”) (2) Save Option File Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file. (3) Restore Option File Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

11/26

4.3 Program opening menu (Replace the “Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) of “6.3.6.1 File ”)

Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) (Insert after the “(2) Close Program” of “6.3.6.1 File”) (3) Save Option File Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file. (4) Restore Option File Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

12/26

5.

Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

5.1 Ladder Diagram print (Replace the “(1)Ladder Diagram print option screen” of “6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print”) (1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to be printed. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In default, “Ladder Diagram” is set. Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

13/26

[Print Range] Group [All] [Net No.] [Page No.]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the net, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

[Print Program] Group

Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram name which you want to print, or select the subprogram name from combo box.

[All] [Unit]

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed. [Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram. Default is no form feed. [Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print. The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

[Preview] Button


TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

14/26

(Replace the “(2)Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen” of “6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print”) (2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Step No./Net No.] group Specify the presence of the step number / net number. [Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is checked. [Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is checked. [Line] Group

Specify the space between lines in the net. In default, [Narrow] is checked. Print the lines of the net with narrow space. Print the lines of the net with wide space.

[Narrow] [Wide] [Relay/Coil] Group

Specify the data printed for each contact. In default, [Symbol] is checked. Print the symbol data of contact. Print the relay comment data of contact.

[Symbol] [Relay Comment] [Cross Reference]

Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no cross reference.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

15/26

5.2 Cross Reference print (Replace the “(1)Cross Reference print option screen” of “6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print”) (1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set. [Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In default, “Cross Reference” is set. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

16/26

[Print Range] Group [All] [Address]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to “Table 6.3.8.9(b)” for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified.

[Address Kind]

[Print Guidance] Group

Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19 characters. Set a guidance of the output form. In default, “STEP NO./NET NO.” is set. Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character string is not set in default.

[Guidance] [Sub Guidance] [Page/Line Feed] Group [Line Feed Count]

Specify form feed. Specify the number of line feed inserted between the addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified. In default, “1” is set. Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of address. Default is checked.

[Page Feed]

[Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Cross Reference. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.


TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

17/26

Table 6.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within the range specification specified range F10.5-F10 To the specified byte address from the specified bit address

(Replace the “(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen” of “6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print”) (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

18/26

Details of each item are as follows. [Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number. [Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number is printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is “S”. [Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number is printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is “N”. [Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, “Step No./Net No.” is set. [Coil Guidance] Group

Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram Graphics] is checked. [Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram. [User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined. The following four can be defined, when [User Define String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13 characters. [Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Read contact. In default, “Read” is set. [Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Write contact. In default, “Write” is set. [Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Set contact. In default, “Set” is set. [Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Reset contact. In default, “Reset” is set.

[Comment] Group

Specify the printed comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. Print the relay comment. Print the coil comment.

[Relay Comment] [Coil Comment] [Double Check]

Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doubly and the double use of the function instruction is executed. Default is not checked.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

19/26

5.3 Bit Address Map print (Replace the “6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print”) 6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print Set the option of the Bit Address Map.

Fig. 6.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map print. An integer value can be set. In default, “1” is set.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

20/26

[Print Title] Group

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In default, “Bit Address Map” is set. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any character string is not set in default.


Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to “Table 6.3.8.10(b)” for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Print only the address used. Default is checked.

[Address Kind] [Using Address] [Page Feed] Group [Page Feed]

Specify form feed. Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of the addresses. Default is checked.

[Use Address Mark] Group [Use Address Mark]

Specify the use address mark. An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark. Specify one character. In default, “@” is set.

[Details…] Button

Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to “2 Bit Address Map print option detailed screen” for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Bit Address Map print. This button is effective when any print item is selected.

[Preview] Button

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

21/26

[OK] Button

Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.

[Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Table 6.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within Range specification the specified range F10-F20 All addresses within the specified range

6.

Operating environment

(Correct a part of the “2 Operating environment”) [present] .... Memory Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 2) EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 3) .... [correction] .... Memory

Conventional memory 540 Kbytes or more (Note 2) EMS and/or XMS memory 4 Mbytes or more of EMS and/or XMS in total (recommended) (Note 3)

....

(Correct a part of the “Note 2” of “2 Operating environment”) (Note 2) Even if the computer has 640 Kbytes memory, the free memory may be less than 540 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free space in memory can be checked with the DOS command CHKDSK or MEM.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

22/26

(Correct a part of the “About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:” of “2 Operating environment”) [present] About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as a temporary area. Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance. (1) Expansion memory … … [correction] About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder, symbol & comment data and On-line Function as a temporary area. A part of function in FAPT LADDER-II dose not run if there is no EMS and/or XMS memory. EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary. Enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance. (1) Expansion memory .... .... (4) On-line Function When using On-line function, 1Mbytes or more EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

23/26

7.

Available characters in symbol

(Correct a part of the “(2) Symbol & comment specification list” of “1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data”) (Correct a part of the “2.1 Operating environment”) [present] (2) Symbol & comment specification list (a) For input signal and internal relay Specification Symbol … Available ASCII characters characters (lower-case alphabetic characters not allowed) Maximum cha. 16byte Maximum 20,000 entries (Note) number Duplicated Not allowed … definition Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or CRT/MDI shorter. [correction] (2) Symbol & comment specification list (a) For input signal and internal relay Specification Symbol Available ASCII characters characters (lower-case alphabetic characters and space character are not allowed） Maximum cha. 16byte Maximum 20,000 entries (Note) number Duplicated Not allowed definition Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or CRT/MDI shorter

…

…

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

24/26

8.

Config file

(Replace the “2.1 Config.sys”) 2.5 CONFIG.SYS To use the system, make the following modifications to the CONFIG file. The CONFIG file of each OS is as follows. a) For WindowsNT4.0 CONFIG.NT b) For Windows95 CONFIG.SYS c) For DOS CONFIG.SYS

(1) When the system is used under WindowsNT4.0 [ The following example shows the case when WindowsNT4.0 is installed in C:\WINNT ] Specify the “ANSI.SYS” in “CONFIG.NT” file. The “CONFIG.NT” file and “ANSI.SYS” file are usually in the following folder. Check if these file are in the folder. C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\ Add the following line to “CONFIG.NT” file by using a text editor. devicehigh=%SystemRoot%\system32\ansi.sys (2) When the system is used under Windows 95 [ The following example shows the case when Windows 95 is installed in C:\WINDOWS ] DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\ANSI.SYS DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE When the system is used under Windows95, the Japanese input system is not specified in the “CONFIG.SYS” file. In DOS mode, only the DOS version Japanese input system can be used. The DOS version Japanese input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command. For details of the installation method, see “DOSIME.BAT” under the COMMAND director of Windows and “DOSIME.SYS” under the root directory of the start-up disk. (3)When the system is used under DOS [ The following example shows the case when DOS is already installed in C:\DOS ] DEVICE=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYS DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIME.SYS DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIMEK.SYS

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

25/26

[ About device drivers ] a)ANSI.SYS (required) The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot be omitted. b)EMM386.EXE This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. When using another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of setting required in “CONFIG.SYS”. c)MSIME.SYS / MSIMEK.SYS This device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language input. When using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in “CONFIG.SYS”. Notes 1. All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS. The specification of switches and parameters may be required for the above settings. For details, refer to the on-line help or the relevant manual for the WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS. 2. When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with the memory card for details of the setting required in CONFIG file. 3. Some device drivers may adversely affect the FAPT LADDER-II. If a problem is anticipated, specify only “ANSI.SYS” in CONFIG file. Omit the specified, FAPT LADDER-II will support only English, but allows any contention with other device drivers to be identified quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix 7.

TITLE


01

99.02.26

Ino

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

New making

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

26/26

TECHNICAL REPORT

No. TMN99/145E

Date 15 October, 1999 General Manager of Application Software Development Department

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL 1. Communicate this report to: O Your information O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawin B-66184EN/02-7 (01/16 to 16/16) g No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data No. AS0S2-99/A030 October.15.1999


IDE General Manager

Section Manager

Person in Charge


Type of applied technical documents Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

Group

Name/Outline


Basic Function

I/O Link expansion (Only for PMC-SB6 for Series 16i /18i /21i) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password (Only for PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) for Series 16i /18i /21i)

Add

Applicable Date

Oct. 1999 or later

Optional Function Unit Maintenanc e Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE

K.Yamamoto New making DESIG.

DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

2/17


Contents

1. Outline____________________________________________________________________ 4 2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________ 4 3. I/O Link expansion ________________________________________________________ 5 3.1

The number of I/O Link channel ______________________________________________ 5

3.2

Mnemonic Editing ____________________________________________________________ 6

4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password _________________________________________________ 8 5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES ________________________________________________ 15

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

3/17

1.

Outline

The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. - I/O Link expansion - Improvement of partial protect funciotn of ladder program by special password This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER-II BOperation for OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

2.

Applied Software

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER-II (1) I/O Link expansion Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 04.0 or later (2) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 03.3 or later PMC Control Software (for Series 16i /18i /21i ) (1) I/O Link expansion Software Series PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 406A

Version 15 or later

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

4/17

3.

I/O Link expansion

3.1 The number of I/O Link channel (Insert after the “(3) Specifying the direction for online communication” in "4.4.1 Program selection") (4) Specifying the number of I/O Link channel When models in which more than two channels can be set is selected, the following menu is displayed.

In this menu., it selects the number of I/O Link channel. (When model is PMC-QC this menu is not displayed, because PMC-QC always has two channels.)

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

5/17

3.2 Mnemonic Editing (Correct a part of the “①PMC-PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 “ "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) (a)Parameter") [present] %@0↓ ① PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 2 BINARY↓ 2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3 NO↓ 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used) 4 PMC-RB4 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC%↓ RA5/ [EOB] PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/ PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ))

[correction] ① PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 %@0↓ 2 BINARY↓ 3 NO↓ 4 PMC-RB4 %↓ [EOB]

2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used) 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMCRA5/ PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/ PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB6(IO-2)/PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2))

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

6/17

(Add to the "[Setting data table to "PMC model" parameter（each PMC model）] " of "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files(single-format) (a)Parameter ") [present] PMC model PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 PMC-SA5 PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

Setting data (Normal-width character string) PMC-RA1 PMC-RA3 PMC-RA5 PMC-RB3 PMC-RB4 PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB5 PMC-RB6 PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

[correcting] PMC model PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 PMC-SA5 PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB6(IO-2) PMC-SB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

Setting data (Normal-width character string) PMC-RA1 PMC-RA3 PMC-RA5 PMC-RB3 PMC-RB4 PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB5 PMC-RB6 PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB6(IO-2) PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

7/17

4.

The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password

(Replace the “4.5.4.3 Password set function”) 4.5.4.3 Password set function This function is supported only in the series 15-B/16/18/21-B, Series 16/18/21-C, Power Mate-H, Series 15i, Series 16i /18i /21i –A, and Power Mate i –D/H. It enables a password to be added during compilation. The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the CTR/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Setting program options.) (1) Password (a)Password types Type Password(R) Password (R/W)

Use Password to allow display on the CNC Password to allow display and editing on the CNC

(b)Password setting(compile) 1 When no password → Go to ⑩. When password RW&R,RW,R After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify whetherto use a password.。 Do you enter password ?(Y/N) To set a password, press Y → password RW&R or R go to②. It is unnecessary to set a password, press N → password RW go to ⑥. 2 The password® set screen appears. Enter password (R) 3 Enter a password ・A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. ・Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.) ・It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *,#,and @).

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

8/17

・Some character strings are unusable. If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed. In such a case, use another character string. ・An entered password is not displayed on the screen. ・If the key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a password is not specified. → If password=RW&R go to ⑥. If password=R go to ⑩. ・When is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued → go to ①. 4 The password configuration screen appears. Verification(R) 5 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly. ・When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is accepted ・When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed. You are allowed to retry entering twice. ・When is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued → go to ①. If password=R is specified. → go to ⑩. ⑥The password(R/W) set screen appears. Enter password (R/W) ⑦Enter a password(R/W). ・A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. ・Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.) ・It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *,#,and @). ・Some character strings are unusable. If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed. In such a case, use another character string. ・An entered password is not displayed on the screen. ・If the key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a password is not specified. → go to ⑩. ・When is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued → go to ①. ⑧The password confirmation screen appears. Verification(R/W)

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

9/17

⑨You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly. ・When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is accepted ・When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed. You are allowed to retry entering twice. ・When is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued → go to ①. ⑩Compilation begins.

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

10/17

(2)Special password (a)Partial protecting function Partial protection of a ladder program can be done by dividing the subprogram area into the protected area and the non-protected area by using a special password. Protected area : Inputting password is necessary to display and edit a ladder program on CRT/MDI. Non-protected area : To display and edit on CRT/MDI are permitted without inputting password. (b)Applied PMC models This function can be used by following PMCs with step sequence function. PMC-RB4(STEP)/RC4(STEP) /RB6(STEP)/RB6(STEP,IO-2)/NB2(STEP) (c)Protected area / Non-protected area The protected area and the non-protected area are decided according to the subprogram number. Refer to the following for details. Main-program LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 Subprogram P1～P1499 P1500～P2000

Protected Protected Protected Protected Non-Protected

(d)Setting of password The password(R/W) which starts with "#" is to be set. Example) #FANUC For the operation to set the special password, refer to "(1) Password (b)Password setting(compile)" because it is similar to a normal password.

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

11/17

(Replace the “4.5.5.3 Password”) 4.5.5.3 Password (1)Password To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password. Set password type Both password(R) and password(R/W) Password(R/W) Password (R)

Password type to be entered Password (R/W) Password (R/W) Password (R)

①After the discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears. Enter password(R) Note) If an R/W password has been set up, “Password(R/W)” is displayed. ②When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins. If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing discontinues.(You are allowed to retry entering twice.) When is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected. (2)Special password There are two ways of decompilations of an object file with a special password as follows. (a)Decompilation of all programs (Necessary a special password input) The procedure of a decompilation is similar to that of an object protected by a 'non-special' password. Refer to "(1)password". (b)Decompilation of non-protected subprograms area only (Not necessary a special password input) In OFF-LINE FUNCTION, it is possible to edit only non-protected subprograms area, (A printout is also possible. But it is impossible to convert to a mnemonic file because a source program of a protected area is not created.) Re-compilation after modifying of non-protected area is possible. But the password set function is disabled. A special password in a decompiled object file is automatically embedded and the protected area is re-protected.

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

12/17

The decompilation procedure is as follows. i) Select [EXEC] for a decompilation. a password input screen is displayed. Enter password (R/W) ii)To decompile only subprograms of non-protected area, press key without entering a password. To cancel a decompilation, press key.

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

13/17

(Correct a part of the “4.5.7.1 Compile“ (4) Password in "4.5.7 Setting program options") [present] (4) Password This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil time. [NO] [RW&R] [RW] [R]

: Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.) : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the password (R) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

[correcting] (4) Password This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil time. [NO] [RW&R] [RW] [R]

: Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.) : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the password (R) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Note) Password setting is disabled when only a non-protected subprograms area of an object file with a special password has been decompiled. To enable a password setting, please decompile all programs with a special password input . (Please refer to “(2) Special password” in “4.5.5.3 Password”)

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

14/17

5.

DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Replace “APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES” APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLE Use the cables below to transfer data from PC to a CNC, P-G(P-G Mark II or P-G Mate), or ROM writer(FA writer or PMC writer). 1. For IBM PC/AT (1) A02B-02008

CNC / P-G / ROM writer

IBM PC/AT

9-pin female t


CD(1) RD(2)

(2)SD

SD(3)

(3)RD

ER(4)

(6)DR

SG(5)

(7)SG

DR(6)

(8)CD

RS(7)

(5)CS

CS(8)

(4)RS (20)ER

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

15/17

(2) A08B-0031-

IBM PC/AT CABLE


IBM PC/AT

9-pin female connector

25-pin female connecto r

25-pin male connecto r


CD(1)

(8)CD

SD(2)

(2)SD

RD(2)

(3)RD

RD(3)

(3)RD

SD(3)

(2)SD

RS(4)

(4)RS

ER(4)

(20)ER

CS(5)

(5)CS

SG(5)

(7)SG

DR(6)

(6)DR

ER(20) DR(6)

RS(7)

(4)RS

CS(8)

(5)CS

CI(9)

(22)CI

(20)ER (6)DR

CD(8)

(8)CD

SG(7)

(7)SG

FG(1)

(1)FG

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

16/17

２．For IBM PS/2 A08B-0031-

IBM PS/2 CABLE


IBM PS/2




SD(2)

(2)SD

SD(2)

(2)SD

RD(3)

(3)RD

RD(3)

(3)RD

RS(4)

(4)RS

RS(4)

(4)RS

CS(5)

(5)CS

CS(5)

(5)CS

ER(20)

(20)ER

DR(6)

(6)DR

CD(8)

(8)CD

SG(7)

(7)SG

FG(1)

(1)FG


(20)ER

ER(20) DR(6)

(6)DR

CD(8)

(8)CD

SG(7)

(7)SG

FG(1)

(1)FG

TITLE


01

99.10.15

EDIT

DATE


DRAW.NO.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

17/17

TECHNICAL REPORT

NO. TMN 00/108E Date 7 July, 2000 General Manager of Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL 1. Communicate this report to: O

Your information

O

GE Fanuc-N,

GE Fanuc-E

FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O

Machine tool builder Sales agency End user

2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawing B-66184EN/02-8 1/9 to 9/9 No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data No. FLB7-00/7023

IDE

Original section of issue FLB7 FLB74 Person in Manager Chief Charge


Type of applied technical documents Name Spec.No./Ed.

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change

Group

Name/Outline

Basic Function


Applicable Date

Add

Jun. 2000 or later

Improvement of program option setting.

Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S

01

00.06.26

Newly Registration.

MANUAL DRAW.NO.

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

1/9


Contents

1. Outline ____________________________________________________________________3 2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________3 3. Setting Program Options ___________________________________________________4 3.1

Menu Display __________________________________________________________ 4

3.2

Compile _______________________________________________________________ 4

3.3

Mnemonic Editing______________________________________________________ 6

3.4

Modifying Program Option Initial Values(OPTION.CNF) __________________ 6

4. Symbol & Comment Editing _______________________________________________8 5. Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program ________________________9

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATOR’S MANUAL DRAW.NO.

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

2/9

1.

Outline The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. Improvement of program option setting. This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual FAPT LADDER-II

Spec.No. B-66184EN

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

2.

Reference Items Operation for FAPT LADDER-II

Applied Software The additional functions described here in apply to the following software. Name FAPT LADDER-II

Specification

Version

A08B-9201-J503

04.4 or later

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

3/9

3. Setting Program Options 3.1 Menu Display (Changing of Figure 4.5.7 in [ 4.5.7 Setting Program Options ])

Program option set-up C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Compile Decompile

Mnemonic edit

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3.2 Compile (Add to since item (4) paragraph of [4.5.7.1 Compile]) (5) sym. ( too long strings ) When you compile the source program which contains the symbol which exceeds six characters. How to treat the input signal and the internal relay address is specified. [ ERROR ] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is considered to be an error, and the compiler is not compiled. (Specification in the past) [ IGNORE]

The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is replaced with six characters' worth of a space code and compiled.

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

4/9

(6) Coil comment language When you compile the source program. The form by which the coil comment is output to the object file is specified. [ English ]

The Japanese coil comment is replaced with space and the compiler is output to the object file. [ Japanese] The Japanese coil comment is converted into the code data and the compiler is output to the object file. (Changing of Figure 4.5.7.1 in [ 4.5.7.1 Compile])

Program option set-up C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[ Compile ]

1

condense symbol/comment sym.( too long strings ) net comment password multiple used check Coil comment language 2

3

4

5

6

:[OFF/ON] :[NOT USE /USE] :[ERROR/IGNORE] :[NO/POINTERS] :[NO/RW&R/RW/R] :[NO/YES] :[English/Japanese] 7

8

9

10

Note 1) A past "Symbol" item changed the name to "Symbol & coil comment". Note 2) When the parameter of "Symbol/Comment" is assumed "ON", setting the parameter of "sym. ( too long strings )" becomes possible. Note3) Japanese is not displayed on the NC side as for setting the coil comments language, and set "English" mode, please.

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

5/9

3.3 Mnemonic Editing (Changing of Item 4.5.7.3 in [ 4.5.7.3 Mnemonic Editing]) The thing to choose “Mnemonic edit” from the menu screen displays the option of a mnemonic edit. (1) Warning detail out The method of outputting the warning when convert from a mnemonic file to the source file is specified. (Warning number K:W-4131, K:W-4133, and K:W-4139) [NO]

Conversion from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source ends. The generated warning and the frequency are output. [YES] The warning is output in the location where the warning is generated while converting from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source. (Specification in the past) Program option set-up C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[Mnemonic edit] Warning detail out :[ NO/YES ]

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 4.5.7.3

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

6/9

3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF) (The item number of "4.5.7.3 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)" is changed to "4.5.7.4") (The item number of "Table 4.5.7.3" is changed to "4.5.7.4", and the following option items are added) Subsection *COMPAILE

Option Comment_lang

Setting and function 0: The em-size character of the coil comment is replaced with space so far and output to the object file. 1: The em-size character of the coil comment is output to the object file by the code.

*MNEMONIC

Symbol_over

0:

The address, which includes the symbol that exceeds six characters, is not compiled. 1: Address is compiled after the symbol, which exceeds six characters, is converted into the space code.

Warning_full

0: When conversion into the source ends, the warning is output. 1: Warning is outputs at each warning generation.

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

7/9

4.Symbol & Comment Editing Clause (11) of "4.5.2.3 Symbol & Comment editing " is added. (11) Editing screen (Additional content) When the "sym.( too long strings )" option is set to "IGNORE". The display value of the registration number of symbols and the capacity of the coil comment of edit (symbol & comment) screen changes. Example: The symbol of NO.6 from NO.3 by seven characters or more. When assuming that the coil comment is all 30 characters. Registration number of symbols

Capacity of the coil comment

Edit (symbol & comment) SB6 C:\FLADDER\ SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180 NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006

* X00000.0 A1234 * X00000.1 A12345 X00000.2 A123456 Y00000.3 A1234567 Y00000.4 A12345678 Y00000.5 A123456789

AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..…AAAAAAA

(1) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "ERROR". Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180 (2) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "IGNORE". Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000180 00000180

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

8/9

5. Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File "4.5.8.2 Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File " Notes are added to the clause.

Notes: When the coil comment which includes the alphabetic small letter of normal-width made in the form of format A or B converts a mnemonic file into the source program, an alphabetic small letter is replaced with the capital letter.

6. Warning Addition to the item of “5.9.3 Warning” of "5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST".

Number

Message

I:W-4503

$ : The character * in the comment may not be displayed on the CNC.

I:W-4504

$ : Double-sized space character in comment was changed to two singlesized spaces.

I:W-4505

Too long strings for symbol data.

Contents Because the character of no character code in CNC is used to comment, the character might not be able to be displayed. Because the em-size space code was used to comment, the em-size space code is replaced with the normal-width space code (two characters). Because the symbol data exceeded the limitation of the number of characters, the symbol is deleted. (Comment is effective)

TITLE


EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

CUST.


DESCRIPTION

9/9

Fanuc Fapt Ladder II Operator

Recommend Documents